JP2020138082A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interest.SOLUTION: Determination means determines each of first determination and second determination. Display means dynamically displays each of first identification information indicating a determination result of the first determination, and second identification information indicating a determination result of the second determination. A dynamic display period of the second identification information is varied by satisfying variable conditions based on the dynamic display of the first identification information. Therefore, a dynamic display period of the second identification information is varied by the dynamic display of the first identification information, thus allowing a player to become interested in both dynamic indications, and enhancing the player's interest.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. Some award games are executed. By setting a plurality of types of privilege games to be executed, a game machine has been proposed in which the interest of the player can be changed according to the privilege games to be executed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-265765

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having further improved the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition, and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition. , A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means and the second identification information based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination, and the display means for the first identification. The second identification is performed when a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the information and the second identification information and a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied. It has a variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of information.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 grants a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed in the gaming machine according to claim 1. It has a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege when the second identification information based on the determination result is displayed.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the variable condition is satisfied based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the variable condition is that the number of times the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed becomes a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times or more. It is established based on.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter in the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4. Based on the variable ball entry means, a specific area in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter the ball based on the establishment of the passing condition, and the second privilege being granted by the privilege granting means. The variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and the privilege granting means is said to be special when the game ball enters the specific area. It grants benefits.

The gaming machine according to claim 6 is the gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the special privilege is such that a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed.

The gaming machine according to claim 7 is determined by the discrimination means as a specific first discrimination result as the first discrimination or a specific second discrimination result as the second discrimination in the gaming machine according to claim 5. Based on the above, the special privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is provided, and the special privilege is determined by the determination means as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. The probability is set high until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine according to claim 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 7, wherein the dynamic display executing means provides the display means with the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively. When the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the predetermined identification information can be dynamically displayed at the same time. When the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the determination result is completed first, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result is based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. (2) It has a termination means for displaying identification information and ending the process.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the determination means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and the determination means thereof. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the first determination and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information. When the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information and the variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied, the second identification information is dynamically displayed. It has a variable control means for changing the dynamic display period in the above. This has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable condition is satisfied based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in a predetermined determination result to which the first privilege, which is more disadvantageous than the second privilege, is given.

According to the game of claim 4, in addition to the effect of the game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the variable condition is satisfied based on the number of times the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed becomes a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times or more. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of times the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines of claims 2 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the game ball that has entered the variable entry means satisfy the passing conditions. A variable control that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state based on the specific area where the ball can be entered based on the above and the second privilege being granted by the privilege granting means. The privilege granting means grants the special privilege when the game ball enters the specific area. Therefore, when the second privilege is given, it is possible to enjoy whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 5, the special privilege is such that a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the privilege game is executed. It has the effect of improving the interest of the people.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the privilege of executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination by the determination means as the specific first determination result as the first determination or the specific second determination result as the second determination. The special privilege has a game execution means, and the probability of being determined by the determination means as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is set high until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, by passing through a specific area, the state of the game can be changed in an advantageous manner for the player, and there is an effect that the player can give a sense of accomplishment that the state of the game can be changed by himself / herself.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 8, in addition to the effect of any one of claims 2 to 7, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the first identification based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is completed first, the specific identification information is displayed. It has a terminating means for displaying and terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information can be interested in, and a fresh game can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a first variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (d) are schematic views schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) to (d) are schematic views schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the relationship between the stop timing of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (A) and (b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the stop timing of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fusion effect selection table in the ROM of the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the work RAM of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a forced stop process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a small hit stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. (A) is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 forced stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller, and (b) is the special figure 2 small hit stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which showed. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting process executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit ending process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation time measurement process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the fusion effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing the V winning effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a per-variation pattern selection table provided in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) to (c) are voices in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 1 variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 variation start processing 2 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device according to the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the RAM configuration of the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. (A) to (e) are schematic views schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device according to the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a rear image provided in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the details of the selection table schematically, and (c) is the schematic diagram which which typically showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol change start processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation start processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 small hit stop process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 3 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the back image change processing executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is an enlarged perspective view of the Kroon provided in the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation start processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change stop process 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device according to the sixth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are provided in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of various tables schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing 6 executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing 6 executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit ending process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 variation start processing 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the SP reach selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) is the schematic diagram of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of RAM schematically. (A) is a determination value calculation pattern table provided in the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) to (d) are the voice in the modified example of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the rear image selection table provided in the RAM in a lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the back image change process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pattern selection table after the end of the jackpot provided in the ROM of the main control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a modified diagram of the modified embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in an example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 73, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown. In addition to rails 61 and 62 (not shown), general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64a, second winning opening 64b, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) ) 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64a, the second winning opening 64b, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 64b, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37A and the second symbol display device 37B are configured to be able to operate (variate) at the same time, and the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time. The configuration is such that the player can be notified (variably displayed at the same time).

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As a jackpot type determined here, a 15R jackpot (big hit A) is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. .. Here, the "15R jackpot (big hit A)" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the open flat door of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and a game ball is reached to the second specific winning opening 650a. This is a jackpot in which the jackpot round that allows the player to enter the ball is executed up to 15 times.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, if it is determined that the pachinko machine is not a big hit in the big hit lottery conducted when the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b is won, it is determined to be a small hit. If it is determined to be a small hit, the type of small hit is determined. As the small hit type determined here, small hit A, small hit B and small hit C are set as small hits based on the entry into the first winning opening 64a. Further, a small hit D is set as a small hit based on a ball entering the second winning opening 64b. In the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, when the result of the lottery is a small hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a symbol corresponding to the small hit type is displayed.

Here, the "small hit A" is a small hit with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, and is a small hit in which the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened / closed at most twice. .. Similarly, "small hit B", "small hit C", and "small hit D" are small hits with a maximum number of rounds of 2, but each period during which the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened ( The time) is configured to be different. The details will be described later, but it is set so that whether or not the V winning switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 can win a prize differs depending on the type of small hit.

Specifically, in the small hit A to the small hit D, the switching member 65h rotates downward and the guide piece 65h2 rotates downward for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit game, and the special discharge port 65e2 The flow path to is open. Then, in "small hit A", the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed 2 times for 1 second x 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game, and in "small hit B", the opening / closing door is opened / closed 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game. 65f1 is opened and closed for 1 second x 2 times, and in "small hit C", the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and closed for 1 second x 2 times 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game. On the other hand, in the "small hit D", the opening and closing operation is performed twice for 1 second from the start of the small hit game (immediately after the start of the small hit game).

That is, in the small hit A to the small hit C, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, the switching member 65h has already moved to the normal discharge port 65e1. It has been switched to the state of guiding the ball (see FIG. 10B) (hereinafter referred to as the normal guidance state), and the game ball enters the first variable winning device 65 with small hits A to C. However, it is difficult to pass the game ball through the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, the small hits A to C are set as small hits that are disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the small hit D, since the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened from the start of the small hit game, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the V winning switch 65e3. As described above, the switching member 65h is operated at the same operation timing from the start of the small hit game regardless of the small hit type. On the other hand, since the opening timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be different depending on the small hit type, the small hit D which is advantageous to the player and the small hit A to C which are disadvantageous to the player Are set respectively. With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the operation control of the switching member 65h. Further, since the operation timing of the switching member 65h is constant regardless of the small hit type, the player can be expected to pass the game ball to the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, the small hit D is set to a small hit that is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, since it is possible to win the small hit D only for the second special symbol, the second winning opening 64b is an advantageous winning opening and the first winning opening 64a is disadvantageous for the player. It is set as a winning opening.

Here, in each small hit game, a display mode (display mode during the round) indicating that the small hit game is in progress is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small hit game. Specifically, the character "Right-handed !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is given a game in which the game ball is launched so that the game ball passes on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Will be notified. Then, the characters "Get a big hit with a V prize !!" are also displayed, and if the game ball can be passed through the V prize switch 65e3, a big hit game (a game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened (big hit A)). ) Is notified to the player that it will be started after this small hit game. The timing at which the display mode displayed during the small hit game is displayed is 3 seconds before the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened in each small hit game, and the game ball enters at the timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. It is the timing when the ball is possible. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the start of the small hit game is the timing when the display mode of the small hit game is started by the third symbol display device 81, and the small hit game is displayed in each small hit. Since the period from when the mode is displayed until the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened is constant at 3 seconds, it is difficult to recognize that the opening timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 differs depending on the small hit type. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the small hit type from being determined at the opening timing of the opening / closing door 65f1. Therefore, when the small hit game is started, it is possible to expect the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 regardless of the small hit type.

Further, in each small hit (small hits A to C), a fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 16) when the second special symbol is removed, which is set after the end of the small hit game, is set. Specifically, when the small hit game of "small hit A" is completed, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 1 (state A) is set (see FIG. 16B). When the small hit game of "small hit B" is completed, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 2 (state B) is set (see FIG. 16 (c)). When the small hit game of "small hit C" is completed, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 3 (state C) is set (see FIG. 16 (d)). The details of each fluctuation pattern table will be described later, but each fluctuation pattern table is configured so that the fluctuation time that can be easily selected is variable. Therefore, the fluctuation time (dynamic display time) selected in the second special symbol can be changed according to the small hit type of the first special symbol. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time, the second special symbol is stopped first, so that the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. If it is a small hit D, the small hit game of the small hit D is executed. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is stopped first, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol that is changing is a small hit D, it is forcibly stopped as a miss. Therefore, it can be said that an advantageous state of the player is set when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is easily selected to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Therefore, setting a variation pattern table in which a short variation time is easily selected according to the small hit type according to the first special symbol can set a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, by variably setting the fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to change the state advantageous to the player, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting not only the jackpot but also the type of the fluctuation pattern table.

In the present embodiment, it is configured so as not to shift to the high probability state or the time saving state (electric support state) after the end of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot is provided. May be good. Here, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of the game. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 64b. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, the time saving state (during the time saving) is a game in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 64b. It refers to the state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 64b1 is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 64b as compared with the case where the electric accessory 64b1 is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 64b, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 64b1 is opened more than during normal operation. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 64b1 is released at the time when the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 64b1 is opened per hit is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display and the second symbol variable display triggered by the passage of a ball of a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64a (starting winning), the first special symbol is changed on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the ball. Further, when the ball enters the second winning opening 65b (starting winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes the variation of the second special symbol with the trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, when the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively shown) in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of (referred to as a special symbol) is performed. As for the third symbol, a dedicated symbol is variedly displayed for each variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed at the same time.

Since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed, the first special symbol is always changed. Details of this configuration will be described later.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that the third symbol (○ ×) becomes the first special symbol. , Is displayed for each of the second special symbols. In addition, a fusion effect indicating whether or not the small hit D, which is advantageous to the player, has been won is displayed in a display area larger than the third symbol. Details will be described later, but when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit D, the display mode indicating whether or not the second special symbol stops before the first special symbol is that of the rabbit and the turtle. The player is notified in a display mode imitating a competition. If the turtle beats the rabbit, it means that the small hit D is won.

In the present embodiment, the turtle is configured to win only when the small hit D is won, but the turtle is not limited to this, and the turtle is also executed when the small hits A to C by the first special symbol are executed. As a configuration in which the winning effect may be executed, the player may be given the pleasure of being able to insert the game ball into the V winning switch 67e3 by the subsequent small hit game. Further, the competition result between the rabbit and the turtle is not displayed at the time of winning the small hit, and the winning of the turtle may be confirmed by the game ball entering the V winning switch 65e3. With this configuration, the player can enjoy the small hit game more.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the third symbol has a first display area Ds1 in which the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and is on the right. A second display area Ds2 in which the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed is set below. In both the first display area Ds1 and the second display area, the symbols of "○ ×" are displayed in two columns in parallel, and when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, "○○" is displayed. In the case of a small hit, "○ ×" is displayed, and in the case of a miss, "XX" is displayed. During the variable display, the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol in each column are displayed alternately at high speed.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the fusion effect, character symbols, characters, and the like are displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Will be done. If the game is not played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as a model name of the pachinko machine 10 or a digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

The second symbol display device (not shown) has a “○” symbol and “×” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The symbol of "" is alternately lit for a predetermined time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled at a position above the first winning opening 64a in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and all the game balls that enter the first winning opening 64a. Is normally configured to enter the ball after passing through the symbol start port (through gate) 67. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not reserved. Therefore, only when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, the winning lottery of the second symbol is performed and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started. To.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of balls at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 0, and may be set to 1 or more (for example, 4). Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the lower part of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

A first winning opening 64a in which a ball can win is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 and at a position below the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64a, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. (See FIG. 11), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64a, a second winning opening 64b in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 64b, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. (See FIG. 11), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

As shown in FIG. 2, the second winning opening 64b is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64a. The second winning opening 64b passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the game ball that has not won the first winning opening 64a can enter a position or the game passing through the right side of the variable display unit 80. It is arranged in a position where the ball can enter. Further, above the second winning opening 64b, an ordinary electric accessory 64b1 having a bow shape capable of closing the entry opening of the second winning opening 64b is arranged, and is always shown in FIG. As shown, it is arranged at a position that restricts (does not allow) the game ball from entering the second starting port 64a, and when it hits a normal symbol, it rotates counterclockwise by about 90 degrees and the second The normal electric accessory 64b1 guides the game ball to the winning opening 64b, and the game ball can enter the second winning opening 64b (hereinafter, referred to as an open state).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds or 1 second is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. After the fluctuation time, when the normal symbol hits, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is changed to the open state for 0.5 seconds. That is, the period during which the game ball can pass through the second winning opening 64b after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 is 0.5 seconds to 1 second after the game ball passes through the through gate 67. (When the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds) or 1 to 1.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 (when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second) In some cases. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to always enter the first winning opening 64a after that, and the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 and entered the first winning opening 64a. Since the period until it is detected by the detection switch (not shown) that detects the above is about 0.2 seconds, the game ball is moved to 64b at the second starting port after the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts. The period during which the ball can be entered is the period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the game ball enters the first winning opening 64a (when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds). ), The period is from 0.8 seconds to 1.3 seconds. That is, the timing at which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started is the period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, or from 0.8 seconds to 1.3 seconds. There are two types of periods until the latter. Therefore, the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol is configured 1.3 seconds after the fluctuation start of the first special symbol, even at the latest timing.

In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit (in the present embodiment, in the lottery at the start of fluctuation, all the lottery results other than the big hit are small hits), the fluctuation of the shortest fluctuation time Even if it is a pattern, it is 5 seconds, and it is configured so that the first special symbol is always changing at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery at the start of the change of the second special symbol is also a small hit except for the big hit, and the lottery result is a small hit for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. At the same time, it is easily variable. However, if they are fluctuating at the same time, the small hit of the special symbol that has stopped fluctuating first is executed, and one of the special symbols is forcibly stopped by the determination result of the deviation. Therefore, when the second special symbol becomes a small hit, the small hit D is always executed, which is advantageous for the player, but the remaining fluctuation of the first special symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. If the time is shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol, the lottery small hit D is forcibly stopped as a loss, which is advantageous for the player. It is configured so that the hit D is not executed.

Further, since the reserved balls are not stored in the first winning opening 64a (first special symbol) and the second starting opening 64 (second special symbol), the game is continuously played in the second winning opening 64b. Even if two balls enter, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second special symbol fluctuates independently.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b is also one of the winning openings in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64a and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 64b are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64a and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 64b are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64a. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 64b may be configured as five.

The probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a small hit are the same when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a and when the ball wins the second winning opening 64b (see FIG. 14B). However, the small hit type selected in the case of a small hit is that the first variable winning device 65 is selected when the ball wins the second winning opening 64b than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a. The small hit D, which is easy for the game ball to pass through, is selected for the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to make a small hit at the second winning opening 64b.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the second winning opening 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a small hit is determined by a big hit lottery performed due to winning a prize in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b, the variation time selected based on the determination result is used. When the fluctuation of the special symbol is started and the stop display is performed before the other special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on and the small hit is displayed so as to be the stop symbol of the small hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of a small hit is indicated. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (small hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened twice with an opening time of 1 second at the opening timing according to the small hit type already described above.

A second variable winning device 650 is provided above the first variable winning device 65. Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a, and a large opening solenoid (opening / closing solenoid) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The second specific winning opening 650a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, and the tilted opening / closing plate receives the game ball flowing down the front of the game board, so that the ball is the second specified winning opening 650a. It temporarily forms an open state that makes it easy to win a prize, and operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normally closed state.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is won after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the second variable winning device 65 is opened by the jackpot game. This open state is continued until 10 game balls win a prize in the second specific winning opening 650a or 30 seconds have passed, and then the closed state is established. This operation is set as one round, and after being repeated up to 15 rounds, the jackpot game ends. Further, as will be described in detail later, a big hit also occurs when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 650 described above. After that, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state (special game state) in which the ball is easy to win.

The jackpot game state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64a or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64a, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 in front view, and is shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
The details of the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 8, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b, and is first variable. A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13 and a base member 65c arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to light an LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Opening and closing for opening and closing the LED substrate 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, the back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with the base member 65c, and the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. An opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h that projects to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back cover thereof. A flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing to the back cover body 65j with screws. It is composed of.

FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. 9 (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 9 (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 9B, the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 9B. The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 10B.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13). With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the second winning opening 64b side. It is configured to be guided.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

9 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 9 (b). As shown in FIG. 9A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 10, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 10A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 10A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. .. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by the V winning switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged as an out ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. To.

In the present embodiment, in the small hits A to D (all small hits), the guide piece 65h2 is switched to the open state shown in FIG. 10A for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit game. On the other hand, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game in the small hits A to C, and at that time, the guide piece 65h2 is switched to the closed state, so that a specific prize is given. The game ball winning in the mouth 65a cannot be guided to the specific discharge port 65e2. That is, it is set to be impossible (difficult) to win the V winning switch 65e3.

On the other hand, in the small hit D, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for 1 second from the start of the small hit game, and then closed for 0.2 seconds, and then the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened again for 1 second. As a result, when the game ball enters the specific entry port 65a in the open state in the small hit D, the guide piece 65h2 is set to the open state, so that the guide piece 65h2 causes the game ball to enter the special discharge port 65e2. Is guided to win the V winning switch 65e3. As a result, after the small hit D, the start of the big hit game is executed.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball passes through the above-mentioned V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit game (small hit D), so that the big hit game is performed after the small hit game. Is started. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is set as a winning opening to which a jackpot game is given. The probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is 1/400, but the probability of winning a small hit is as high as 399/400. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the big hit game will be given by winning the small hit D, rather than the big hit being given by the lottery of the special symbol.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 10 (b). In the small hits A to D in the present embodiment, the closed state shown in FIG. 10B is changed after 2 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game. FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state (closed state) in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the V prize switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player is given a prize ball (for one ball winning in the present embodiment). 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give a jackpot game state by configuring the game ball after the detection to be able to sort whether or not to pass through the V winning switch 65e3. it can. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the jackpot game state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

In the present embodiment, a jackpot is given based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65 described above. As a result, even if the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot, the player plays the game in the small hit game with the expectation that the game ball will pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like can be used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 44). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol execution area 203a corresponding to a prize in the first winning opening 64a consisting of one execution area and a second special symbol execution area 203b corresponding to a winning in the second winning opening 64b, respectively. Each of these areas is provided with a random number counter C1 per first, a type counter C2 per first, and a stop type selection counter according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. The values of C3 and the small hit type counter C4 are stored respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal drawing execution area 203c composed of one execution area, and in each of these areas, the timing when the ball passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side is matched. Then, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is stored.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches a maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 44).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. Is stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the jackpot random number table (see FIG. 14A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the first hit random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 14A. The jackpot random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, it is determined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "399". If it is "399", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is any of "0 to 398", and if it is any of "0 to 398", it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, a small hit of the special symbol. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol (when the stop symbol is stopped before one of the special symbols).

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is that of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol execution area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, when the probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is low, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "399" is as described above. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/400".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 198. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 198", the jackpot type is "15R jackpot (big hit A)". In the present embodiment, the type of jackpot is one type, but the type is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more player. You can expect it.

The small hit type counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 198. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14D). ~ D) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (d).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 44) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table (see FIGS. 15 (c) and 16) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the main control device 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

A plurality of fluctuation pattern tables (see FIGS. 15C and 16) are set in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. In this fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of dedicated fluctuation pattern tables are set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern table is set for each of the winning / failing determination results. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15 (c) and 16.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reaches the maximum value (that is, 100), and then returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal map execution area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table 202b (see FIG. 14B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the random number counter C4 per second. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the random number table 202b per normal figure, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol).

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), the counter returns to 0. When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal map fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 and the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 15 (b).

FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the above-mentioned random number table 202b per normal diagram. In this random number table 202b per ordinary symbol, there are 10 random number values that can be hit by the ordinary symbol at a low probability of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "0 to 9". These random number values are stored in the random number table 202b per figure. Since the total number of winning random values is 10 while the total number of random values is 100 in this way, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the sphere passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 0.5 seconds or 1 second on the second symbol display device 83. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 64b is opened only for "0.5 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the playability is not impaired.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 339), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 44).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 44) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 43) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 42) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the jackpot random number table 202a, the normal figure hit random number table 202b, and the jackpot type table 202c already described above, the small hit type selection table 202d, the state transition table 202e, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g , Small hit scenario table 202h, big hit scenario table 202i, and other data table 202z are set respectively.

The small hit type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (d). This small hit type selection table 202d is selected based on the small hit type selection counter C4 that has acquired the small hit type to be executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. It is a selection table of. The small hit type selection counter C4 is a random number value that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is acquired based on the fact that the game ball enters the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. It is a numerical value. FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202d. In the small hit type selection table 202d, a dedicated small hit type is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the first special symbol, three types of small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C are set. In the small hit A, "0 to 179" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4, and in the small hit B, "180 to 195" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4. As for the small hit C, "196 to 198" is set as a determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit D, and the small hit D is always set for the small hit of the second special symbol. It is configured to.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is switched by executing the small hits A to D. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (d), when the small hit A is executed, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)) is set as the state A. When the small hit B is executed, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table 2 (see FIG. 16C) is set as the state B, and when the small hit C and the small hit D are executed, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table 2 (see FIG. 16C) is set. As the state C, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table 3 (see FIG. 16D) is set. As will be described later, when the states B and C are set, the special symbol of the number of transitions set in the state transition table 202e (see FIG. 15A) is changed when the special symbol is changed. The state A is configured to be set. That is, after the small hit B, small hit C, and small hit D are executed, each fluctuation pattern table is selected only during the set number of transitions, and then the fluctuation pattern table of the state A is switched to. It is configured as follows. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table set in the state A is set as the fluctuation pattern table in the normal state.

FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state transition table 202e. As described above, the state transition table 202e is a data table in which the periods in which the states A to C are set are set. In the state A, an infinite number of times is set. That is, the state A is set until any of the small hits B to D is executed. In the state B, 40 state transition times are set. When the small hit B is executed and the state B is set, the state B is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 40 times, and then the state B is set. A is set. In the state C, the number of state transitions of 30 times is set. When the small hit C or small hit D is executed and the state C is set, the state C is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) becomes 30 times. After that, the state A is set. In the present embodiment, the state is changed to the state A after the number of state transitions has elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the state may be changed to another state. For example, it may be configured to shift from state C to state B and then to state A. Further, in the state C, the small hit C and the small hit D have the same number of state transitions, but the number of transitions may be different between the small hit C and the small hit D. Further, when the small hit D is executed, it may be configured to set a state other than the state C. In addition, although the small hit type of the second special symbol is set to one type, two types are set, and one is set to have a finite number of transitions (for example, 30 times) and the other has an infinite number of transitions. As described above, the variable pattern table that makes it easy to win the next small hit D can be continuously set, and the state in which the next big hit game is easily given to the player and the state in which it is difficult to give the next big hit game can be sorted.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 (c) and 16. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, a fluctuation pattern table that is exclusively selected for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set. FIG. 15C shows a hit variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. It is a schematic diagram which showed the contents of the selection table 202f. In the hit variation pattern selection table 202f, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern A (variation time 0.5 seconds), the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern B (variation time 3 seconds), and the special figure 1 The jackpot fluctuation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is set respectively. “0 to 50” is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern A, and “0 to 50” is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern B. "51 to 100" is set, and "101 to 198" is set as a determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern C. In this way, when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern C composed of the fluctuation time of 4 seconds is most likely to be selected, and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern A, the special figure. 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern B is set with substantially the same selection ratio. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, if one of the fluctuations stops first, the other fluctuation is forcibly rewritten as a lottery result. It is forcibly stopped even in the middle of the fluctuation time. Therefore, even if the fluctuation of the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, if the fluctuation of the small hit of the first special symbol is stopped first, the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the jackpot will be the result of the lottery. It is conceivable that the jackpot will be invalidated due to being rewritten and forcibly stopped and displayed. However, as will be described later, since the shortest fluctuation time for the small hit of the second special symbol is 4 seconds, the fluctuation of the second special symbol of the small hit that always starts to fluctuate after the first special symbol stops first. It is a configuration that does not have to be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the fluctuation drawn by the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes invalid.

On the other hand, as the fluctuation pattern that becomes the jackpot of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern D (variation time 0.5 seconds) is set. In the present embodiment, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and when the jackpot is determined by the second special symbol, the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern D is always selected. It is configured. Since the fluctuation time of this special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern D is composed of 0.5 seconds, it is set to a fluctuation time that always stops earlier than the fluctuation of the first special symbol which is a small hit. When the big hit is determined by the special symbol, the fluctuation that becomes the small hit of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first, and the problem that the fluctuation that becomes the big hit of the second special symbol becomes invalid can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16A, when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a small hit, the special figure 1 small for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. The hit variation pattern selection table 202f will be described. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern selection table 202f. In the present embodiment, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit, that is, if it is a miss, it is determined that all the hits are small hits.

As shown in FIG. 16A, in the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B are selected as the types of fluctuation patterns. (Variation time 7 seconds), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 10 seconds) are set. .. “0 to 99” is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A, and as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B. "100 to 149" is set, and "150 to 179" is set as a determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C, and for the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D. Is set to "180 to 190" as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and "191 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Has been done. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A having the shortest fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set to be selected with the highest probability of 100/199. It is configured to. Therefore, when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit, a short fluctuation time is easily selected. Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B having a fluctuation time of 7 seconds has a probability of 50/199, and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds has a probability of 30/199 and a fluctuation time of 15 seconds. The fluctuation pattern D is configured to be selected with a probability of 11/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E having a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is configured to be selected with a probability of 8/199.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the second special symbol fluctuates as the longer fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol stops first. Therefore, it is configured to be advantageous to the player by executing the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the probability of being selected is set lower as the fluctuation pattern of the longer fluctuation time is set, so that the disadvantage on the amusement store side can be suppressed and the gambling becomes too high. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables for the second special symbol, which will be described later, are provided, and the probability (ratio) of selecting each variation pattern is set to be different in each table. Since the switching of the variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol is made to be switched according to the small hit type of the first special symbol, even if it is a small hit of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player, By switching the variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol to the variation pattern selection table in which the variation pattern of the short variation time is easily selected, it is possible to set the gaming state which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the game state that is advantageous to the player (the game state in which the small hit of the second special symbol is easily executed) and the game state that is disadvantageous to the player (the game state in which the small hit of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) are the first. 2 There is an effect that it can be performed by switching the variation pattern selection table of the special symbol.

With reference to FIGS. 16 (b) to 16 (d), the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection tables 1 to 3 for selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit will be described. To do. FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1. The special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1 is a table that is set when the state A is set. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the states A to C are selected and set. In these states A to C, when the small hit of the first special symbol is executed, the state corresponding to the small hit type is set (see FIG. 14 (d)). When the states B and C are set, the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner (lottery count) reaches a predetermined predetermined number of times, or is newly set. It is continuously set until it is set to a different state by the small hit of the first special symbol. When the specified number of times is reached, the state shifts to A and is set. Therefore, the state A is a state set at the normal time (including the case where the power is turned on after being initialized). As described above, the specified number of times of the state B and the state C is set by the state transition table 202e shown in FIG. 15A, and in the state B, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set. 40 times, in the state C, 30 times is set as the specified number of times as the total number of fluctuations.

Details will be described later, but when the state B is set, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 is set, and when the state C is set, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3 is set. Are set respectively. The probability that a short fluctuation pattern is selected is set higher in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2 than in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 1, and it is set higher than in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2. In the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3, the probability that a short variation pattern is selected is set high. That is, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3 is a variation pattern selection table in which the gaming state that is most advantageous for the player is set, and the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 is next. The variation pattern selection table 1 which is advantageous to the player and is most disadvantageous to the player in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table becomes the variation pattern selection table.

As shown in FIGS. 16 (b) to 16 (d), in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds). ), Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds), special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds), special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) are special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table. It is set to 1 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 16B, in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 1, “0” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F, and the special figure 2 “1 to 7” is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the fluctuation pattern G, and “8 to 27” is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern H. As a judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I, "28 to 47" is set as a judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J. 48 to 198 "is set. The probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F having the shortest fluctuation time is selected is 1/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G having the next shortest fluctuation time is selected is 7/199. The probability that a short fluctuation time is selected is set low. On the other hand, the probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation patterns H to J, which are fluctuation patterns having a relatively long fluctuation time, is selected is set higher than that of other fluctuation pattern selection tables. Therefore, in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1, the probability that a short variation pattern is selected is set low, and the variation pattern selection table (game state disadvantageous to the player) is set to be disadvantageous to the player. ing.

Next, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (c). FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2. The special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 is a variation pattern selection table that is set when the above-mentioned state B is set. Since it differs from the above-mentioned special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16B) only in that the selection rate of each variation pattern is different, only the selection rate will be described.

As shown in FIG. 16 (c), in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2, "0 to 2" is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F. FIG. 2 “3 to 17” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the variation pattern G, and “18 to 47” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H. It is set, and "48 to 97" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I, and is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J. "98 to 198" is set. The probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F having the shortest fluctuation time is selected is 3/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G having the next shortest fluctuation time is selected is 15/199. Therefore, as compared with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16B), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F is set with a selection probability three times, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G is about 2. It is set with a double selection probability. Therefore, since there is a high probability that a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected, it becomes easier to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops before the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is advantageous to the player. The small hit of the second special symbol is set so that it can be easily executed.

Next, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (d). FIG. 16D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3. Special figure 2 The small hit variation pattern selection table 3 is a variation pattern selection table that is set when the above-mentioned state C is set. The selection ratio of each variation pattern is different from the above-mentioned special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)) and special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 (see FIG. 16 (c)). Since they differ only in different points, only the selection ratio will be described.

As shown in FIG. 16 (d), in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 3, “0 to 7” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F. FIG. 2 “8 to 48” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the variation pattern G, and “49 to 98” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H. It is set, and "99 to 198" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I, and the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J. It is configured so that it is not set, that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J is not selected. The probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F having the shortest fluctuation time is selected is 8/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G having the next shortest fluctuation time is selected is 41/199. Therefore, as compared with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16B), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F is set with an eight-fold selection probability, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G has about 6 times. It is set with a double selection probability. Therefore, since there is a high probability that a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected, it becomes easier to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops before the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is advantageous to the player. The small hit of the second special symbol is set so that it can be easily executed. Further, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 3 is configured so that the special figure 2 variation pattern J is not selected.

Here, in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern J (19 seconds), as already explained with reference to FIG. 18, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 0.5 seconds. Only when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (selection probability 8/199) in which is 20 seconds is selected, the second special symbol can be stopped first, and the probability that the second special symbol stops first is high. It is set extremely low. Therefore, in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3, since the special figure 2 variation pattern J is configured not to be selected, it is set more advantageously for the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability that the variation time of the second special symbol is selected is changed so as to switch between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state for the player. Here, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the variation of the second special symbol is stopped first by the combination of the variation pattern of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the second special symbol (special diagram 2). The combination of fluctuation patterns to be performed will be described. FIG. 17 is a quick reference table showing a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the second special symbol stops first, and FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing the stop timing of each fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. is there.

First, with reference to FIG. 18, a case where the variable display period of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may overlap will be described. In the present embodiment, when the change of the second special symbol is started, the first special symbol is configured to be changed without fail. The game ball that wins the first winning opening 64a, which triggers the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, passes through the through gate 67 about 0.2 seconds before entering the first winning opening 64a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts 0.2 seconds before the ball enters the first winning opening 64a (special figure 1 winning). The variation patterns selected for the determination result of the small hit of the first special symbol are the special figure 1 variation pattern A (abbreviated as “A”) and the special figure 1 variation pattern B (abbreviated as “B”). ), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (abbreviated as "C"), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (abbreviated as "D"), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (shown as "E") There are five types (omitted), and each fluctuation period is shown in FIG. 18A with a timing chart.

Two types of fluctuation time of the normal symbol are set, 0.5 seconds and 1 second, and the time chart of each fluctuation period of the second special symbol when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds is displayed. FIG. 18 (b) shows a time chart of each fluctuation period of the second special symbol when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second.

As shown in FIG. 18B, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends 0.3 seconds after the first special symbol starts the fluctuation. In the case of hitting a normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the game ball can enter the second winning opening 64b is set for 0.5 seconds. .. That is, the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol is a period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the fluctuation start of the first special symbol. In FIG. 18B, as an example in which the second special symbol starts to fluctuate earliest, the timing when the second winning opening 64b is won 0.3 seconds after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and starts to fluctuate. The chart is shown. As shown in FIG. 18B, the fluctuation patterns when it is determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol are the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (abbreviated as “F”) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G. (Abbreviated as "G"), Special Figure 2 fluctuation pattern H (abbreviated as "H"), Special Figure 2 fluctuation pattern I (abbreviated as "I"), Special Figure 2 fluctuation pattern There are five types of J (abbreviated as "J"), and the fluctuation end timing is shown for each fluctuation pattern.

In the case of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), even if the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) having the shortest fluctuation time of the first special symbol is executed, the feature is specified. FIG. 1 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern F of the special figure 2 ends 0.7 seconds earlier than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern A ends. As a result, regardless of which variation pattern is executed in the first special symbol, the special diagram 2 variation pattern F ends first, and the small hit of the second special symbol is executed (see FIG. 17 (a)). ). Further, the variable period of the second special symbol is 0.5 seconds from the timing shown in FIG. 18B, but even if the fluctuation starts 0.5 seconds after the latest, the fluctuation pattern A is larger than that of the special figure 1. The fluctuation pattern F of the special figure 2 stops 0.2 seconds earlier. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, and when the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern F is selected, the fluctuation of the second special symbol always stops earlier than the first special symbol, and the second special symbol A small hit in favor of the player is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it advantageous for the player that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F is executed with the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being 0.5 seconds.

Similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, the fluctuation pattern that stops first with respect to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E. Become. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, the variation pattern stops first with respect to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, the fluctuation pattern stops first with respect to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, the fluctuation pattern stops first only with respect to the fluctuation pattern E in the special figure 1. As described above, the state shown in FIG. 17A does not change even if the ball is entered into the second winning opening 64b at the late arrival timing (0.5 seconds later). Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal figure is 0.5 seconds, if the ball is entered during the opening period when the normal electric accessory 64b1 is in the open state, the player is not disadvantaged by the timing of entering the ball. Has been done.

Next, a case where the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (c). When the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened 1.3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 18A (judgment result of the normal symbol). If is a hit). Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the period from 1.3 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the period during which the second winning opening 64b can be won. .. In FIG. 18C, the second winning opening 64b is 1.3 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the timing at which the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts earliest when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second. The timing chart of the small hit fluctuation pattern of each second special symbol when winning a prize is shown.

As shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the case of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) having the shortest fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Even when is executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F ends 0.3 seconds later than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A ends. As a result, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A will stop fluctuating first, and at that timing, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F will be rewritten to be out of alignment and will be forcibly stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17B, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F ends earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E, and the small hit of the second special symbol Is executed. The variable period of the second special symbol is 0.5 seconds from the timing shown in FIG. 18 (c), but even if the fluctuation starts 0.5 seconds after the latest, each of the above-mentioned first special symbols The relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the stop timing is invariant. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, if the special figure 1 fluctuation patterns B to E are executed, it is advantageous for the player to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F. Become.

Similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17B, the fluctuation pattern stops first with respect to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17B, the fluctuation pattern stops first with respect to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17B, the fluctuation pattern stops first with respect to only the fluctuation pattern E in FIG. 1. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17B, it is a fluctuation pattern that cannot be stopped first for all the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the fluctuation pattern is such that the small hit of the first special symbol is always executed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a summary of the fluctuation stop timing when the small hit fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuates at the same time will be described. In FIG. 17A, when a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol having a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected after passing through the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened by the fluctuation, and the first 2 When the second special symbol can be stopped first by the combination of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern in the second special symbol when the winning opening 64b is won. Is a quick reference table indicated by "○" and "x" when the first special symbol is a combination that stops first (the second special symbol is a combination that cannot be stopped first).

When the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (abbreviated by the symbol "A") is selected in the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol) The second special symbol can be stopped first only when (omitted by the symbol "F") is selected. When the other special figure 2 fluctuation patterns G to J are selected, the first special symbol is stopped first, and the second special symbol is forcibly disengaged and forcibly stopped.

Similarly, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B (indicated by a symbol "B" for short) in the first special symbol, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G are in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C. In (abbreviated as "C" and symbolized), special figure 2 fluctuation patterns F to H, and in special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (abbreviated and indicated by "D"), special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F to In I, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (abbreviated as "E" and symbolized), special figure 2 fluctuation patterns F to J (that is, a fluctuation pattern that is a small hit of all the second special symbols and is the second special (The symbol can be stopped first), and the second special symbol can be stopped first. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation pattern E is selected in the first special symbol, it is most advantageous to the player, and by making the second winning opening 64b win, a small hit is executed in the second special symbol. (If the lottery result is a small hit). Although omitted in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variation pattern E is selected, a notification prompting the player to win a prize in the second winning opening 64b is displayed by voice or in the third symbol display device 81. , It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to win the second winning opening 64b by executing the notification with a lamp or the like.

FIG. 17B is a quick look showing a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the second special symbol is stopped first when 1 second is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol with respect to FIG. 17A. It is a display. As shown in FIG. 17B, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (abbreviated as “A”) in the first special symbol, for all the small hit fluctuation patterns of the second special symbol, The second special symbol does not stop first, and the small hit of the first special symbol is executed.

In the first special symbol, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B (abbreviated as "B" and symbol) is the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (abbreviated as "C" and symbolized). ), The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (abbreviated as “D”), the special figure 2 fluctuation patterns F to H and the special figure 1 In the fluctuation pattern E (abbreviated as "E"), the special figure 2 fluctuation patterns F to I (that is, the second special symbol stops first in the fluctuation pattern that is a small hit of all the second special symbols). The second special symbol can be stopped first. Therefore, if 1 second is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the period during which the second winning opening 64b can be won is delayed, so that the second special symbol can be stopped earlier than the case of 0.5 seconds. There are fewer combinations, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the disadvantage and advantage of the player can be changed not only by the combination of the variation type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol but also by the variation pattern type of the normal symbol. When 0.5 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, the type of the fluctuation start sound of the normal symbol is changed, or an effect suggesting the fluctuation type of the Nunotsu symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This may be configured to suggest that the player is in an advantageous state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15 (b), the normal figure variation pattern table 202 g in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 13) of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern table 202g. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table 202g determines the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the normal symbol based on the acquired value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 when the game ball passes through the through gate 67. It is a selection table of. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation pattern A and the normal map variation pattern B are set as the variation patterns of the selected ordinary symbols, respectively. The normal map fluctuation pattern A is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Further, the normal map fluctuation pattern B is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 1000 ms (1 second). For the normal figure fluctuation pattern A, "0 to 29" is set as a judgment value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2, and for the normal figure fluctuation pattern B, "30 to 198" is set as a judgment value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2. Is set. As described above, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of 1 second is set to be easier to select than the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds.

Here, in the present embodiment, the advantages and disadvantages for the player differ depending on the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is detected by the detection switch in the first winning opening 64a 0.2 seconds later, and the variation of the first special symbol is started. Here, since the small hit D is easily executed by stopping the second special symbol earlier than the first special symbol, the second winning opening 64b is earlier than the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is more advantageous for the player to win the game ball. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to have a shorter fluctuation time of the normal map. In the present embodiment, since the normal map fluctuation pattern A (0.5 second fluctuation) is set to be more difficult to select than the normal map fluctuation pattern B (1 second), it is configured to suppress gambling.

In this embodiment, the normal map fluctuation pattern table is constant regardless of the game state, but the table is not limited to this, and is configured to be switched depending on when a small hit is executed or when a big hit game is executed. You may. With this configuration, it is possible to switch to a state advantageous to the player by switching to the normal map fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation time shorter than that in the normal time is easily selected.

The small hit scenario table 202h (see FIG. 13) is a data table for executing opening / closing control of the first variable winning device 65 when the small hit game is executed. The small hit scenario table 202h is set in each small hit scenario table corresponding to each small hit type. The pointers are set in chronological order, and the pointers are updated one by one with the passage of time. Each control of the first variable winning device 65 set by the pointer is executed. As a result, even if the opening control or the like is different for each small hit type, the control can be easily executed.

The jackpot scenario table 202i (see FIG. 13) will be described. The jackpot scenario table 202i is a scenario table set when the jackpot game is executed, and is a data table in which the control contents of the second variable winning device 650 are defined. Similar to the small hit scenario table 202i, the control contents of the second variable winning device 650 are defined for each pointer set in chronological order, and the pointer is updated one by one with the passage of time, and the updated pointer is used. Control is executed according to the specified control contents.

In the other data table 202z, various data, tables, and the like necessary for other games are set, but since the contents are known and have nothing to do with the contents of the present invention, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol execution area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal figure execution area 203c, a first winning counter 203d1, a second winning counter 203d2, a V winning flag 203e, and a jackpot. Flag 203f, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h, special figure 1 small hit flag 203i, special figure 2 small hit flag 203j, state counter 203k, state setting area 203m, and other memory area 203z. doing.

The first special symbol execution area 203a is composed of one execution area as shown in FIG. In the first special symbol execution area 203a, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a (starting winning), the first special symbol is stopped (variation ends), not during the small hit game or the big hit game. If this is the case, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C4, which are acquired based on the winning, are stored. .. After that, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 28, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes each process for starting the variation of the first special symbol.

The second special symbol execution area 203b differs from the first special symbol execution area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second winning opening 64b are stored, and the other configurations are different. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol execution area 203c has one execution area like the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second special symbol execution area 203b. In the normal map execution area 203c, the values of the second random number counter C4 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port 67, the normal symbol is not in the hit game, and the normal symbol is stopped (the change of the normal symbol is completed). ), The values of the second random number counter C4 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal figure execution area 203c.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal figure execution area 203c is the normal figure execution area. It is shifted (moved) to 203c, and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal figure execution area 203c. After that, the normal map fluctuation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2, and the normal map fluctuation is executed.

The first winning counter 203d1 enters the number of game balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 in one round (open state) in the small hit game (that is, the second variable winning device 650). The number of game balls that have been balled) and the second winning counter 203d2 are the number of game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the first variable winning device). It is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered 65). Specifically, the second winning counter 203d2 is added one by one based on the fact that the game ball passes through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 8) provided in the first variable winning device 65 and is detected by the detection switch. The first winning counter 203d1 is added and updated one by one based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection switch (not shown) provided in the second variable winning device 650. Will be done. On the other hand, the value of the first winning counter 203d1 determines whether the number of winnings (the value of the winning number counter 203j) in the first variable winning device 65 and the number discharged are the same when one round is completed. After that, it is reset to the initial value "0". Further, the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is reset to the initial value "0" based on the completion of one round. The value of the winning number counter 203d is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The jackpot flag 203e is a flag indicating that the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot. The jackpot flag 203e is configured to be able to identify whether it is a jackpot determination of the first special symbol or a jackpot determination of the second special symbol.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is a flag indicating that it is the timing to forcibly stop the first special symbol that is changing. The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is set to on when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit is stopped with respect to the second special symbol (see S913 in FIG. 39 and S941 in FIG. 40 (b)). .. On the other hand, it is set to off when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is on during the change of the first special symbol (S611 in FIG. 34). As a result, the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped at the timing when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol is stopped first.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is a flag indicating that it is the timing to forcibly stop the second special symbol that is changing. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to on when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit is stopped for the second special symbol (see S603 in FIG. 33 and S621 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is on during the change of the second special symbol, it is set to off (S931 in FIG. 40 (a)). As a result, the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped at the timing when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol is stopped first.

The state counter 203k is a counter for counting the specified number of times in the state B or the state C in which the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern 2 or the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern 3 is selected. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the small hit B or small hit C of the first special symbol and the small hit D of the second special symbol are won, the small hit fluctuation pattern table of the second special symbol thereafter is displayed. It was set to switch to the predetermined fluctuation pattern table a specified number of times. The specified number of times defines the number of times that the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate, and when the specified number of times is reached, the state A is entered and the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the state A is set. .. When the small hit of the first special symbol and the small hit of the second special symbol are completed, the state counter 203k is set to the corresponding state, and the value of the state counter corresponding to the set state is set. (S1807, S1809 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to fluctuate, they are subtracted and updated by 1 (S305 in FIG. 30 and S705 in FIG. 36).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a solenoid for opening and closing the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the second specified winning opening 650a to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 inputs and outputs. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including switch groups and sensor groups (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 42) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 20, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a fusion effect selection table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a data table in which variation pattern data for displaying variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection table 222a shows the variation display pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2 shown in FIG. 4 (a). Is stored. In this fluctuation display pattern, a pattern is set in which the “◯” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately switched and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation time determined by the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 20B, the fusion effect selection table 222b is composed of a winning fusion effect selection table 222b1, a losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, a preparing effect selection table 222b3, and a special effect selection table 222b4. This is a selection table for selecting the fusion effect to be displayed in the effect display area Ds3 of the display device 81. The winning fusion effect and the losing fusion effect are fusion effects displayed in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 during the period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time. Specifically, in the winning fusion effect, the display mode in which the rabbit and the turtle start the competition shown in FIG. 4 (b) is displayed, and the display mode in which the turtle shown in FIG. 5 (b) wins the rabbit in the competition is displayed. After that, it is composed of a blackout effect. The losing fusion production differs in that the rabbit wins against the winning fusion production. The victory of the turtle notifies that the second special symbol stops before the first special symbol and the small hit D of the second special symbol is executed. On the other hand, the victory of the rabbit indicates that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped first, and any of the small hits A to C of the first special symbol is executed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol always starts to fluctuate before the second special symbol (see FIG. 4A). Here, for the player, even if the first special symbol is stopped first and the small hit of the first special symbol is executed, the profit obtained for the player is a small amount of balls (prize balls) or the first. 2 The change pattern table of the special symbol is switched, which does not directly trigger the big hit, and is set to be disadvantageous compared to the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, the player is interested in the fact that the second special symbol starts to change.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the third symbol (the symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2) indicating the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is marked with "○". With the "x" display, the display area was further reduced and placed at the lower left and right edges of the display area so that it would not stand out. On the other hand, the effect display area Ds3 is set larger than the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2 so as to be conspicuous to the player. Therefore, the player mainly looks at the effect display area Ds3 and plays the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the variation of the second special symbol is started and the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the same time, the effect display area Ds3 shown in FIG. 4A is displayed. The rabbit and turtle race shown in FIG. 4 (b) is started from the state before the rabbit and turtle race (competition) is started. For the player, the message "If the turtle wins in the race, chance!" Is displayed at the top of the production display area Ds3, and the turtle wins, giving the player a chance to win a V prize, which is advantageous to the player. It is informed that it will be done. In the present embodiment, the small hit D of the second special symbol is executed, so that the small hit game in which the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is executed. When the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the player is given the right to start the big hit game after the small hit game, so that the player is given an advantageous state that the small hit D is executed. It will be done.

In the fusion effect, when the first special symbol stops first, the effect that the rabbit finishes before the turtle is executed (see FIG. 5 (a)), and when the second special symbol stops first. Is an effect in which the turtle finishes before the rabbit (see FIG. 5B). After that, after the first special symbol stops first and the fusion effect (see FIG. 5 (a)) in which the rabbit finishes before the turtle is displayed, "Sorry!" Shown in FIG. 6 (a)! "Normal chance!" Is displayed. When the display mode of this fusion effect is displayed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and stops (stops at the combination of "○ ×" indicating a small hit), and at that timing, the second special symbol changes. It is forcibly stopped by a symbol (stopped by the combination of "XX") indicating a deviation in the middle of the fluctuation time. Further, when the display mode of the fusion effect of FIG. 6A is displayed, the player is subsequently executed a small hit of the first special symbol, and has a chance of winning a V (that is, the right to execute the big hit game). There is no possibility of getting a ball), but you can recognize that you can get a ball in a small hit game. Therefore, the player prepares for a game in which the game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 650 by a game method (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed game) in which the game ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the fusion effect in which the turtle wins the race is displayed, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has elapsed, and the symbol indicating a small hit (“○ ×”) The stop display is performed at the combination stop symbol), and at that timing, the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating the deviation in the middle of the fluctuation time (the stop symbol of the combination of “XX”). After that, as shown in FIG. 6B, the characters "Congratulations !! V winning chance!" Are displayed, and after that, the player is notified that a small hit game with a possibility of V winning will be executed. To. Therefore, the player can play a right-handed game and prepare for a game aiming for a V prize. As described above, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, and the player can display the fusion effect although it is a complicated game. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a small hit game that is advantageous to the player is started based on the content of the fusion effect, and the game can be performed more easily.

The above-mentioned fusion effect in which the rabbit and turtle race is performed is executed when the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both small hits. If the lottery result of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol is a big hit, the variation display of the fusion effect is not started, and the character "big hit" is displayed at the timing when the variation time of the selected variation pattern has elapsed. Suddenly displayed. Further, if the second special symbol does not start to change during the change period of the first special symbol after the first special symbol changes (the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit), the change display of the fusion effect is not started. , A display mode indicating that the small hit game of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6A is started at the timing when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the fusion effect is not started until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate after the small hit fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, but the first special symbol is not limited to this. It may be configured to start the fluctuation of the fusion effect (the start of the rabbit and turtle race) at the timing when the fluctuation starts. In this case, at the timing when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the control for resetting the fusion effect is set based on the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol that stops fluctuating first. Further, in the present embodiment, the turtle is configured to execute the winning effect in the fusion effect only when the second special symbol stops first (the winning / failing determination result is a small hit), but the second is not limited to this. At the start of the change of the special symbol, the production lottery is executed with a predetermined probability, and based on the lottery result, it is decided whether the turtle wins or the rabbit wins. In this case, if the second special symbol is a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the second special symbol stops first (the winning / failing judgment result is a small hit), the execution probability of the fusion effect in which the turtle wins is set high, and the first special When the symbol is a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the symbol stops first (the result of winning / failing is a small hit), the execution probability of the fusion effect in which the rabbit wins is set high. Then, regardless of whether the rabbit wins or the turtle wins, the display modes of FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (b) are not displayed, and the characters "V winning chance" are displayed instead, and the V winning is won. Perform a production that makes the player think that there is a possibility of this in the small hit game after this. Here, if the rabbit wins, the possibility of V winning is low, and if the turtle wins, the possibility of V winning is high, so that the player is notified after that. Even during the small hit game, the game can be played with the expectation of V prize, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the above-described modification, the fusion effect is started from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, but the fusion effect may be started from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the fusion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is not limited to this. (For example, it is composed of three rows of symbols and the determination result is notified by the combination of the symbols) and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, it is composed of three rows of symbols and the combination of the symbols). The determination result) may be displayed in a variable manner, and the game may be performed with the expectation that the third symbol indicating the small hit will be displayed in the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be variablely displayed at the same time.

The preparatory effect selected from the preparatory effect selection table 222b3 is a display mode before the rabbit and the turtle shown in FIG. 4A start the competition. In this case, the preparatory effect is selected and displayed when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and when the variable display of only the first special symbol is started. ..

The special effect selection table 222b4 is a table in which a special effect is set, which is selected when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate before the first special symbol. In this special effect, the characters "abnormal fluctuation" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an error comment. As a result, it is possible to notify at an early stage that a normal prize or game has not been played.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (c). As shown in FIG. 20B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d, and a special figure 1. Stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f, effect counter 223g, slave state setting area 223h, special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time counter 223i, special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time counter 223j, fusion effect start flag 223k, etc. A memory area 223z is provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is a storage area for temporarily storing commands output from the main control device 110 and each control device to the voice lamp control device 113.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area corresponding to the first special symbol and one execution area corresponding to the second special symbol, and each of these areas includes the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Information such as a fluctuation pattern output from the main control device 110 when each of the second special symbols starts to fluctuate, a hit / fail determination result, and the like is stored.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command for the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2301 in FIG. 54), and the first special in the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display of the symbol is set (see S2602 in FIG. 57). When the variation start flag 223d of the special figure 1 is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern for the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variation effect is started so as to be performed.

The special figure 2 variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command for the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2401 in FIG. 55), and the second special in the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display of the symbol is set (see S2602 in FIG. 57). When the variation start flag 223d of the special figure 1 is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command. The display variation pattern command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as the above-described first special symbol variation pattern command.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the special figure 1 stop type command corresponding to the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2501 in FIG. 56), and the third symbol display. It is turned off when the stop type of the first special symbol in the device 81 is set (see S2611 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command. In the present embodiment, the display stop mode displayed in the first display area Ds1 is set.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when the special figure 2 stop type command corresponding to the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2501 in FIG. 56), and the third symbol display. It is turned off when the stop type of the second special symbol in the device 81 is set (see S2611 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command. In the present embodiment, the display stop mode displayed in the first display area Ds1 is set.

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The slave state setting area 223h is a storage area for storing the state information (any of the states A to A to C) set by the main control device 110. In the slave state setting area 223h, when a state command (S308 in FIG. 30, S708 in FIG. 36, S1808 in FIG. 49) output from the main control unit 110 is received, the state information indicated by the state command is stored. (S2210 in FIG. 53). With this configuration, the same state can be set in the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the state set in the main control device 110.

The special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is a counter for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received, the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is set as the residual fluctuation time indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command (see S2310 in FIG. 54). When the residual fluctuation time is set in the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i (special figure 1 residual fluctuation time> 0), the counter value corresponding to the elapsed time for each execution cycle of the main process (see FIG. 52) (see FIG. 52). In this embodiment, 1) is subtracted and updated (see S2702 in FIG. 58). Note that the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is set to 0 in the initial state.

The special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received, the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j determines the residual fluctuation time (value of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i) of the first special symbol being changed. When the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the selected second special symbol, the value of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is set to the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j. Set. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time of the selected second special symbol is shorter than the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time of the selected second special symbol is set in the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j. With this configuration, even when the small hit of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped, the accurate second special symbol can be used. The remaining fluctuation time can be set. The value of the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is used to determine the fluctuation time of the fusion effect when the fusion effect is selected. Also in this case, since the accurate residual fluctuation time at which the second special symbol fluctuates and stops is set in the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j, the fusion effect is stopped by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. It is possible to set a fusion effect of the variable time according to the timing of the operation.

The fusion effect start flag 223k is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the fusion effect. The fusion effect start flag 223k is set to ON when the special figure 2 variation pattern command for the second special symbol is received and the lottery result is a small hit (S2405 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the display fusion effect command indicating the display mode (fusion effect pattern) of the selected fusion effect is set, it is set to off (S2609 in FIG. 57). The fusion effect start flag 223k is a flag that is set to off in the initial setting such as when the power is turned on.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 81) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, each third symbol is variablely displayed and displayed in a variable manner based on the reception of the variable pattern command between the first special symbol and the second special symbol output from the main control device 110. The fusion effect is selected and executed according to the timing when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate and the period until the timing when the second special symbol stops fluctuating. As a result, the small hit of the present embodiment is drawn with a high probability (both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 398/399), and the small hit of the first special symbol is frequently executed. Even if there is, by displaying the fusion effect, the player can determine whether or not it is the timing to play the game with expectation, and the game can be played with sharpness. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the effect indicating that the small hit of the first special symbol is executed is frequently executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

In addition, the playability of the present embodiment is such that when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner in the lottery result of the small hit, the small hit of the special symbol that stops after the fluctuation time elapses first. Is executed. The small hit of the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous than the small hit of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped before the first special symbol, which is advantageous to the player. (A state in which a small hit of the second special symbol is executed) can be given. However, it is difficult to identify from the third symbol whether or not the change of the second special symbol is stopped first, and the interest of the game is lowered. In the present embodiment, the variation of the fusion effect is started at the timing when the variation of the second special symbol starts, and whether or not the variation of the second special symbol is stopped first is configured to be notified by a rabbit and turtle race. did. By doing so, the player simultaneously monitors the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and sees the fusion effect without determining the type of the special symbol to be stopped first. You can learn about the special symbols that stop first. Therefore, even if the game is complicated, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner with a simple effect.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by 1. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions constituting the control program can be read. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be enabled in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) executed after the boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 59) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 61 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b at power-on, the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64a is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 59).

An image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the first ball-entry port 64, the fluctuating image at power-on The image controller 237 is displayed from the MPU 231 so that the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed to. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball has entered the first winning opening 64a, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of the normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the through gate 67, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be performed more often, and the chance of winning the normal symbol will also increase. Therefore, since there are many chances that the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 64b, and the lottery of the special symbol can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit of the special symbol, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first winning opening 64a is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal pattern, and the ball becomes the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 64b, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even when the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit with a special pattern without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery will be a big hit of the special symbol, the player can perform the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that the jackpot will be a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot will definitely be a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or the back side A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 25). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. Is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. ..

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 26). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. The Null data meaning that is specified.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In addition, in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 26, in the example of FIG. 26). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 59) (see S2805 in FIG. 59). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 72 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3101 in FIG. 61B), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 61B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 61B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 61 (b) see S3109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 62 to 68) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 71) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 72 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is set for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 61 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 69) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 27) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 27, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 61 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4307 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 73). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 73). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4902 in FIG. 74).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 61 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S4902 of FIG. 74).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 50. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). The details of this special symbol variation processing (S104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

After executing the special symbol variation processing, the processing for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and the processing for passing the sphere at the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are executed. (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104) makes various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and displays the determined variation by predetermined control. In the embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control the variable display, or control the stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in the middle (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in the middle or the small hit is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display elapses, the processing of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Will be done. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), the second special symbol is variable-stopped with a symbol indicating a big hit (or small hit), and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol during the variable display is executed. When the second special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the variation display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, an extremely short fluctuation time is selected so as not to be forcibly stopped due to the fluctuation of the other. ing. As a result, it is possible to configure the jackpot determination so that it is not forcibly stopped and displayed as a lottery result that is out of order due to forced stop. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variation display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start processing is executed (S203). In the first special symbol change start process (S203), a process related to the start of change of the first special symbol is executed. The first special symbol change start processing (S203) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32.

After the first special symbol change start process (S203) or the second special symbol change stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is displaying the change (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed. , The process of stopping the variable display is executed with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variation display (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start processing is executed (S206). In the second special symbol change start process (S206), the process required to start the change of the second special symbol is executed. The second special symbol variation start processing (S206) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S203).

In the first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 30, S203), first, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64a (S301). If there is no winning in the first winning opening 64a (S301: No), this process ends as it is. If there is a prize in the first winning opening 64a (S301: Yes), then each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. (S302).

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S303). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303) will be described in detail later, but the game state is set based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. Based on, the determination of big hit, small hit, etc. is executed. The details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303) will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S304). In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), the variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. The process for selecting based on each counter value is executed. The details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304) will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

After the first symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), 1 is subtracted from the value of the state counter 203k (S305), and it is determined whether the value of the state counter 203k is larger than 0 (S306). If the value of the status counter 203k is larger than 0 (S306: Yes), this process ends as it is. If the value of the state counter 203k is 0 (S306: No), then the state A is set in the state setting area 203m (S307), the state command indicating the state A is set (S308), and then this process is performed. To finish.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the state counter 203k is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, and when the state counter 203k becomes 0, the state A which is the initial state (normal state) is set. Will be done. As a result, when the state B or the state C is set, the value of the state counter becomes 0, and the state A is automatically shifted to the state A and set. As a result, the state is changed according to the number of times the special symbol is changed, and the change pattern selection table for the small hit of the second special symbol is switched to give the player an advantageous state for a certain period of time with easy control. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, based on the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 14A), the lottery result is acquired depending on whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value (S402). Here, as shown in FIG. 14A, "399" is set as the big hit determination value with respect to the value of the first random number counter C1, and "0 to 398" is set as the small hit determination value. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, if it is not a big hit, it is determined that all are small hits.

It is determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S403), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S403: Yes), the big hit flag 203f is set on for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S404). , The special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is set as a jackpot (S405), and the jackpot of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the hit type counter. A symbol is set (S406), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit in the process of S403, that is, it is determined that it is a small hit (S403: No), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203i is set to ON (S407), and the special figure 1 The lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is set as a small hit (S408), the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and then this process is performed. finish.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 30, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S304), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is first acquired (S501), and then in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303), the first It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot flag is set to ON for the first special symbol (S502).

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S502: Yes), the jackpot fluctuation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S503). , S505. In the processing of S503, one of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation patterns A to C is selected based on the hit variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 15C) and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S502, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a jackpot (that is, the jackpot flag 203f for the first special symbol is off) (S502: No), the acquired variation type counter. A small hit variation pattern is selected from the set small hit variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 16A) based on the value of CS1 (S504), and then the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S505, a special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern is generated (S505), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 33, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the jackpot flag 203f is turned on for the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is determined whether or not it is set to (S602). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203f is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to ON (S603). Although not shown, when the process of S603 is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is turned on is set.

When the processing of S603 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (S605). After that, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S606). Then, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the jackpot flag 203f is set to off for the first special symbol (S602: No), the special figure 1 small hit stop process is executed (S610), and this process ends as it is. To do. In this special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610), a process related to the stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the small hit of the determination result is executed. The details of the special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is turned on. Determine (S608). If it is determined in the process of S608 that the variation stop flag 203g in FIG. 1 is off (S608: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S608 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203g is on (S608: Yes), it means that the second special symbol is stopped by a big hit or a small hit. 1 In order to stop the fluctuation based on the special symbol, the special figure 1 forced stop process is executed (S609). The details of this special figure 1 forced stop process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

In this way, in the first special symbol stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed (S601: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is used. The process of stopping the variation display (S603 to S609 or S612) is executed. Further, when the second special symbol is stopped fluctuating with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the fluctuation display is displayed. The process (S612) of forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. When the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) (S610: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol being displayed is interrupted (temporarily stopped). You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special figure 1 forced stop process (S609), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 33, S204), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 forced stop process (S609).

In the special figure 1 forced stop process (FIG. 34, S609), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203 g is set to off (S611), and then the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203 g is turned off. A stop command is set (S612). Then, the variation type of the first special symbol is set to out (S613), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped to change with the outlier symbol (S614), and the special symbol 1 confirmation command of the first special symbol is set. After setting (S615), this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is turned on (the timing at which the fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit in the second special symbol stops), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not yet set. Even if it has passed, it is forcibly stopped as a result of the judgment of disconnection. As a result, even if the lottery results are variablely displayed for the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, it is sufficient to execute a small hit or a big hit for only one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 33, S204), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610).

In the special figure 1 small hit stop process (FIG. 35, S610), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to on (S621), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is turned on. The fluctuation stop command is set (S622). Then, the small hit scenario corresponding to the selected small hit type is set (S623), the confirmation command of the first special symbol is set (S624), and the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set. After stopping (S625), this process ends.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIGS. 29, S104), will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. 36 to 38 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol change start processing (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 36, S206), the process for the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol in contrast to the above-mentioned first special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 30, S203). The only difference is that the processing for the second special symbol is changed to the first special symbol, and the same processing is executed for the other processing, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 36, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703).

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 37, S703) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303) in the following points. In the process of S801 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol execution area 203a is changed to the second special symbol execution area 203b, and in each process of S804 to S809 corresponding to each process of S404 to S409. , Special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to special figure 2 (second special symbol). Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 38, S704) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S304) in the following points. In the process of S902 corresponding to the process of S502, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S503 to S505. In each process of S903 to S905 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 29, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 33 and S204) in the following points. In the process of S912 corresponding to the process of S602, "for special figure 1" is changed to "for special figure 2", and in the process of S913 corresponding to the process of S603, special figure 2 The point that the fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag, the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the processing of S1914 corresponding to the processing of S604, and the point of S608. In the processing of S918 corresponding to the processing, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag, and in the processing of S917 corresponding to the processing of S607, the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol is the second. The point that the special symbol is changed to the variable stop, the point that the special figure 1 forced stop process is changed to the special figure 2 forced stop process in the process of S919 corresponding to the process of S609, and the point that corresponds to the process of S610 is 920. The difference is that the special figure 1 small hit stop process is changed to the special figure 2 small hit stop process in the above processing. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the special figure 2 forced stop process (see S919 and FIG. 40 (a) in FIG. 39) executed in the second special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 39) and the second special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 39) are also performed. Similarly, the special figure 2 small hit stop process (see S920 and FIG. 40 (b) in FIG. 39) executed in (see) also includes the above-mentioned special figure 1 forced stop process (see FIG. 34) and the special figure 1 small hit. Since the same process as the stop process (see FIG. 35) is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously variablely displayed. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display for a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display mounting unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S1001). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes from the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device (not shown) to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 632. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S1001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1001: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device is in variable display (S1002). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1011). ). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S1009, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device (not shown).

In the process of S1011, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1011: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1011 when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S1011: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1012). In the process of S1012, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1007, the "○" symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lit up). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the miss is set by the process of S1010, the second symbol display device (not shown) has an "x" symbol as the second symbol. It is set to be stopped (lit). When the stop display is set by the process of S1012, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S1007 and the process of S1009. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1013). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1013: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1014). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (S1013: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1002: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S1003). When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S1003: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 are stored in the normal figure execution area 203c, respectively. (S1004). The validity determination of the second random number value acquired based on the random number table 202b per normal figure is executed (S1005). It is determined whether the lottery result of S1005 is a win (S1006). When it is determined that the lottery result of S1005 is a win (S1006: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S1007). The opening time of the electric accessory 64b1 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1008). After that, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is selected based on the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S1004 and the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202 g (S1009). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1006, when it is determined that the second symbol is out of alignment, the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S1010), and then the process of S1009 is executed, and then this process is terminated.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1101) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 43), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1201). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1202). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1203).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1204), and if it is turned on (S1204: Yes), the process shifts to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1204: No), it is further determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205), and if it is not stored. (S1205: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1512 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1206), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1207: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1512 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S1212, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1212). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1213, S1514) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1213, S1214) is executed.

In addition, the initialization process (S1213, S1214) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1213, S1214), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1213), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1214). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1210.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1204: No), the power outage occurrence information is stored (S1205: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is stored. If it is normal (S1207: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1208). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1209), and the process proceeds to S1210. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1210). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1211). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (S1600) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). In this main process (see FIG. 44), the counter update process and the power off time process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 44), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1301).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303) and executed. The jackpot control process is executed (S1304). The jackpot control process (S1304) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45, but a process of setting the operation of the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot game process (S1304) is executed, the small hit control process (S1305) is executed. In this small hit control process (S1305), a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 in the small hit game is executed. This small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1306). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S1306), the opening / closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 64b1 is executed. After that, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S3607).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1308). Briefly, on condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the ordinary electric accessory 64b1 is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1309), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1309: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1309). ), If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S1309: Yes), the process is shifted to S1310, and each process after S1301 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1310: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1311). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1301 (S1312).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1301 to S1308 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1308, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1309: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 42 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1313 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1313), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1314). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1315), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1316), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1319 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1301 to S1308, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1311 and S1312 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1251. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is set in the initial setting process (S1201) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1301 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1304). This jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the second This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S1621). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1401: Yes), the pointer of the set jackpot scenario is updated (S1402). Here, in the jackpot scenario, the processes specified for the pointers that are updated in time series are set, and the processes required for the jackpot game are set in time series.

It is determined whether the data of the jackpot scenario indicated by the updated pointer is the timing indicating the start of the jackpot game (S1403). The jackpot start is data that is set when the pointer is first updated after the jackpot scenario is set. When it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (S1403: Yes), the opening command is set (S1404). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1403, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the start of the big hit (S1403: No), it is determined whether or not the data indicating that it is the start timing of a new round is set (S1405). When it is determined that the data indicating the start of a new round is set (S1405: Yes), the opening of the second variable winning device 650 is set (S1406). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1405 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1405: No), it is determined whether the data indicates the end timing of the round (S1407). When it is determined that the data indicates the end timing of the round (S1407: Yes), the closing of the second variable winning device 650 is set (S1408). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1407 that the data does not indicate the end timing of the round (S1407: No), it is determined whether the data indicates the ending timing (S1409). If it is determined that the data indicates the ending start timing (S1409: Yes), a display command indicating the ending display mode is set (S1410), and the set jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the data does not indicate the ending start timing (S1409: No), the first winning process is executed (S1412).

Here, with reference to FIG. 46, the first winning process (FIG. 46, S1412), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 45, S1304) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first winning process (S1412). In this first winning process (S1412), the winning balls of the second variable winning device 650 during the round are counted, and the corresponding control is executed.

In the first winning process (FIG. 46, S1412), first, it is determined whether the data of the jackpot scenario indicated by the pointer corresponds to the data during the round period (S1501). If it is determined that the round period is not in progress (S1501: No), the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1502). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round period is in progress (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second specific winning opening 650a (S1503). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second specific winning opening 650a (S1503: Yes), the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is added by 1 and updated (S1504). It is determined whether the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (10 balls in this embodiment) (S1505). When it is determined that the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is less than the upper limit value (S1505: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (S1505: Yes), the second variable winning device 650 is set to the closed state (S1506). The pointer of the jackpot scenario is updated to the position indicating the corresponding data at the end of the round (S1507), and then this process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the end condition of one round is 10 balls entered or until the opening period of 30 seconds elapses, but based on the determination that 10 balls have entered, the jackpot scenario By updating the pointer at the end of the round, the end of the round can be set immediately when 10 balls are won, and the process can be shifted to the subsequent processing related to the jackpot game.

Next, the small hit control process (S1305), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process (S1305). In the small hit control process (S1305), the opening control of the first variable winning device 65 in the small hit game is executed.

In the small hit control process (FIG. 47, S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit scenario is not set (S1601: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the small hit scenario is set (S1601: Yes), the pointer of the small hit scenario is updated by 1 (S1602). Here, the small hit scenario is set for each small hit type, and the processing related to the first variable winning device 65 executed in each small hit game is set in chronological order with respect to the pointer.

It is determined whether the data of the small hit scenario indicated by the updated pointer is the data corresponding to the start timing of the small hit game (S1603). When it is determined that the data corresponds to the start timing of the small hit game (S1603: Yes), an opening command indicating the start of the small hit game is set (S1604). After that, this process ends. In the present embodiment, the display mode shown in FIGS. 7 (a) to 7 (b) is displayed for the opening of the small hit game.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit game (S1603: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1605). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1605: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S1606). In this small hit operation setting process (1606), the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k (solenoid that operates the switching member 65h) of the first variable winning device 65 and the operation timing of the opening / closing door 65f are set respectively. The details of this small hit operation setting process (S1606) will be described with reference to FIG. 48.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit operation setting process (S1606), which is one of the small hit control processes (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the small hit operation setting process (S1656), first, the opening operation data of the first variable winning device 65 corresponding to the small hit type is read from the small hit scenario (S1701). As the opening operation data read here, the opening timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the operation timing of the flow path solenoid 65k are read, respectively.

The operation of the flow path solenoid 65k is set based on the opening operation data read in S1701 (S1702). The operation of the flow path solenoid 65k is set until the solenoid is turned on and off. The opening operation (opening timing) of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set (S1703). After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operations of the flow path solenoid and the opening / closing door 65f1 corresponding to the small hit type are set respectively. As a result, it is possible to easily switch between the opening operation that enables the ball to enter the V winning switch 65e3 and the opening operation that makes it difficult to enter the ball (impossible to enter the ball) to the V winning switch 65e3.

In the present embodiment, in the small hits A to D (all small hits), the guide piece 65h2 turns on the flow path solenoid 65k in the open state shown in FIG. 10A for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit game. It can be switched by. On the other hand, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game in the small hits A to C, and at that time, the guide piece 65h2 is switched to the closed state, so that a specific prize is given. The game ball winning in the mouth 65a cannot be guided to the specific discharge port 65e2. That is, it is set to be impossible (difficult) to win the V winning switch 65e3.

On the other hand, in the small hit D, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for 1 second from the start of the small hit game, then closed for 0.2 seconds (interval period between the next rounds), and then opened / closed again for 1 second. The door 65f1 is opened. As a result, when the game ball enters the specific entry port 65a in the open state in the small hit D, the guide piece 65h2 is set to the open state, so that the guide piece 65h2 causes the game ball to enter the special discharge port 65e2. Is guided to win the V winning switch 65e3. As a result, after the small hit D, the start of the big hit game is executed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 47. In the process of S1607, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the round (the opening period of 2 seconds has elapsed) (S1607). When it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the round (S1607: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set (S1608). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1607, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the round (S1607: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the ending (S1609). When it is determined that it is the ending timing (S1609: Yes), the small hit ending process is executed (S1610). The small hit ending process (S1610) will be described later with reference to FIG. 49, but at the end of the small hit game, the V winning switch 65e3 determines whether or not the game ball has passed during the small hit game and passes. If this is the case, control processing such as setting a jackpot game is executed.

A small hit ending process (S1610), which is one of the small hit control processes (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit ending process (S1610).

In the small hit ending process (FIG. 49, S1610), first, the small hit ending command is set (S1801). It is determined whether the V winning flag 203e is set to ON (S1802). Here, the V winning flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit game, and is a second prize executed in the small hit control process (S1305) described later. In the process (FIG. 50, S1611), when it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is on, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3, the V winning flag 203e is set to on. The flag.

If it is determined in the process of S1802 that the V winning flag 203e is on (S1802: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot A is set (S1803). The V winning flag 203e is set to off (S1804), and then the process of S1805 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is off (S1802: No), the process of S1805 is executed. In the process of S1805, the states (states A to C) corresponding to the small hit type executed this time are set in the state setting area 203m (S1805). The value of the status counter corresponding to the set status is set in the status counter 203k (S1806).

The state corresponding to the small hit type set here is set based on the small hit post-state set in the small hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14D). Further, the value of the state counter corresponding to each small hit is set based on the value of the number of state transitions set in the state transition table 202e (see FIG. 15A). After the execution of S1806, a state command corresponding to the set state is set (S1807).

In the present embodiment, when the small hit D of the second special symbol is executed, the most advantageous state C is set. Therefore, even after the small hit D is executed and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 and the big hit game is executed, the state C advantageous to the player is set, so that the small hit D is easily executed. , It is possible to raise the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. Further, even if the game ball cannot be passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the execution of the small hit D, the state C is set after the small hit D, so that the small hit D is expected to be executed again. Can be given to the player, and the player's motivation for the game can be suppressed from being significantly reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 47. In the process of S1609, if it is determined that it is not the ending timing, the second winning process is executed (S1611). After that, this process ends. The second winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG. 50, but the process relating to the entry of the game ball into the first variable winning device 65 is executed.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second winning process (S1661), which is one of the small hit control processes (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the second winning process (S1661), first, it is determined whether the data indicated by the pointer of the small hit scenario is in the round valid period (S1901). The term "valid period of the round" means that the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, the closing condition is satisfied and the door is closed, and the game ball entered in the first variable winning device 65 is discharged. This is the period including the brushing time. In the present embodiment, the ball brushing period is set to 2 seconds.

If it is determined in S1901 that the round is valid (S1901: Yes), the first winning counter 203d1 is reset to the initial value 0 (S1902). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first specific winning opening 65a (S1903). When it is determined that no game ball has entered the first specific winning opening 65a (S1903: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first specific entry port 65a (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the first winning counter 203d1 to update. It is determined whether or not the first winning counter 203d1 is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (10 balls in this embodiment) (S1905). When it is determined that the value of the first winning counter 203d1 is less than the upper limit value, the process of S1908 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first winning counter 203d1 is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (S1905: Yes), the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set to be closed (S1906). The pointer of the small hit scenario is updated to the position of the data indicating the end timing of the round (S1907). After that, the process of S1908 is executed.

In the process of S1908, it is determined whether the V winning flag 203e is on (S1908). When the V winning flag 203e is on (S1908: Yes), the game ball has already passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (the right to execute the big hit game has been acquired in the small hit game), so this process. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is off (S1908: No), it is determined whether the V winning switch 65e3 is on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (S1909). When it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is off (S1909: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is on (S1909: Yes), the V winning flag 203e is set to on (S1910), and the V winning command is set (S1911). After that, this process ends. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this V winning command, a notification mode indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is set. In the present embodiment, the character "V" of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the sound effect "Kyuin" is output, and the corresponding lamp is lit.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 58. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2117 (see FIG. 52) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 52, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 52 and S2114), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2117. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2117 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2003. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2117 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2117, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see FIGS. 52 and S2116). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2117 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S2008 via the processes of S2004 to S2006 This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

Note that the clearing process of S2009 is skipped because when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process (S2101: Yes) was executed (S2101). If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S2102 to S2110 determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111 and the variation display setting process of S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2101: Yes). S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, and the setting is used as a command for the display control device. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). After that, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After that, a fluctuation time measurement process for measuring the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed (S2111). The fluctuation time measurement process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, but a process of subtracting and updating the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the passage of time is performed. Execute.

When the process of S2111 is executed, the command determination process (S2112) that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2113. The details of this command determination process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

In the process of S2113, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is generated by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

When the processing of S2113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2112). This command determination process (S2112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. The details of the command determination process (S2112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 53, S2112), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control device 110 Further, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for variablely displaying the first special symbol, and is mainly a command for designating the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed in order to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (S2202). The special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 54, but the settings required for variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is executed.

Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 54, S2202), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. Extract (S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. From this fluctuation pattern type, the winning / failing judgment result (small hit or big hit) can be determined.

When the process of S2302 is executed, the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is determined (S2303). It is determined whether the lottery result indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is a small hit (S2304). It is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit of the first special symbol (S2304). If the lottery result is not a small hit, that is, a big hit (S2304: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2304: Yes), the fusion effect start flag 223k is set to ON (S2305). It is determined whether the second special symbol is stopped (S2306). When it is determined that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped (S2306: Yes), the preparation effect selection table in the fusion effect selection table 222b is based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the effect counter 223 g. The preparation-preparing effect is selected from 222b3 (S2307). After that, the process of S2310 is executed.

Here, in the configuration of this embodiment, the first special symbol always starts to fluctuate first. Therefore, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, it indicates that it is normal. Further, in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed, the variable display of the fusion effect is started. During the period in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol has started and the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped, the fusion effect before the start of the competition (before the start) shown in FIG. 4A is displayed. Here, in the preparation effect selection table 222b3 in the fusion effect selection table 222b, a plurality of types of fusion effects before the start of the competition as shown in FIG. 4A are set. A value of the effect counter 223 g is assigned to each of the fusion effects before the start of the plurality of competitions, and the corresponding fusion effect is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the fusion production before the competition starts, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored. It should be noted that this pre-competition fusion effect is configured, for example, in a display mode of 5 seconds, and is repeatedly set until a new fusion effect is set or a new display mode is set in the third symbol display device 81. To.

In the present embodiment, the fusion effect before the competition is configured to be selected by the value of the effect counter 223 g, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the fusion effect is selected according to the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol currently being changed. It may be configured as. With this configuration, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol can be recognized from the fusion effect before the race, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol that is advantageous to the player (in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0). It is possible to notify the player that the variation pattern of .5 seconds)) is selected. Furthermore, by switching the type of fusion effect selected according to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened and the game ball can enter the second winning opening 64b. It is possible to notify the person, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player stops firing and misses the winning opportunity to the second winning opening 64b.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S2306: No), the special effect selection table in the fusion effect selection table 222b is based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter. A special effect is set from 222b4 (S2308). An abnormal change command is set (S2309), and then the process of S2310 is executed.

Here, if the second special symbol is already changing at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, it is in an abnormal state in the configuration of the present embodiment. If the change of the second special symbol has already started when the change of the first special symbol starts, it is possible that the game ball that wins the first winning opening 64a is before winning the game ball (through gate 67 and the first winning opening). The game ball is stopped by a magnet or the like at the position between 64a) and the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 64b, or the game is played between the second winning opening 64b and the ordinary electric accessory 64b1. It is conceivable that the ball is pinched and the game ball enters the second winning opening 64b after a while. In this case, the special effect displayed in the effect display area Ds3 is an effect in which the characters "winning abnormality" are displayed. In addition, an alarm sound is output to notify the amusement store that an abnormality has occurred. In addition, a command indicating that the hall computer is abnormally changed (winning abnormality) is output from the external output terminal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from fluctuating before the first special symbol due to fraud or malfunction, or by displaying only the second special symbol in a variable manner, which causes a great disadvantage to the game store side. ..

In the process of S2310, the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time is set in the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (S2310). After that, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. After the process of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 54, S2202) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner. The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command mainly for notifying the success / failure determination result of the second special symbol and the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) is executed. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (S2401), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S2401). S2402). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIGS. 57, S2113) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When the process of S2402 is executed, the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined from the received fluctuation pattern command (S2403). It is determined whether the lottery result indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is a small hit (S2404). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2404: Yes), the fusion effect start flag 223k is set to ON (S2405). It is determined whether the first special symbol is changing (S2406). When it is determined that the first special symbol is changing (S2406: Yes), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time). It is determined whether the time is long (S2407). When it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (S2407: Yes), the first special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player stops first, and the first special symbol is small. Since the hit is executed, the losing fusion effect is selected from the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 of the fusion effect selection table 222b based on the remaining fluctuation time of Special Figure 1 and the effect counter 223 g (S2408).

In this losing fusion effect, the effect of starting the competition shown in FIG. 4 (b) is displayed, and the effect of winning the rabbit shown in FIG. 5 (a) is displayed in the effect display area Ds3 with the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol. It is a production to be executed. By displaying the effect that the turtle loses, the player can recognize that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first. In the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, a plurality of types of losing fusion effects are set corresponding to the values of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, the player can see various effects, and can suppress a problem that the player gets bored early or can predict the result before the result of the effect is displayed.

After that, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set in the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j as the residual fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special figure 2 residual fluctuation time) based on the residual fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (S2409). .. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2407, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (S2407: No), the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 and the value of the effect counter 223 g are set. Based on this, the winning fusion effect is selected and set from the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 of the fusion effect selection table 222b (S2410). The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set in the residual fluctuation time counter 223i of the special figure 1 (S2411). After that, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set in the residual fluctuation time counter 223j of the special figure 2 (S2412).

Here, when the second special symbol determined to be No in S2407 stops before the first special symbol, the small hit of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, as the fusion effect, the effect of starting the competition shown in FIG. 4 (b) is executed, and the winning fusion effect in which the turtle shown in FIG. 5 (b) wins as a result of the competition is selected in the second special symbol. Executed during the variable time. Further, in this winning fusion effect, a plurality of types of winning fusion effects are set in the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, various winning fusion effects can be selected, and a wide variety of effects can be provided to the player.

In each of the above-mentioned winning fusion effects, the winning effect is set corresponding to the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and in the losing fusion effect, the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts from the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Each effect period is set by subtracting the minimum possible period (the period until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate earliest). In the losing fusion effect, 3 seconds until the end is set on the blackout screen, and by adjusting the display period of the blackout according to the timing when the fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol starts, the residual fluctuation of the 1st special symbol It is set to suit the time.

Further, in the processing of S2406, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not changing (S2413), only the second special symbol starts to change, which is an abnormal state. Therefore, the fluctuation time and effect of the second special symbol A special effect is selected based on the value of the counter 223 g (S2413). An abnormal fluctuation command indicating that the fluctuation is abnormal is set (S2414). After that, the process of S2412 described above is executed to end this process.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), this process ends. When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on. (S2501). The stop type (big hit A, small hit A to D, miss, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2502). The extracted stop type is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is of the second special symbol. Each is identifiable as a stop type. After executing the process of S2502, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S2205: No), it is determined whether the state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209). ). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S2209: Yes), the state information (any of the states A to C) indicated by the state command is set in the subordinate state setting area 223h (S2210). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the status command has not been received in the process of S2209 (S2209: No), it is determined whether the V winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2211). When it is determined that the V winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S2211: Yes), a V winning effect indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is set (S2212). A display V prize effect command for instructing the V prize effect (the character "V" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81) is set (S2213). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2211, when it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S2214). When it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S2214: Yes), the special figure 1 confirmation command for display (when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received) or the special figure 2 for display A confirmation command (when a confirmation command in Special Figure 2 is received) is set (S2213). The special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i (when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received) or the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j (when the special figure 2 confirmation command is received) is reset to the initial value 0. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received in the processing of S2214 (S2214: No), the processing corresponding to the other commands is executed (S2217), and this End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the variation display setting process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2113). This variation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) is one process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A, small hits A to D), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is performed. Execute.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2601). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is off (S2601: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the process of S2604 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2601: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S2702).

Next, in the process of S2603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIGS. 53 and S2112) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Acquired from 223z, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S2603). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S2603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2604). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2604: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2607 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S2706). In the process of S2402 of the special figure 2 variation start process (FIG. 55, S2204), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is generated (S2606). Here, the variable display of “◯” and “×” displayed in the second display area Ds2 is set.

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S2606 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 54). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 has a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fusion effect start flag 223k is on (S2607). When it is determined that the fusion effect start flag 223k is on (S2607: Yes), it is the timing to set the fusion effect in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, so that the fusion effect start flag 223k is turned off. Is set to (S2608), and a display fusion effect command indicating the selected fusion effect is set (S2609). After that, the process of S2610 is executed.

In the process of S2610, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON (S2610). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f are not set on (that is, off) (S2610: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is on. The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is set to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2612). ). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the fluctuation time measurement process (S2111), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fluctuation time measurement process (S2111). In this fluctuation time measurement process (S2111), a process of subtracting the remaining fluctuation time of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the passage of time is executed.

It is determined whether or not the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223i in FIG. 1 is greater than 0 (S2701). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is larger than 0 (S2701: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is subtracted by 1 and updated (S2702). After that, the process of S2703 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is 0 (S2701: No), the process of S2703 is executed.

In the process of S2703, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is larger than 0 (S2703). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is larger than 0 (S2703: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is subtracted by 1 (S2704). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is 0 (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the residual fluctuation time of the second special symbol are subtracted and updated by about 1 ms corresponding to the counter value 1, so that the accurate first special symbol and second special symbol are updated. The remaining fluctuation time of the symbol can be measured.

In the configuration of the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection table at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is switched according to the small hit type of the first special symbol, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation of the small hit of the first special symbol is not limited to this. It may be configured to switch the pattern selection table. In this case, the variation time of the first special symbol can be set advantageously for the player by switching to the variation pattern selection table in which a long variation time is easily selected. Further, the present invention is not limited to the small hit of the first special symbol, and may be configured to execute a predetermined lottery (for example, each variation, a table switching lottery is executed with a predetermined probability). Further, the table for selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be switched by the small hit type of the first special symbol, or may be switched by the hit type of the normal symbol or the like. In this case, it is advantageous for the player to switch to a table in which a short fluctuation time of a normal symbol is easily selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reserved balls are not set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but a predetermined number (for example, 4 balls) of reserved balls are set for both or only one of them. You may. For example, by setting the holding ball of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol can be efficiently performed. Further, by setting the holding ball for the second special symbol, the second special symbol can be efficiently changed. When the reserved ball is set in the second special symbol, it is preferable that the opening period of the ordinary electric accessory 64b1 is set to the open state only once during the period when one game ball enters. With this configuration, there is no difference between the number of holdings of the first special symbol (number of winnings) and the number of holdings of the second special symbol (number of winnings), and it is possible to suppress a problem that only the second special symbol fluctuates.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 74. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 59, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2801), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2801) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2801 in FIG. 59) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) (S2905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2801) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 60, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2903 to S2905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2901. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2902 and S2902, the processes of S2903 to S2905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S2903 to S2905 may be executed without performing the processes S2901 and S2902. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 59. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2803, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2804, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 72 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 72 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 23 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61 (b)). The determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 61B) and the simple display setting process (see S3109 in FIG. 61B) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64a, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received via 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 23 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, which is easy. It is possible to perform various fluctuation effects. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2805, interrupt permission is set (S2806), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (a). FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (b). FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 27) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 61B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. Therefore, it is not the image at power-on shown in FIG. 23, but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S3102) is executed, and then the display setting process (S3103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

In the display setting process (S3103), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3102) or the like. Specificly specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S3104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3103) or the simple display setting process (S3109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S3105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S3106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3105), which are determined in the task process (S3104), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S3107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete off, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 23 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3109) is executed to display the image of S3104. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 62, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3201: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S3103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3202), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S3203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3205), the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S3205) will be described with reference to FIG. 63A. FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S3301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S3304), set both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag to off (S3305), and end this process.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 63), in the display setting process, the variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3301. The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the display data table, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the drawing content is transferred by the processing of S3302. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the data table buffer 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is preliminarily stored in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3303, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 62. In the processing of S3204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3206). If there is a display variable type command (S3206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3207), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3207) will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S3401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S3402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S3403), end this stop type command processing, and return to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S3104), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3403, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S3402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3208), and the jackpot-related command is determined. If there is a command (S3208: Yes), the jackpot-related command processing is executed (S3209), and the process returns to the processing of S3201.

Here, the details of the jackpot-related command processing (S3209) will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S3209). This jackpot-related command process (S3209) executes a process corresponding to a jackpot-related command (display opening command, display round number command, display ending command) received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the jackpot-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S3501), and if there is a display opening command (S3501: Yes), the opening command processing is executed. Then (S3502), the process proceeds to S3503.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S3502) will be described with reference to FIG. 65A. FIG. 65A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3605), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3501, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3501: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3503), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S3503: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (b). FIG. 65B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3705), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 64. In the processing of S3503, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3503: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3505), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S3505: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3506), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S3506) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3803). S3804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3805), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 62. In the processing of S3208, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S3208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3210), and the rear image is changed. If there is a command (S3210: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S3211), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S3211) will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (a). FIG. 67A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (see FIG. 73). S3901). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3902), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3901 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3902. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process (S3104), when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S3902 is specified. From, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3902, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 62. In the processing of S3210, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S3210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fusion effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3212), and the display is performed. If there is a fusion effect command for use (S3212: Yes), the fusion effect command process is executed (S3213), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the fusion effect command processing (S3213) will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (b). FIG. 67B is a flowchart showing the fusion effect command processing (S3213). This fusion effect command process (S3213) executes a process corresponding to the display fusion effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the fusion effect command processing (S3213), first, the fusion effect display data table is determined based on the display fusion effect command, the determined fusion effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is used. It is set to 233d (S4001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4002).

Then, based on the fusion effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4004). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S4005), the fusion effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this way, when the fusion effect command for display is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fusion effect command process (S3213) is executed, and the fusion effect (see FIGS. 4 to 7) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. To. As described above, in the present embodiment, when only the first special symbol is changing (the second special symbol is stopped), it is for display indicating the preparation effect (see FIG. 7A) as the fusion effect. The fusion effect command is notified from the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, the winning fusion effect (see FIGS. 4 and 5 (b)) or the losing fusion effect (see FIGS. 4 and 5) as the fusion effect. The display fusion effect command shown (see FIG. 5A) is notified from the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the fusion effect corresponding to the fluctuation state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3212, if it is determined that there is no display fusion effect command (S3212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V winning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3214). If there is a V-winning effect command for display (S3214: Yes), the V-winning effect command process is executed (S3215), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, the details of the V winning effect command processing (S3215) will be described with reference to FIG. 68A. FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing the V winning effect command processing (S3215). This V winning effect command processing (S3215) executes a process corresponding to the display V winning effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V winning effect command processing (S3215), first, the V winning effect display data table is determined based on the V winning effect command for display, and the determined V winning effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

Then, based on the V winning effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4104). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S4105), the V winning effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In this way, when the display V prize effect command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the V prize effect command process (S3215) is executed, and the V prize effect indicating that the third symbol display device 81 has won a V prize (FIG. Not shown) is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the V prize has been won.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3214, if it is determined that there is no display V winning effect command (S3214: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3216), and the error command is determined. If there is (S3216: Yes), the error command process is executed (S3217), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S3219) will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4202). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4202 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4202 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 62. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S3216 (S3216: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3218), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

In the processing of S3201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes). ), The processing of S3202 to S3218 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3201 to S3218 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S3108) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 23 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 63 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 63 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other processes are executed. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 63A) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3301. In addition, the image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S3103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 69, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S4302 to S4304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4302), S4303 to S4304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4401).

In the task processing (S3104), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing such as are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 69. After the warning image setting process (S4304) or in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4305.

In S4305, the pointer update process is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4503), and if it is a demo display data table (S4503: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4505), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4503: No). S4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 69 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S4306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S4309).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4309: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S3104), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the confirmation display flag is on (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S4316). If the demo display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S4317) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S4316, if the demo display flag is on (S4316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S3109), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61B), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, which specifies that the image (one of FIGS. 23B and 23C) is stopped and displayed, is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S3105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 (b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). FIG. 72B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4702). In the process of S4702, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4703. Further, as a result of the processing of S4701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4703.

In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4703 (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 61 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S3109 in FIG. 61 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 62 to 68) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 69 to 71) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) (see S4601: No in FIG. 72 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 contains image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4603), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the display setting process (S3103) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

Further, in the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4802: No), the processes of S4803 and S4804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

In the process of S4806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4807. Further, as a result of the processing of S4805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4807.

In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S4809).

If the rear image change flag 233w is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S4810), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

In the process of S4809, if the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S4809: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4815, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The discrimination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S4813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: No), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S3106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3104) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated (S4901). That is, in the processing of S4901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3104). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S4902 (S4903). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 61 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the fusion effect is displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit for the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. It is configured to be. In the fusion effect based on the jackpot, a so-called cut-in effect called SP effect (see FIG. 75 (b)) is displayed. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the SP effect is displayed while the fusion effect is displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the above-mentioned SP effect is displayed even in the fusion effect executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. If the SP effect is displayed even though the lottery result is a small hit, the effect (shaking) suggesting a state of transition to the SP effect at the end of the SP effect (that is, at the end of the small hit game). Direction) is displayed. As a result, even if the SP effect is displayed but the jackpot is not a big hit, the player is given a privilege that it becomes easy to determine the state to be transferred after that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display control device 81 is partially changed. The configuration of the hit variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the configuration of the winning fusion effect selection table provided in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 75, an example of the fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (c) are continuous views partially showing an example of a fusion effect.

In the present embodiment, when the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol is won, various winning fusion effects (winning fusion effects A, B, C) are displayed, and the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol is won. In some cases, various losing fusion effects (losing fusion effects A, B, C, D, E, F) are displayed (see FIGS. 76 (b) and 76 (c)).

In the winning fusion effect A or the losing fusion effect A displayed when the jackpot is won, an effect imitating the competition between the rabbit and the turtle is started as in the first embodiment described above (FIG. 75 (Fig. 75). a) See). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the competition between the rabbit and the turtle (2 seconds in the present embodiment), the characters "SP chance!" Are displayed in the center of the screen for the SP effect (so-called cut-in). The effect) is displayed (see FIG. 75 (b)). After that, a stop symbol (for example, "777") indicating a jackpot is displayed (not shown). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot has been won. Further, since the player plays the game with the expectation that the SP effect is displayed while the fusion effect is displayed, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the fusion effect displayed when winning various small hits, various fusion effects with SP effect (winning fusion effect B, losing fusion effect B, C, D, E) in which the above-mentioned SP effect is displayed and SP Various fusion effects without production (winning fusion effect C, losing fusion effect F) are available (see FIG. 76 (b)).

In various fusion effects with SP effects, the SP effects are displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed (2 seconds later) from the start of the fusion effects, as in the case of the winning fusion effects A or the losing fusion effects A described above (FIG. 75 (FIG. 75). b) See). After that, a stop symbol (for example, "341") indicating a small hit is displayed (see FIG. 75 (c)). The stop symbol indicating this small hit is shaken up and down a predetermined number of times (2 to 8 times in this embodiment), and then a complete stop display (stationary state) is displayed. The number of times the stop symbol sways is determined according to various fusion effects (winning fusion effect B, losing fusion effect B, C, D, E), and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 (b). To do. As a result, the player can predict the winning small hit type from the number of times the stop symbol sways (that is, it is possible to predict the set game state), so that the number of times the stop symbol sways It can be noticed and the interest of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, in the fusion effect without the SP effect (winning fusion effect C, losing fusion effect F), the same winning fusion effect or the losing fusion effect as in the first embodiment described above is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the SP effect is displayed in the fusion effect, the stop display may be displayed with a stop symbol indicating a small hit. In this case, the effect that the stop symbol sways is executed, and the privilege that the set game state can be predicted is given. As a result, even if the SP effect is displayed in the fusion effect, but then a small hit (not a big hit) occurs, the player will be discouraged from participating in the game. Can be prevented (suppressed).

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 76A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Since the other configurations of the ROM 202 are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 76A, in the hit variation pattern selection table 202f of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Then, “0 to 198” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern C. Therefore, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to secure the production time of the fusion effect (losing fusion effect A) displayed when the above-mentioned jackpot is won.

On the other hand, as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern E (variation time 4 seconds) is set. Then, “0 to 198” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the second jackpot fluctuation pattern E. Therefore, similarly to the first special symbol, when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern (variation time 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to secure the production time of the winning fusion effect (winning fusion effect A) displayed when the above-mentioned jackpot is won.

FIG. 76 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 provided in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 110 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 76 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 110 in the second embodiment. Since the other configurations of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). The winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 is provided with the winning fusion effect A as a fusion effect type when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit. Then, "0 to 198" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the winning fusion effect A. Therefore, when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the winning fusion effect A of the second special symbol is selected regardless of the value of the effect counter 223 g.

On the other hand, as the fusion effect type when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit D (missing), a winning fusion effect B and a winning fusion effect C are provided. Then, "0 to 99" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the winning fusion effect B, and "100 to 198" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the winning fusion effect C. Has been done. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit D (missing), the winning fusion effect B with SP effect is selected with a probability of 100/199, and the winning fusion effect B with SP effect is selected with a probability of 99/199 without SP effect. Winning fusion production C is selected.

Next, the contents of the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (c). In the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, the losing fusion effect A is selected as the fusion effect type when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a big hit. Then, "0 to 198" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect A. Therefore, when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the losing fusion effect A is selected regardless of the value of the effect counter 223 g.

On the other hand, the losing fusion effects B, C, and F are provided as the fusion effect types when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit A (missing). Then, "0 to 19" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect B, and "20 to 49" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect C. For the losing fusion effect F, "50 to 198" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit A (missing), the losing fusion effect B with SP effect (2 times of shaking) is selected with a probability of 20/199, and 30/199. With the probability of, the losing fusion effect C with the SP effect (4 times of shaking) is selected, and with the probability of 149/199, the losing fusion effect F without the SP effect is selected.

Further, as a fusion effect type when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit B (missing), losing fusion effects C, D, and F are provided. Then, "0 to 49" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect C, and "50 to 99" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect D. For the losing fusion effect F, "100 to 198" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit B (missing), the losing fusion effect C with SP effect (4 times of shaking) is selected with a probability of 50/199, and 50/199. With the probability of, the losing fusion effect D with SP effect (6 times of shaking) is selected, and with the probability of 99/199, the losing fusion effect F without SP effect is selected.

Further, as the fusion effect type when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit C (missing), the losing fusion effects D, E, and F are provided. Then, "0 to 74" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect D, and "75 to 149" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect E. For the losing fusion effect F, "150 to 198" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit C (missing), the losing fusion effect D with SP effect (6 times of shaking) is selected with a probability of 75/199, and 75/199. With the probability of, the losing fusion effect E with SP effect (8 times of shaking) is selected, and with the probability of 49/199, the losing fusion effect F without SP effect is selected.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the symbol indicating the small hit is stopped and displayed after the SP effect is displayed, the stopped symbol is completely stopped and displayed according to the small hit type ( The number of times it shakes before it stands still) is set. As a result, the small hit type can be predicted (that is, the set game state can be predicted) based on the number of times the symbol indicating the small hit is shaken until it is completely stopped and displayed (stationary). It is possible to pay attention to the stop display of the displayed symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. The selection ratio of each SP effect described above may be arbitrarily determined.

In the present embodiment, the number of times the symbol indicating the small hit is shaken is changed according to the winning small hit type until the symbol indicating the small hit is completely stopped, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. Absent. Specifically, a specific character image (for example, an image of a boy) may be displayed according to the winning small hit type.

In the present embodiment, the SP effect may be displayed in the fusion effect corresponding to all the small hit types (or big hits), but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the SP effect may be displayed only in the fusion effect corresponding to a specific small hit type (for example, a small hit in which the gaming state is switched to a state advantageous to the player). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has won a specific small hit type (that is, the game state is advantageous to the player).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 77 and 78, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2 (S2202) in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 as in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 54) in the first embodiment. It is a process. The same parts as those of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 54) in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 in the second embodiment, the processes of S2301 to S2303 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, the process shifts to the process of S2305 without executing the process of S2304. That is, regardless of whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the process proceeds to S2305. As a result, the fusion effect can be displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit.

The processing after S2305 (processing of S2305 to S2310) is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing is completed.

Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process 2 in the second embodiment is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, similarly to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 55) in the first embodiment. .. The same parts as those in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 55) in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 in the second embodiment, the processes of S2401 to S2403 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, the process shifts to the process of S2405 without executing the process of S2404. That is, regardless of whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the process proceeds to S2405. As a result, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fusion effect can be displayed.

The processing after S2405 (processing of S2405 to S2410) is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing is completed.

The processing of S2408 is different in that the losing fusion effect is selected by using the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 76 (c). Further, the processing of S2410 is different in that the winning fusion effect is selected by using the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 76 (b). As a result, in the fusion effect, the SP effect can be displayed, and then the effect of shaking the stop symbol of the small hit can be displayed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the fusion effect is displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, and the fusion effect is the SP effect (FIG. 75 (b)). It is configured so that a so-called cut-in effect called (see) is displayed. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the SP effect is displayed while the fusion effect is displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the above-mentioned SP effect is displayed even in the fusion effect executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. If the SP effect is displayed even though the lottery result is a small hit, the effect (shaking) suggesting a state of transition to the SP effect at the end of the SP effect (that is, at the end of the small hit game). Direction) is displayed. As a result, even if the SP effect is displayed but the jackpot is not a big hit, the player is given a privilege that it becomes easy to determine the state to be transferred after that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In the present embodiment, the SP effect may be displayed in the fusion effect corresponding to all the small hit types (or big hits), but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the SP effect may be displayed only in the fusion effect corresponding to a specific small hit type (for example, a small hit in which the gaming state is switched to a state advantageous to the player). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has won a specific small hit type (that is, the game state is advantageous to the player).

In the present embodiment, the number of times the symbol indicating the small hit is shaken is changed according to the winning small hit type until the symbol indicating the small hit is completely stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, it is natural that a specific image (for example, an image of a boy) may be displayed according to the winning small hit type.

In the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is displayed as the SP effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of displaying the cut-in effect, the back image may be changed, the display mode of the effect may be changed, or a specific image (for example, an image of a boy) may be displayed. It may be displayed, or it may be output as a notification sound.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 90. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of the first special symbol. Further, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of each special symbol, that is, the passage of the game time. Since the game state changes according to the situation, the game can be changed and the player's interest can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the count (counting) of the number of lottery of the first special symbol is reset when it becomes a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit E in the present embodiment). Further, the count (counting) of the number of lottery of the second special symbol is reset when it becomes a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit G in this embodiment). As a result, the timing at which the number of lottery of the first special symbol and the number of lottery of the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to changing the game state according to the passage of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to further change the game and improve the interest of the player.

In the third embodiment, the rear image is set (displayed) based on the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern of each special symbol. According to this rear image, the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped before the second special symbol (that is, a gaming state disadvantageous to the player), or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to be stopped first (that is, a state advantageous to the player). As a result, the player can be interested in the setting (display) of the rear image, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display control device 81 is partially changed. The configuration of ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the main control device 110 has been changed. The configuration of the small hit type selection table 202d provided has been partially changed, some processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has changed. The point is that some of the processing to be executed has changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 79, an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the rear image is set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern set for the second special symbol. .. According to this rear image, the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped before the second special symbol (that is, a gaming state disadvantageous to the player), or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to be stopped first (that is, a state advantageous to the player).

For example, a short fluctuation table with a short fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, and a long fluctuation table with a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the second special symbol. If so, a rear image of the "city" indicating that the expectation is 1 (lowest) is displayed (see FIG. 82 (b)). On the other hand, a long fluctuation table with a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, and a short fluctuation table with a short fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the second special symbol. In this case, a back image of the "school of fish" indicating that the expectation is 5 (highest) is displayed (see FIG. 82 (b)). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 (b).

FIG. 79A is a schematic view showing a fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a back image of a “mountain” is set as the back image. In this case, as in the first embodiment described above, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the display area Ds1 at the lower left of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the second is displayed in the display area Ds2 at the lower right of the screen. The variable display of the special symbol is displayed. Then, in the center of the screen, an effect (fusion effect) that imitates the competition between the rabbit and the turtle is displayed, and the back image of the "mountain" is displayed as the back image.

Similarly, FIG. 79 (b) is a schematic view showing a fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a rear image of “sandy beach” is set as the rear image. c) is a schematic view showing a fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a back image of the “seabed” is set as the back image.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 (b), but each rear image has a variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and a variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. It is set by the combination with. Specifically, when a fluctuation table having a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, the selected back image becomes a back image with a high degree of expectation. Further, when a fluctuation table having a short fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, the selected back image becomes a back image with a high degree of expectation. That is, when there is a high possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol, the rear image having a high degree of expectation is selected. ..

As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the rear image having a high degree of expectation will be displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In this embodiment, the rear image is set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern set for the second special symbol. However, it is not limited to this. Instead of changing the setting of the rear image, for example, it may be configured to display a character symbol, it may be configured to change the effect mode, or it may be configured to output a notification sound. Good.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (a). As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is a variable table in which the contents of the small hit type selection table 202d are partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 13). The setting information storage area 202j has been added. The details of the small hit type selection table 202d will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (c).

The variable table setting information storage area 202j is an area in which information defining the relationship between the number of lottery numbers and the variable pattern selection table to be set is stored. A variation pattern selection table for each special symbol is set based on the information in the variation table setting information storage area 202j.

The fluctuation table setting information storage area 202j is referred to in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing 3 (see FIG. 83) when determining whether it is the setting change timing of the fluctuation pattern table (see S352 in FIG. 83). It is referred to when setting the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol based on the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n (see S353 of FIG. 83). Similarly, in the second special symbol change start process 3 (see FIG. 86), it is also referred to when determining whether it is the setting change timing of the change pattern table (see S752 in FIG. 86), and the number of special figure 2 lottery It is referred to when setting the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol based on the value of the counter 203p (see S753 in FIG. 86).

Here, the details of the variable table setting information storage area 202j will be described with reference to FIG. 81. As shown in FIG. 81A, the variable table setting information storage area 202j has a special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 and a special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2. The special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 is a storage area in which a variable pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is defined based on the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n. The special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 is a storage area in which a variable pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is defined based on the value of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p.

First, with reference to FIG. 81 (b), the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described.

In the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1, as the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n, a first short variation table (a variation pattern having a short variation time is easily selected) and a first 1 Medium fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is easier to select than the 1st short fluctuation table) and 1st length fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is easier to select than the 1st medium fluctuation table) ) And are prepared. Details of the first short fluctuation table, the first medium fluctuation table, and the first long fluctuation table will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 (d).

In the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1, the first short variation table is set for the value "0 to 7" of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n, and the value "8 to 7" of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n is set. The first medium fluctuation table is set for "18", the first length fluctuation table is set for the value "19 to 48" of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n, and the value " The first medium fluctuation table is set for "49 to 98", and the first length fluctuation table is set for the value "99 to" of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n.

Next, the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (c).

In the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2, as the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p, a second long variation table (a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected) and a second. 2 Medium fluctuation table (variation pattern with shorter fluctuation time is easier to select than the 2nd long fluctuation table) and 2nd short fluctuation table (variation pattern with shorter fluctuation time is easier to select than the 2nd medium fluctuation table) ) And are prepared. Details of the second long fluctuation table, the second medium fluctuation table, and the second short fluctuation table will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 (e).

In the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2, a second length variation table is set for the value "0 to 7" of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p, and the value "8 to 7" of the special figure 2 lottery counter 203p is set. The second medium fluctuation table is set for "18", the second short fluctuation table is set for the value "19 to 48" of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p, and the value " The second medium fluctuation table is set for "49 to 98", and the second short fluctuation table is set for the value "99 to" of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (d). The first short fluctuation table, the first middle fluctuation table, and the first long fluctuation table are defined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.

The first short fluctuation table is a fluctuation pattern table in which the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) having a short fluctuation time can be easily selected. Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 149" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value "150 to 197" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is special. FIG. 1 Fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the value “198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the first short fluctuation table is set, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 150/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 48/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 1/199.

As the first medium fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds), which have a longer fluctuation time than the first short fluctuation table, are easily selected. It is a pattern table. Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 99" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value "100 to 195" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is special. FIG. 1 Fluctuation pattern C (fluctuation time 10 seconds) is set, and special FIG. 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the values “196 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first middle fluctuation table is set, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 100/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 96/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 3/199.

As the first long fluctuation pattern, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds), which have a longer fluctuation time than the first middle fluctuation table, are easily selected. It is a pattern table. Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 49" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value "50 to 189" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is special. FIG. 1 Fluctuation pattern C (fluctuation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the values “190 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first length fluctuation table is set, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 50/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 140/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 9/199.

Next, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (e). The second long fluctuation table, the first middle fluctuation table, and the first short fluctuation table are defined in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.

The second long fluctuation table is a fluctuation pattern table in which the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) having a long fluctuation time can be easily selected. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the special figure 2 is set for the value "1 to 49" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the values “50 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the second length fluctuation table is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 1/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 50/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 149/199.

In the second medium fluctuation table, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds), which have shorter fluctuation times than the second middle fluctuation table, are easily selected. It is a pattern table. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 3" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value "4 to 99" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is special. FIG. 2 Fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the values “100 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the second medium fluctuation table is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 4/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 96/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 99/199.

In the second short fluctuation table, the variation in which the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) having a shorter fluctuation time are more easily selected than in the second short fluctuation table. It is a pattern table. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value “0 to 9” of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value “10 to 149” of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is special. FIG. 2 Fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the values “150 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the second short fluctuation table is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 10/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 140/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 49/199.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. FIG. 80B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19), the RAM 203 of the present embodiment has a special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n and a special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p. Has been added.

The special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is a counter for counting (counting) the number of lottery lottery based on the first special symbol. The special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n is incremented by 1 when a lottery based on the first special symbol is executed in the first special symbol change start processing 3 (see FIG. 83) (see S351 in FIG. 83). 1 In the special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see FIG. 84), when the stop process that becomes a big hit is executed, it is initialized to 0 (see S651 in FIG. 84). Further, in the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (see FIG. 85), even when the stop process for a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed, it is initialized to 0 (see S662 in FIG. 85). ..

The special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of lottery lottery based on the second special symbol. The special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p is incremented by 1 when a lottery based on the second special symbol is executed in the second special symbol change start processing 3 (see FIG. 86) (see S751 in FIG. 86). 1 In the special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see FIG. 87), when the stop process that becomes a big hit is executed, it is initialized to 0 (see S951 in FIG. 87). Further, in the special figure 2 small hit stop process 3 (see FIG. 88), even when the stop process for a specific small hit (small hit G) is executed, it is initialized to 0 (see S962 in FIG. 88). ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 80 (c), the small hit type selection table 202d provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. The small hit type selection table 202d is based on the value of the small hit type selection counter, the small hit type, the presence / absence of passing V, and each lottery count counter after the small hit (Special Figure 1 lottery count counter 203n, Special Figure 2). This is a table used for selecting whether or not to reset the lottery counter 203p).

In the small hit type selection table 202d, a dedicated small hit type is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the first special symbol, two types of small hit E and small hit F are set, and in the second special symbol, two types of small hit G and small hit H are set. In the small hit E, "0 to 3" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4, and in the small hit F, "4 to 198" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4. There is. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit G, and the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit H. Is set as "99 to 198".

In the present embodiment, when the small hit E is executed, the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n is initialized to 0, and the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol is switched. .. Further, when the small hit G is executed, the value of the special figure 2 lottery counter 203p is initialized to 0, and the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol is switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80 (c), the small hit E of the first special symbol is set to "with reset", and the small hit F of the first special symbol is set to "without reset". ing. Further, the small hit G of the second special symbol is set to "with reset", and the small hit H of the second special symbol is set to "without reset".

As in the first embodiment, the small hits (small hits E and F) of the first special symbol are the small hit types that are difficult (or impossible) to pass through V, and the small hits of the second special symbol. (Small hit G, H) is a small hit type that makes it easy (or possible) to pass through V.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variable pattern selection table is configured to be switched according to the number of lottery of the first special symbol (that is, the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n), and the number of lottery of the second special symbol. (That is, the value of the special figure 2 lottery counter 203p) is configured so that the variation pattern selection table can be switched. As a result, the combination of the variable pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variable pattern selection table set for the second special symbol gives the player an advantageous state (for example, the first special symbol). It is possible to set a disadvantageous state (for example, when the fluctuation pattern selection table of the second special symbol is a table with a long fluctuation time) and a disadvantageous state (for example, when the fluctuation pattern selection table of the symbol is a table with a long fluctuation time).

In addition to this, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the number of lottery of the first special symbol and the number of lottery of the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be different. As a result, in addition to changing the game state according to the passage of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to further change the game and improve the interest of the player.

Next, the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (a). As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the ROM 222 of the present embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20 (a)) in that a rear image selection table 222c is added. To do.

Here, the rear image selection table 222c provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (c). The rear image selection table 222c defines a rear image to be set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. It is a table that has been created.

Specifically, first, the case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first short variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second length variation table, the back image of the "town" having the expectation degree of "1" (minimum) is selected. If it is the second medium fluctuation table, the back image of the "mountain" having the expectation degree of "2" is selected. If it is the second short variation table, the back image of the "sandy beach" having the expectation degree of "3" is selected.

Next, the case where the fluctuation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first middle fluctuation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second length variation table, the back image of the "mountain" having the expectation degree of "2" is selected. If it is the second medium fluctuation table, the back image of the "sandy beach" having the expectation degree of "3" is selected. In the case of the second short variation table, the back image of the "seabed" having an expectation degree of "4" is selected.

Next, the case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first short variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second length variation table, the back image of the "sandy beach" having an expectation degree of "3" is selected. If it is the second medium fluctuation table, the back image of the "seabed" having an expectation degree of "4" is selected. In the case of the second short variation table, the back image of the "fish school" having the expectation degree of "5" (highest) is selected.

As described above, when the fluctuation table having a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, the back image having a high expectation is easily selected. Further, when a variation table having a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, a back image having a high degree of expectation can be easily selected. That is, when there is a high possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol, the rear image having a high degree of expectation is easily selected. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the rear image having a high degree of expectation will be displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (c). As shown in FIG. 82 (c), the RAM 223 of the present embodiment is provided with a rear image information storage area 223 m added to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20 (c)). It's different.

The rear image information storage area 223m is an area for storing the currently set rear image type. The back image information storage area 223m is referred to in the back image change process (see FIG. 90) to determine the current back image (see S5004 in FIG. 90), and is based on the back image selected in the process. This is the area to be updated (see S5006 in FIG. 90).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 83 to 88. First, the first special symbol change start processing 3 (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83. The first special symbol variation start processing 3 (S203) in the third embodiment draws a lottery for the first special symbol and selects a variation pattern based on the lottery result. Then, the number of lottery of the first special symbol is counted (counted), and the setting of the variation pattern selection table of the first special symbol is changed according to the counted (counted) number of lottery.

In the first special symbol change start processing 3 (S203) in the third embodiment, the processes S301 to S304 are executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. When the process of S304 is completed, the processes of S351 to S353 are executed instead of the processes of S305 and subsequent steps of the first embodiment.

Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n (S351), and then it is determined whether it is the setting change timing of the fluctuation pattern table (S352). If it is determined in the process of S352 that it is not the timing for changing the setting of the variation pattern table (S352: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S352, when it is determined that it is the setting change timing of the fluctuation pattern table (S352: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n and the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 are set. Based on this, the small hit variation pattern selection is set (S353), and then this process ends.

Next, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84. The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S204) in the third embodiment stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the same manner as the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204, see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. This is a process for initializing the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n to 0 when the process for causing the lottery is performed and the fluctuation is stopped to be a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit E).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S204) in the third embodiment, the processes S601 to S607, S608 and S609 are executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment is that the process of S651 is executed after the process of S607 is completed, and the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 is executed instead of the special figure 1 small hit stop process of S610. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S204), after the process of S607 is executed, the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S651), and this process is terminated. As a result, the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop that becomes a big hit is executed in the first special symbol.

Further, in the process of S602, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not turned on for the special figure 1, that is, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 ( S610) is executed to end this process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, but in the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a specific small hit (small hit E), the special figure 1 The value of the lottery count counter 203n is initialized to 0. As a result, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop that becomes a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed in the first special symbol.

Next, the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85. The special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610) in the third embodiment is the same as the special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610, see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and is a small hit in the first special symbol. This is a process for initializing the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n to 0 when the fluctuation stop processing is executed and the fluctuation stop for a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed.

In the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610) in the third embodiment, the processes S621 to S625 are executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment is that the processes of S661 and S662 are executed after the process of S625 is completed. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the special figure 1 small hit stop processing 3 (S610) in the third embodiment, after the processing of S621 to S625 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is a specific small hit (small hit E) (S661). If it is determined in the process of S661 that it is not a specific small hit (that is, it is a small hit F) (S661: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S661 that it is a specific small hit (that is, it is a small hit E) (S661: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S662). After that, this process ends. As a result, the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop that results in a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed.

Next, the second special symbol change start processing 3 (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86. In the second special symbol change start process (FIGS. 86, S206), the special figure 2 lottery count counter is replaced with the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n for the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 83, S203) described above. The variation pattern selection table is set (S752, S753) based on the point where the value of 203p is added (S751) and the information of the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 instead of the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1. ) The only difference is that the detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87. The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S207) in the third embodiment is a special figure in place of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n for the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see FIG. 84) described above. 2 Since the difference is only in that the value of the lottery counter 203p is initialized to 0 (S951 or S920), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the special figure 2 small hit stop process 3 (S920) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88. Is the special figure 2 small hit stop process 3 (S920) in the third embodiment a specific small hit (small hit E) with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (see FIG. 85)? The point changed to the determination (S961) of whether or not it is a specific small hit (small hit G) instead of the determination of, and the value of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p is set to 0 instead of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n. Since the difference is only in the point of initialization (S962), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 89 and 90, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. First, the variation display setting process 3 (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 89. The variation display setting process 3 (S2113) in the third embodiment is different in that the rear image change process (S2651) is executed with respect to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment. Since the other points are the same, the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the variation display setting process 3 (S2113) in the third embodiment, the processes of S2601 to S2612 are executed in the same manner as in the variation display setting process (S2113) in the first embodiment. When the process of S2610 or S2612 is completed, the rear image change process is executed (S2651), and then this process is terminated.

Here, the rear image change process (S2651) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90. The rear image change process (S2651) in the third embodiment is based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. This is a process for changing the back image.

In the rear image change process (S2651) in the third embodiment, first, the set variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol is determined (S5001), and then the set second special symbol is used. The variation pattern selection table of (S5002) is determined. Then, the back image is selected from the back image selection table 222c based on the discrimination result between S5001 and S5002 (S5003).

Next, the current back image is determined from the back image information storage area 223 m (S5004). It is determined whether or not the back image selected by the process of S5003 is different from the current back image determined by the process of S5004 (S5005). If it is determined in the process of S5005 that the selected back image is the same as the current back image (S5005: No), it is not necessary to change the back image, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5005, when it is determined that the selected back image is different from the current back image (S5005: Yes), the back image information storage area 223 m is updated based on the selected back image (S5006). ), Set a background image change command based on the selected back image (S5007), and end this process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of the first special symbol. Further, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of each special symbol, that is, the passage of the game time. Since the game state changes according to the situation, the game can be changed and the player's interest can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the count (counting) of the number of lottery of the first special symbol is reset when it becomes a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit E in the present embodiment). Further, the count (counting) of the number of lottery of the second special symbol is reset when it becomes a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit G in this embodiment). As a result, the timing at which the number of lottery of the first special symbol and the number of lottery of the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to changing the game state according to the passage of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, the game can be further changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the rear image is set (displayed) based on the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern of each special symbol. According to this rear image, the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped before the second special symbol (that is, a gaming state disadvantageous to the player), or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to be stopped first (that is, a state advantageous to the player). As a result, the player can be interested in the setting (display) of the rear image, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the rear image is set (displayed) based on the fluctuation pattern selection table set for selecting the fluctuation pattern of each special symbol, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. Absent. For example, instead of setting (displaying) the rear image, the effect mode may be changed, a specific character symbol may be displayed, or a notification sound may be output. Naturally good.

In the third embodiment, the number of lottery of the first special symbol is reset (initialized to 0) based on the specific small hit type (small hit E) in the first special symbol, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the number of lottery of the second special symbol may be reset based on the specific small hit type (small hit E) in the first special symbol, or both the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be reset. Of course, the number of lottery draws may be reset. Further, the number of lottery of the first special symbol may not be reset until the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit. In this case, when the number of lottery of the first special symbol becomes a predetermined number or more, a variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player may be set (so-called ceiling is provided). As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's willingness to play even if the state of not being a big hit continues for a long time. The above-described configuration is not limited to the first special symbol, and may be similarly applied to the second special symbol.

The configuration of the third embodiment may be combined with the first embodiment described above. Specifically, in addition to changing the game state (setting of the variable pattern selection table of each special symbol) according to the number of lottery of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), the lottery result is a specific small. It is configured so that the game state (setting of the variation pattern selection table of each special symbol) is changed even when a hit (or a big hit) occurs. As a result, the variation in which the game state changes increases, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 100. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the second prize is obtained by providing the Kroon 900 (means for extending the flow-down period), which allows one game ball to be entered at the same time, above the second prize opening 64b. It is configured so that the game ball does not enter (or is difficult) at an interval shorter than a predetermined interval (20 seconds in this embodiment) into the mouth 64b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 64b excessively.

In the fourth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 64b during the change of the second special symbol, the winning information is reserved. On the other hand, the winning information of the first special symbol is configured so that it cannot be held. As a result, when the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved, if the game ball does not enter the first winning opening 64a (that is, if the launch of the game ball is temporarily interrupted), the second The fluctuation of the special symbol can be stopped (fixed), that is, a state advantageous for the player. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the winning information of the second special symbol is held, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, the winning information (start of fluctuation) of the second special symbol can be reserved, and the interval (20 seconds) at which the game ball enters the second winning opening 64b is based on the first special symbol. It is configured to be longer than the fluctuation time of fluctuation (maximum 19 seconds). Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, two or more game balls do not enter the second winning opening 64b (that is, the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved. There is no such thing as a player's advantage). Although the details will be described later, when the jackpot game is being executed, the winning information of the second special symbol is suspended, which is advantageous for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the croon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b of the game board, and the third symbol display control. The effect mode displayed on the device 81 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided on the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the effect executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed. The partial processing has been changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is provided with a left frame button 22a on the front left side of the front frame 14 and a right frame button on the front right side of the front frame 14 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. The difference is that 22b is provided, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The front frame 14 has a frame left button 22a provided on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) and a frame right button 22b provided on the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) are arranged at intervals (about 500 mm) that are difficult to operate with one hand, and when both buttons are operated, they are arranged. Needs to take his hand off the operating handle 51 and use both hands.

The frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) can be used, for example, to change the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or to change the effect content of the super reach. It is operated by the player when changing it. Further, although the details will be described later, an effect (see FIG. 94 (b)) of simultaneously operating both the frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) is also executed. By displaying (executing) the effect of simultaneously operating both the frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the player's firing operation (operation of the operation handle 51) ) Can be temporarily interrupted.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is different from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above in that the croon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the Kroon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b. The Kroon 900 is composed of a mortar-shaped (inverted dome-shaped) main body portion and a tubular tubular portion extending downward from the center of the mortar-shaped body, and the main body portion and the tubular portion are integrally molded with resin.

The main body portion is composed of a bottom surface portion (ball circumference portion) whose bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center and a wall portion formed on the outer edge portion of the bottom surface portion. The cylinder portion is provided with a through hole having a diameter that allows only one game ball to pass from the upper part to the lower part, and the game ball that has reached the center of the bottom surface portion of the main body portion can flow down. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, but the game ball that has entered (flowed down) into the Kroon 900 goes around the bottom surface (ball orbit) of the main body, and then passes through the through hole of the cylinder and goes down. Flow down to.

The Kroon 900 is inserted from the front side of the game board into a through hole (not shown) made in the game board by router processing, and is pivotally supported from the back side of the game board (not shown). The position in the front-rear direction of the Kroon 900 is such that the tubular portion of the Kroon 900 is in contact with the game board, and the back (back) side of the main body is the back (back) side of the area where the game ball flows down. It is positioned so that it protrudes toward the back side of the board. A lid member (not shown) is provided on the upper part of the main body portion protruding toward the back side of the game board so that the game ball flowing down to the main body part does not jump out to the back side of the game board. ing.

Further, the position of the Kroon 900 in the vertical direction is provided at the upper portion of the second variable winning device 650 and at a position lower than the position of the through gate 67. As a result, the game ball that did not enter the second variable winning device 650 and the game ball that did not pass through the through gate 67 can enter the Kroon 900.

Nails are arranged on the upper side of the Kroon 900 from the upper right part to the upper center, and the game ball can enter only from the upper left part of the Kroon 900. A variable member 901 is provided on the upper left portion of the Kroon 900.

The variable member 901 is configured to move to the front side when a load equivalent to one game ball is applied to the Kroon 900 (not shown). That is, when the game ball orbits the bottom surface of the main body of the Kroon 900, the variable member 901 is moved to the front side, and it is impossible (or difficult) for a new game ball to enter the Kroon 900. ). As a result, it is possible to prevent (prevent) two or more game balls from flowing down to the bottom surface of the main body of the Kroon 900 and circling around.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is an enlarged perspective view of the Kroon 900 provided on the game board of the pachinko machine 10.

The game ball that has flowed down to the Kroon 900 goes around the bottom surface portion (ball circumference portion) of the main body portion for a predetermined period (19 seconds in this embodiment), and then passes through the through hole of the cylinder portion provided in the center of the bottom surface portion. And flow down. When the electric accessory 64b1 is open, the game ball that has flowed downward from the tubular portion of the Kroon 900 enters the second winning opening 64b provided below. Since the time required for the game ball that has flowed downward from the Kroon 900 to enter the second winning opening 64b is 1 second, the game ball that has flowed down to the Kroon 900 enters the second winning opening 64b. The time required for this is 20 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b), an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment will be described. 94 (a) and 94 (b) are examples of the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 94A is a schematic diagram showing an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the first round). By displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94A, it is possible to urge the player to insert the game ball into the second winning opening 64b during the jackpot game.

FIG. 94 (b) shows the third symbol display device 81 when the second special symbol is held at the end of the jackpot game due to the game ball entering the second winning opening 64b during the execution of the jackpot game. It is a figure which showed the mode of the ending effect which is displayed in. By displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94 (b), it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot game will end with the second special symbol on hold. Further, by displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94 (b), the player is urged to simultaneously press the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10. The firing operation (operation of the operation handle 51) can be temporarily interrupted.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is advantageous that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped before the fluctuation of the first special symbol, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the winning of the first special symbol is not held, so in the state where the second special symbol is held, the change of the second special symbol is surely stopped first unless the change of the first special symbol is started. It is a state of doing (that is, a state advantageous for the player). Therefore, in this case, the effect shown in FIG. 94 (b) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to temporarily suspend the firing operation (operation of the operation handle 51), the fluctuation of the first special symbol is not started, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped first. Can be done.

Not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, the right through gate is arranged above the first variable winning device 65, and the right-handed game ball passes through the right through gate, so that the right-handed jackpot game can also be through. The normal electric accessory 64b1 may be easily opened by making it easy to pass through the gate, and the game ball may be easily entered into the second winning opening 64b. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable member 901 is configured to roll only one ball at a time on the croon means 900, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left-handed game ball is a crew as a configuration in which the variable member 901 is not arranged. A nail is arranged so as not to enter the means 900 so that only the right-handed game ball can enter the Kroon means 900. Then, when the ball is hit to the right other than during the big hit game or the small hit game, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (stopped) based on the detection of the game ball by passing through the right through gate, or all the hits are correct. The determination result may be determined as out of alignment, an error may be notified to the third symbol display device 81, an alarm sound may be output, or an error signal may be output from the external output terminal. Further, in the normal game state, the fluctuation time may be lengthened or the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be lowered when passing through the right through gate. Further, always, as the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is the fluctuation time and the hit probability of the normal symbol described in the present embodiment, and is the normal game state such as during the jackpot game (the jackpot game state, but the normal symbol state is In the normal game state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be shortened, or the winning probability may be increased so that the second winning opening 64b can be easily won.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various counters according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r is provided, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r is composed of one execution area and one holding area (holding first area). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64.

Specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 64b (starting winning), and the acquired data is used as one holding area (holding first area). ) Is stored in the empty area. When data is stored in the reserved first area, nothing is newly stored.

When the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Then, based on the winning of the new second winning opening 64b (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 can be acquired and stored in the reserved first area.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is different in that the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r is added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19). The details of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r are as described in FIG. 95, and therefore the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 97 to 99. First, the timer interrupt process 4 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97. The timer interrupt process 4 in the fourth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment in that a part of the special symbol variation process (S104) is changed and the start. The difference is that the winning process (S151) is executed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the timer interrupt process 4 of the fourth embodiment, the start winning process is executed after the processes of S101 to S104 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (S151). By executing this start winning process (S151), the second special symbol can be held. When the process of S151 is completed, the process of S106 to S109 is executed and then this process is terminated, as in the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment.

Next, the start winning process (S151) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 98. The start winning process (S151) in the fourth embodiment is one process in the timer interrupt process 4 (see FIG. 97) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment.

In the start winning process (S151) in the fourth embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 64b (S6001). In the process of S6001, if the ball has not won the second winning opening 64b (S6001: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6001, if the ball has won the second winning opening 64b (S6001: Yes), then the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is acquired (S6002), and the special symbol 2 is reserved. It is determined whether the value (N2) of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is smaller than 1 (S6003). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is larger than 1 (S6003: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s is smaller than 1 (S6003: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s (N2). S6004), then the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set (S6005). Then, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r (S6006), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 99. The second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206) in the fourth embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, similarly to the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. This is one process in the special symbol variation process (S104).

In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206) in the fourth embodiment, the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment is replaced with the processes S701 to S702 in S751. The difference is that the processing of ~ S755 is executed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S206), first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s is acquired (S751), and then the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s (N2). Is greater than 0 (S752). If it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S752: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S752, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s is larger than 0 (S752: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s is used. 1 is subtracted (S753), the reserved ball number command is set (S754), and the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r is shifted (S755). After that, the processes of S703 to S708 are executed, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 100, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. First, the command determination process 4 (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 100. The command determination process 4 (S2112) in the fourth embodiment is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, similarly to the command determination process (S2112, see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment. The same parts as the command determination process (S2112, see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the command determination process 4 (S2112) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S2201 to S2207 are executed in the same manner as in the command determination process in the first embodiment, and it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received in the process of S2207. If so (S2207: Yes), the process of S2208 is executed. After executing the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 (S2251). Specifically, when the hold ball number command is received during the execution of the change of the second special symbol, it is determined that the hold ball number of the second special symbol becomes 1. On the other hand, if the hold ball number command is received while the change of the second special symbol is stopped, the change of the second special symbol is immediately started based on the pending winning information. That is, since it is a case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not become 1, it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0.

If it is determined in the process of S2251 that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 (S2251: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2251 when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 (S2251: Yes), the display V chance command is set (S2252), and this process is terminated.

The display V chance command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and is a command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. ), It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display V chance command, the display control device 114 notifies that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 (that is, it is in an advantageous state for the player) (that is, it is in an advantageous state for the player). (Not shown) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, if the hold ball number command is not received (S2207: No), the processes of S2209 to S2213 are not executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2253. In the process of S2253, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2253), and if the ending command has been received (S2253: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is on hold 1 (S2254). In the process of S2254, if the special figure 2 is hold 1 (S2254: Yes), the display V chance ending command is set (S2255), and this process ends.

The display V chance ending command set by the process of S2255 is stored in the ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. In the process (S2102), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display V chance ending command, the display control device 114 displays the effect shown in FIG. 94 (b) on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2254, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not the hold 1 (S2254: No), the normal ending command for display is set (S2256), and this process is terminated.

If the ending command is not received in the process of S2253 (S2253: No), the processes of S2214 to S2217 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a Kroon 900 (means for extending the flow-down period) is provided above the second winning opening 64b so that the number of game balls that can be simultaneously entered is one. As a result, the game balls are configured so as not to enter (or are difficult) at intervals shorter than the predetermined intervals in the second winning opening 64b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 64b excessively.

In the fourth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 64b during the change of the second special symbol, the winning information is reserved. On the other hand, the winning information of the first special symbol is configured so that it cannot be held. As a result, when the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved, if the game ball does not enter the first winning opening 64a (that is, if the launch of the game ball is temporarily interrupted), the second The fluctuation of the special symbol can be stopped (fixed), that is, a state advantageous for the player. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the winning information of the second special symbol is held, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the Kroon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b so that the game balls do not enter the second winning opening 64b at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval (20 seconds). , Not limited to this. For example, a known sorting device may be used to sort the game balls at predetermined intervals (or at intervals longer than the predetermined intervals) so as to win a prize in the second winning opening 64b.

In the present embodiment, the game ball orbits the bottom surface (circling portion) of the Kroon 900 so that the time required for the game ball to pass through the Kroon 900 becomes longer, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. Absent. Instead of the Kroon 900, the number of game balls that can be entered at the same time is one, and a means for extending the flow period of the game balls (flow period extension means) may be provided. Specifically, means such as forming the flow passage in a meandering shape to lengthen the flow distance and using a member (speed reduction member) for reducing the speed of the game ball in the flow passage can be considered. As the speed reducing member, for example, a member having a high coefficient of friction (urethane rubber or the like) such that the frictional force generated when the ball rolls becomes high can be considered. It is also conceivable to roughen the ball rolling surface of the flow passage or provide protrusions to increase the frictional force between the ball and the ball rolling surface of the flow passage and reduce the flow speed of the ball.

In the present embodiment, in order to prevent two or more game balls from entering (flowing down) into the Kroon 900 at the same time, a movable member that is movable by the load on the Kroon 900 is used, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, a known non-electric accessory or electric accessory may be provided at the entrance of the Kroon 900. Specifically, when a game ball enters the Kroon 900, the non-electric accessory at the entrance is mechanically moved if it is a non-electric accessory, and if it is an electric accessory, it is electrically operated based on the ball entry detection. The electric accessory at the entrance is movably controlled, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the Kroon 900. Then, when the game ball flows down below the Kroon 900, the non-electric accessory at the entrance is mechanically moved again if it is a non-electric accessory, and electrically based on the flow detection if it is an electric accessory. The electric accessory at the entrance is movably controlled again, and the game ball can enter (or easily) enter the Kroon 900.

In the present embodiment, the Kroon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b, but it may not be provided. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the game board with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The big hit game and the small hit game of Special Figure 1 are games in which the game ball is inserted into the second variable winning device 650 (so-called left-handed game), and only the small hit game of Special Figure 2 is on the right side of the game board. This is a game (so-called right-handed game) in which a game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 65 provided. As a result, the small hit game and the normal game of Special Figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operations for executing the game can be made the same), and occur frequently. It is possible to reduce the operational burden on the player for executing the small hit game shown in the special figure 1.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above is provided with a jackpot type to which a time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is given after the jackpot game is completed. I made it. As a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that the time-saving game state will be given after the jackpot game is completed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 The configuration has been partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the game board of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 moves from the position on the right side to the position on the left side of the game board with respect to the game board of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. The point that has been changed, the point that the right first winning opening 640a is provided above the first variable winning device 65, and the point that the right through gate 670 is provided above the right first winning opening 640a. The difference is, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed (whether or not the ball can be entered is variable) in the big hit game, and the first variable winning is made in the small hit game shown in Special Figure 2. The device 65 is opened and closed (whether or not the ball can enter is variable). On the other hand, in the small hit game of FIG. 1, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed (whether or not the ball can be entered is variable) instead of the first variable winning device 65.

Therefore, the big hit game and the small hit game of Special Figure 1 are games in which a game ball is fired on the left side of the game board (so-called left-handed). As a result, the small hit game and the normal game of Special Figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operations for executing the game can be made the same), and occur frequently. It is possible to reduce the operational burden on the player for executing the small hit game shown in the special figure 1.

In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the game board, and the first variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the game board, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 may be arranged in the center of the game board. As a result, in all the games (normal game, big hit game, small hit game of special figure 1, small hit game of special figure 2), the operation for executing the game can be the same, so that the player can use the same operation. The operation load can be reduced. Further, since each winning device is arranged in the center of the game board, the player can select a right-handed or left-handed player, which can improve the player's interest.

With this configuration, it is not necessary to hit right at the time of a small hit of the first special symbol, and by continuing the left-handed game, the small hit game of the first special symbol is executed, and then the normal game to be executed. Can be continued while left-handed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the small hit of the first special symbol is frequently executed, but the trouble of frequently switching to the right-handed game can be omitted, and the game can be easily and continuously performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot B is executed, the time saving game is given 8 times (the number of times the special symbol is changed). Even in that case, the right side of the game area (first variable) so that the game ball hit right by the right through gate 670 and the right first winning opening 640a (the winning opening that triggers the start of the first special symbol) can enter. Since it is located above the winning device 65), it is possible to execute a time-saving game in a right-handed state. Further, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be played by either left-handed or right-handed, so that the player can easily understand the game method and easily play the game.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot game is configured so that the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first variable winning device 65 may be in the open state. In this case, by controlling the switching member 65h without operating it, it is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpot game is continuously executed. Further, even when the time saving game is given, the right-handed game can be continuously played, and the game operation can be facilitated.

<Electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. The ROM 202 of the present embodiment is different in that the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (a). In the present embodiment, jackpot A (15R jackpot, no electric support) and jackpot B (15R jackpot, 8 times of electric support) are provided as the types of jackpot.

Here, "big hit A (15R big hit, no electric support)" means a normal state (states A to C) after a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds (1 round is up to 30 seconds or 10 balls). It is a big hit. In addition, "big hit B (15R big hit, electric support 8 times)" means a time saving state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes shorter) after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. It is a big hit. Details will be described later, but in the time-saving state, it is easier to select a second special symbol whose fluctuation time is shorter than that of the first special symbol (that is, the first) as compared with the normal state (states A to C). 2 The fluctuation of the special symbol is likely to stop before the fluctuation of the first special symbol), which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot type selection table 202d, the value "0 to 99" of the first hit type counter CS2 is set for the jackpot A, and the value "100 to 198" of the first type counter CS2 is set for the jackpot B. Is set. That is, the probability that the jackpot A is selected is set to 100/199, and the probability that the jackpot B is selected is set to 99/199.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the details of the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 (time saving state) 202f will be described. The special figure 1 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 (time saving state) 202f is a small hit variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol in the time saving state. In the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table 2 (time saving state) 202f, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is defined.

Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is defined for the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, the probability that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the small hit of the first special symbol in the time saving state is set to 199/199 (that is, 100%).

Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (c), the details of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 4 (time saving state) 202f will be described. The special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 4 (time saving state) 202f is a small hit variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol in the time saving state. In the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table 2 (time saving state) 202f, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) are defined.

Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is defined for the value "0 to 65" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value "66 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined. On the other hand, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) is defined. That is, the probability that the second fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the small hit of the second special symbol in the time saving state is set to 66/199, and the second fluctuation pattern G ( The probability that (variation time 6 seconds) is selected is set to 133/199.

Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability that the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is selected in the second special symbol is 66/199. As a result, the time saving state is in a state in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is more likely to stop earlier than the first special symbol (that is, a state advantageous for the player) as compared with the normal state (states A to C).

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. As shown in FIG. 103, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a time saving counter 203t is added, and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving counter 203t is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is larger than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203t is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. The time saving medium counter 203t is set to 8 at the end of the jackpot B (16R time saving jackpot) (see S1453 in FIG. 106). In this time-saving state, a small hit variation pattern selection table for the time-saving state is set (S1452), and the variation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is shortened (see FIGS. 103 (b) and 103 (c)). ). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 104) or the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 105), one is subtracted each time the fluctuation of each special symbol is stopped (S673 in FIG. 104). , See S973 in FIG. 105).

As described above, the small hit fluctuation pattern set in the time saving state is such that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol as compared with the normal state (states A to C). It is configured so that it can be easily selected (that is, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to stop before the fluctuation of the first special symbol). As a result, after the end of the jackpot B, the second special symbol is likely to stop before the first special symbol, which is advantageous for the player (time saving state). Therefore, since the game can be performed with the goal of becoming a jackpot B, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 104 to 107. First, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 104. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S204) in the fifth embodiment, the processes S671 to S676 are added to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. The other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends (S601: Yes) as in the case of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the first embodiment, and the lottery result. If is a big hit (S602: Yes), the processes of S603 to S607 are executed, the time saving counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S671), and the process shifts to the processing of S675 in order to end the time saving state.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends (S601: Yes) and the lottery result is a small hit (S602: No), the process of S610 is executed and the process proceeds to S672. If the first special symbol is changing (S601: No) and the special figure 1 change stop flag 203g is on (S608: Yes), the process of S609 is executed and the process proceeds to S672.

In the process of S672, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203t is larger than 0 (S672), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S672: No), this processing is terminated as it is. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S672, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is larger than 0 (S672: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S673), and the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0. Whether or not it is determined (S674).

If it is determined in the process of S674 that the time saving counter 203t is not 0 (S674: No), the time saving state is continued, so the present processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is 0 in the processing of S674 (S674: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S675 in order to end the time saving state.

When the processing of S671 or S674 is completed, the current state is acquired from the state setting area (S675), the variation pattern selection table is set based on the acquired state in the processing of S675 (S676), and this processing is performed. finish. By the process of S676, the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the time saving state can be changed, and the time saving state can be ended.

Next, the details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 105. The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S207) differs from the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment in that the processes S971 to S976 are added, and the like. The parts of are the same. Since the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S207) executes the same processing as the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 104) described above for the second special symbol, the details thereof are detailed. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the details of the jackpot control process 5 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The jackpot control process 5 (S1304) is different from the jackpot control process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1451 to S1453 are additionally executed at the ending timing. Other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot control process 5 (S1304), the processes S1401 to S1409 are executed in the same manner as the jackpot process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. In the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is the ending timing (S1409: Yes), the ending command is set (S1410), and the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411). After that, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is the jackpot B (S1451).

If it is determined in the process of S1451 that the lottery result is the jackpot A (S1451: No), it is not necessary to give a time saving state after the jackpot ends, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1451 that the lottery result is the jackpot B (S1451: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1452 in order to give a time saving state after the jackpot ends.

In the process of S1452, the small hit variation pattern selection table for the time saving state (see FIGS. 102 (b) and (c)) is set as the small hit variation pattern selection table of each special symbol (S1452), and the value of the time saving counter 203t. Is set to 8 to end this process. As a result, it is possible to impart a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B.

Next, the details of the small hit control process 5 (S1305) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. The small hit control process 5 (S1305) is different from the small hit control process (FIG. 47) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1651 to S1654 are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 5 (S1305), the processes S1601 to S1605 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the process of S1605, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1605: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit of the first special symbol (S1651).

In the process of S1651, when it is determined that the first special symbol is a small hit (S1651: Yes), the opening of the second variable winning device 650 is set in order to open the second variable winning device 650 (S1651: Yes). S1652), this process is terminated. In the process of S1651, when it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit (S1651: No), the small hit operation process is executed in order to open the first variable winning device 65 (S1616). This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1605 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1605: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1607. In the process of S1607, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S1607), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit of the first special symbol (S1653).

In the process of S1653, when it is determined that the first special symbol is a small hit (S1653: Yes), the closing of the second variable winning device 650 is set in order to close the second variable winning device 650 (S1653: Yes). S1654), this process is terminated. In the process of S1653, when it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit (S1653: No), the closing of the first variable winning device 65 is set in order to close the first variable winning device 65 (S1653: No). S1608), this process is terminated.

By this small hit control process 5 (S1305), at the time of a small hit of the first special symbol, the second variable winning device 650 provided on the left side of the game board can be opened and closed (variable) to perform a so-called left-handed game. it can. Further, at the time of a small hit of the second special symbol, the first variable winning device 65 provided on the right side of the game board can be opened and closed (variable) to allow a so-called right-handed game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the game board with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The big hit game and the small hit game of Special Figure 1 are games in which the game ball is inserted into the second variable winning device 650 (so-called left-handed game), and only the small hit game of Special Figure 2 is on the right side of the game board. This is a game (so-called right-handed game) in which a game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 65 provided. As a result, the small hit game and the normal game of Special Figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operations for executing the game can be made the same), and occur frequently. It is possible to reduce the operational burden on the player for executing the small hit game shown in the special figure 1.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above is provided with a jackpot type to which a time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is given after the jackpot game is completed. I made it. As a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that the time-saving game state will be given after the jackpot game is completed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115. The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts to change to be a big hit. The lottery of the special symbol was forcibly removed and the fluctuation was executed (that is, the fluctuation that became a big hit was not forcibly stopped). As a result, for example, when the fluctuation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of the small hit based on the first special symbol is stopped first, so that the fluctuation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is changed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the change to be off. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) not to be a big hit even though the effect suggesting that it is a big hit is executed (displayed), and to prevent (suppress) to reduce the player's willingness to participate. ..

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of jackpots (big hits A1, A2, A3) given to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment when passing through the V winning switch 65e3. I have to. Then, depending on the jackpot type, the state of being transferred after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be different. As a result, the game state can be changed (changed) not only when the lottery result is a small hit but also when the lottery result is a big hit, so that the game can be changed. Can improve the interest of the person.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is configured to execute (display) the SP reach effect for the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment when the lottery result is a big hit. As a result, the player can be made to feel the arrival of a big hit, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has an SP reach effect (for special figure 1 small hit) even when the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is a small hit that shifts to the state B or the state C. , Or, special figure 2 for small hits) was configured to be executed (displayed). As a result, the frequency with which the SP reach effect is displayed increases, so that the player's interest can be improved, and even if the SP reach effect is displayed but the jackpot is not obtained, it is advantageous for the player. Since the state shifts to the state B or the state C, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the main control A part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the device 110 has been changed, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 108, an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (c) are examples of an effect mode of the SP reach effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the SP reach effect (special figure 2 big hit) is executed (displayed) when the second special symbol is a big hit, and when the first special symbol is a small hit and a predetermined condition is satisfied. SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) is executed (displayed), and SP reach effect (special figure 2 small hit) is executed (displayed) when it becomes a small hit of the second special symbol and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. ).

In various SP reach effects, variable display is executed in a normal effect mode (see FIG. 108 (a)). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display (2 seconds later in the present embodiment), the characters "Super Reach !!" are displayed at the upper part of the screen (see FIG. 108 (b)). After that, if the SP reach effect indicates a special figure 2 jackpot, a stop symbol (for example, "777") indicating the jackpot is displayed (not shown). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot has been won. Further, since the player plays the game with the expectation that the SP reach effect is displayed, the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, if the SP reach effect indicates a special figure 1 small hit or a special figure 2 small hit, after the characters "Super Reach !!" are displayed at the upper part of the screen, a stop symbol indicating the small hit (for example, "341" and the like) are displayed (see FIG. 108 (c)). The stop symbol indicating this small hit is shaken up and down a predetermined number of times (2 to 8 times in this embodiment), and then a complete stop display (stationary state) is displayed. The number of times the stop symbol sways is predetermined according to the winning small hit type.

The relationship between the small hit type and the number of times the stop symbol sways is the same as in the second embodiment. Specifically, in the case of small hit A, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 19", the number of shakings is "2 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "20 to 49", the number of shakings is "2 times". It becomes "4 times", and if the value of the effect counter 223g is "50 to 198", the number of shakings becomes "0 times".

In the case of small hit B, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 49", the number of shaking is "4 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "50 to 99", the number of shaking is "6 times". If the value of the effect counter 223g is "100 to 198", the number of shakings is "0".

In the case of small hit C, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 74", the number of shaking is "6 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "75 to 149", the number of shaking is "8 times". If the value of the effect counter 223g is "150 to 198", the number of shakings is "0".

In the case of small hit D, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 99", the number of shakings is "8 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "100 to 198", the number of shakings is "0 times". It becomes.

As a result, the player can predict the winning small hit type from the number of times the stop symbol sways (that is, it is possible to predict the set game state), so that the number of times the stop symbol sways It can be noticed and the interest of the player can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the SP reach effect is displayed, the stop display may be displayed with a stop symbol indicating a small hit. In this case, the effect that the stop symbol sways is executed, and the privilege that the set game state can be predicted is given. This prevents the player from losing the motivation to participate in the game even if the SP reach effect is displayed but then a small hit (not a big hit) occurs. Can be suppressed).

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (c). As shown in FIG. 109 (a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is partially modified from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in the variation pattern selection table 202f. , V Passing jackpot type selection table 202k is added, and other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the hit variation pattern selection table 202f, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f, will be described with reference to FIG. 109 (b). The hit variation pattern selection table 202f is a table in which a variation pattern selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined when a big hit occurs in each special symbol.

In the first special symbol, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern E (variation time 10 seconds) is set for the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern E is selected with a probability of 199/199 (1/1).

In the second special symbol, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern F (variation time 9 seconds) is set for the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern F is selected with a probability of 199/199 (1/1).

Next, with reference to FIG. 109 (c), the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202k when passing through V will be described. The jackpot type selection table 202k at the time of passing V is a table that defines the jackpot type selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. The jackpot type selection table 202k at the time of passing V is when the V winning flag 203e is on (that is, when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the small hit game) in the small hit ending process 6 (see FIG. 113). , Referenced to select jackpot type.

In the jackpot type selection table 202k when passing through V, the jackpot A1 (15R jackpot) is set for the value "0 to 89" of the first hit type counter C2, and the value "90 to 179" of the first hit type counter C2 is set. On the other hand, the jackpot A2 (15R jackpot) is set, and the jackpot A3 (15R jackpot) is set for the value "180 to 198" of the first hit type counter C2. That is, as for the jackpot type selected based on the passage of the game ball through the V winning switch 65e3, the probability of selecting the jackpot A1 is set to 90/199, and the probability of selecting the jackpot A2 is set to 90/199. It is set, and the probability that the jackpot A3 is selected is set to 19/199.

Here, the "big hit A1 (15R jackpot)" is a jackpot that shifts to the state A after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds (1 round is up to 30 seconds or 10 balls). "Big hit A2 (15R big hit)" is a big hit that shifts to state B after a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. The "big hit A3 (15R jackpot)" is a jackpot that shifts to the state C after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. In this way, the state of transition after that can be changed according to the jackpot type given based on passing through the V winning switch 65e3.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 110 to 113. First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 110. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) in the sixth embodiment, the processes S451 to S453 are added to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) in the sixth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the variation based on the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed (S451). In the process of S451, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the second special symbol is not being executed (S451: No), the processes of S401 to S409 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S451, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed (S451: Yes), the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed and the lottery result is forcibly removed. In order to set to, the process proceeds to S452.

In the process of S452, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to be out (S452), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S453), and this process is terminated. .. As a result, if the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the fluctuation that becomes the big hit is started, the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed and the lottery result is forcibly set to be out. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol from becoming big hits at the same time, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) in the sixth embodiment, the processes S851 to S853 are added to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) in the sixth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed (S851). In the process of S851, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is not being executed (S851: No), the processes of S801 to S809 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S851, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed (S851: Yes), the lottery of the second special symbol is not performed and the lottery result is forcibly removed. In order to set to, the process proceeds to S852.

In the process of S852, the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to be out (S852), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S853), and this process is terminated. .. As a result, if the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the fluctuation that becomes the big hit is started, the lottery of the second special symbol is not performed and the lottery result is forcibly set to be out. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol from becoming big hits at the same time, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, the jackpot control process 6 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 112. The jackpot control process 6 (S1304) in the sixth embodiment is different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1471 to S1472 are added, and the other parts are different. It is the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot control process 6 (S1304) in the sixth embodiment, the processes S1401 to S1409 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending in the jackpot game (S1409: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1410. In the process of S1410, the ending command is set (S1410), the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), and the process proceeds to the process of S1471.

In the process of S1471, the state corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the state setting area 223h (S1471). Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A1, state A is set, when jackpot A2 is set, state B is set, and when jackpot A3 is set, state C is set (FIG. 109). (C)). Next, the state counter 203k is set (S1472) based on the state set in the process of S1471, the state command corresponding to the set state is set (S1473), and the present process is terminated.

The state command set by the process of S1703 is stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving this state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the subordinate state area 223h (see S2210 in FIG. 53).

Next, the small hit ending process 6 (S1610) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 113. The small hit ending process 6 (S1610) in the sixth embodiment is different from the small hit ending process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1851 to S1853 are added. The parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit ending process 6 (S1610) in the sixth embodiment, the processes S1801 to S1802 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is on (S1802: Yes), then the value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired (S1851).

Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1851, the jackpot type is acquired from the jackpot type selection table 202k when passing through V (S1852). A jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type acquired in the process of S1852 is set (S1853), and the process proceeds to the process of S1804. When the processes from S1804 to S1807 are executed, this process ends. Since the processes of S1804 to S1807 are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 114 and 115. First, with reference to FIG. 114, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (S2204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment performs the processes of S2451 and S2452 in place of the process of S2404 with respect to the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 55) in the first embodiment. It differs in that it has been modified to do so, and is otherwise the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment, the processes S2401 to S2403 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. After that, the SP reach selection process is executed (S2451), and the process proceeds to the process of S2452. Details of the SP reach selection process (S2451) will be described later with reference to FIG. 115.

When SP reach is selected in the process of S2452 (S2452: No), the SP reach effect is executed (displayed) and the fusion effect is not executed (displayed). Therefore, the processes of S2405 to S2414 are skipped. , End this process. On the other hand, if SP reach is not selected in the process of S2451 (S2452: Yes), the processes of S2405 to S2414 are executed and the present process is terminated in order to execute (display) the fusion effect. Since the processes of S2405 to S2414 are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the SP reach selection process (S2451) executed in the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 115. This SP reach selection process (S2451) is a process for selecting an SP reach effect.

In the SP reach selection process (S2451), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5101). In the process of S5101, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S5101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5102 in order to execute (display) the SP reach effect based on the big hit.

In the process of S5102, the SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot) is selected (S5102), and this process is terminated. Here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a jackpot is the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern F (variation time 9 seconds). Therefore, the production time of the SP reach production (special figure 2 big hit) was also set to 9 seconds. As a result, the production time of the SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot) can be matched with the fluctuation time that is the jackpot of the second special symbol, and it is possible to provide the player with a natural effect. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5101: Yes), then whether or not the lottery result is a small hit B or a small hit C is determined. Determine (S5103).

If the lottery result is determined to be the small hit A in the processing of S5103 (S5103: No), the state is changed to the state A after the small hit game is completed, so the SP reach effect is executed (displayed). In order not to do so, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is determined to be a small hit B or a small hit C in the processing of S5103 (S5103: Yes), the state is changed to the state B or the state C after the end of the small hit game. , In order to execute (display) the SP reach effect, the process proceeds to S5104.

In the process of S5104, it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (S5104). In the processing of S5104, when it is determined that the residual variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104: Yes), the variation of the first special symbol is based on the variation of the second special symbol. Is also the case when it is stopped first. In this case, it is then determined whether or not the residual variation time of the first special symbol is between 8.7 seconds and 9.7 seconds (S5105).

In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the residual variation time of the first special symbol is between 8.7 seconds and 9.7 seconds (S5105: Yes), the residual variation time of the first special symbol is SP. Since the reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) can be executed (displayed), the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) is selected (S5106), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5105, when it is determined that the residual variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than 8.7 seconds or longer than 9.7 seconds (S5105: No), the first special symbol Since the remaining fluctuation time is not within the range in which the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) can be executed (displayed), this process is terminated as it is. If the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) is not selected, then the fusion effect is selected in the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (see FIG. 114).

In the processing of S5104, when it is determined that the residual variation time of the first special symbol is longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104: No), the variation of the second special symbol is based on the variation of the first special symbol. Is also the case when it is stopped first. In this case, it is then determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 9 seconds (S5107).

In the process of S5107, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 9 seconds (S5107: Yes), the SP reach effect (special figure 2 small hit) is selected, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5107, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is not 9 seconds (S5107: No), this process is terminated as it is. As a result, the SP reach effect (special figure 2 small hit) can be executed (displayed) according to the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to match the production time of the SP reach effect (special figure 2 small hit) with the fluctuation time which is the small hit of the second special symbol, and to provide the player with a natural effect. Can be done.

In this way, when the second special symbol becomes a big hit, by executing (displaying) the SP reach effect (special figure 2 big hit), the player can be made to predict the arrival of the big hit, and the player. Can improve the interest of.

Further, in the case of a small hit that shifts to the state B or the state C, the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) or the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit), which is the same effect mode as the SP reach effect (special figure 2 big hit). (Fig. 2 Small hit) is executed (displayed). As a result, the frequency with which the SP reach effect is displayed increases, so that the player's interest can be improved, and even if the SP reach effect is displayed but the jackpot is not obtained, it is advantageous for the player. Since the state shifts to the state B or the state C, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when a big hit change is started in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the lottery of the other special symbol is forcibly performed. It was configured to be off and perform fluctuations. As a result, for example, when the fluctuation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of the small hit based on the first special symbol is stopped first, so that the fluctuation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is changed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the change to be off. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from not being a big hit even though the effect suggesting that it is a big hit is executed (displayed), and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's willingness to participate. ..

In the sixth embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots (big hits A1, A2, A3) given when passing through the V winning switch 65e3 are provided. Then, depending on the jackpot type, the state of being transferred after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be different. As a result, the game state can be changed (changed) not only when the lottery result is a small hit but also when the lottery result is a big hit, so that the game can be changed. Can improve the interest of the person.

The sixth embodiment may be combined with the fourth embodiment described above. Specifically, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation of the jackpot is not forcibly stopped. As a result, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball enters the first winning opening 64a even though the second special symbol is reserved, and the change of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit is forcibly changed. It is no longer necessary to display an effect (see FIG. 94 (b)) for preventing the vehicle from being stopped. As a result, it is not necessary to display an effect (see FIG. 94 (b)) that urges the player to press the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b, and the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment has each special symbol when the lottery based on the first special symbol is continuously executed for the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment described above. It is configured to select the back image regardless of the variation pattern selection table set for. When the lottery based on the first special symbol is continuously executed, the first is until the variable pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, until the back image with high expectation is displayed). There is a high possibility that an illegal game is being performed in which a game ball is gradually inserted into the winning opening 64a. Therefore, in this modified example, when such an illegal game is executed, a rear image with a low expectation (a rear image of the "town") is forcibly set. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the above-mentioned illegal game from being executed.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the voice. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113 has been changed. The third is about other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in a modified example of the third embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). As shown in FIG. 116A, the ROM 222 of the present modification is partially modified from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 80) in the rear image selection table 222c. The differences are the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. The details of the rear image selection table 222c will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (b). As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the RAM 223 of the present modification, the special drawing 1 continuous lottery counter 223r and the table selection effect counter 223s are added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 80). The differences are in that they are the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of times that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is continuously executed. The special figure 1 continuous lottery counter 223r is used when the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on in the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 118) (that is, when the variation of the first special symbol is started). Is added to, and is initialized to 0 when the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag is on (that is, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started). The value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter 223r is referred to in the rear image change process 7 (see FIG. 119), and is set for each special symbol when it is determined that the value is 10 or more. The back image of the "city" will be selected regardless of the variation pattern selection table.

Special figure 1 When the value of the continuous lottery counter 223r is large (10 or more in this modification), a rear image with a high degree of expectation is displayed until a variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, a back image with high expectation is displayed). (Until this is done), there is a high possibility that an illegal game is being performed in which a game ball is gradually inserted into the first winning opening 64a. Therefore, in this modified example, when such an illegal game is executed, a rear image with a low expectation (a rear image of the "town") is forcibly set. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the above-mentioned illegal game from being executed.

The table selection effect counter 223s is a counter for determining which of the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 and the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2, which will be described later, is used to select the back image. The table selection effect counter 223s is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 3". Although not shown, the effect counter 223g is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

Next, the back image set in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 117. First, a method of calculating the determination value for selecting the back image will be described with reference to the determination value calculation pattern table of FIG. 117 (a). In this modification, the determination value is set in each of the various tables (first short variation table, second long variation table, etc.) set for each special symbol. There are three types of determination values set in each table, "0", "1", and "2", and the more advantageous the table is for the player, the larger the determination value is set. This determination value is used to determine the combination of the variation pattern selection tables set for each special symbol.

Specifically, among the fluctuation pattern selection tables set for the first special symbol, "0" is set as the judgment value of the first short fluctuation table, and "1" is set as the judgment value of the first middle fluctuation table. It is set, and "2" is set as a determination value of the first length variation table. That is, as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the value of the determination value is set so as to be easily selected as the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time.

On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol, "0" is set as the judgment value of the second length fluctuation table, and "1" is set as the judgment value of the second middle fluctuation pattern. "2" is set as the determination value of the second short fluctuation pattern. That is, as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the value of the determination value is set so that the easier it is to select the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time.

Here, in the present modification, it is advantageous for the player that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped before the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is long, it is advantageous for the player. That is, when the variation pattern selection table having a large value of the above-mentioned determination value is set as the variation pattern for the first special symbol, it is in an advantageous state for the player. Further, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is also advantageous for the player. That is, even when a variation pattern selection table having a large determination value is set as the variation pattern for the second special symbol, it is in an advantageous state for the player.

As a result, as a combination of the variation pattern selection tables set for each special symbol, it is very advantageous for the player when the variation pattern selection table having a large judgment value is set for each special symbol. It becomes a state. That is, the larger the total value of the determined values of the variable pattern selection table for each set special symbol, the more advantageous the player is.

Therefore, in the present modification, the back image suggesting the degree of advantage for the player is selected based on the total value of the above-mentioned determination values and the value of the effect counter 223 g. Details will be described later, but the larger the total value of the judgment values, the easier it is to select the back image with a high degree of expectation. Conversely, the smaller the total value of the judgment values, the higher the degree of expectation. The rear image with a low value is easily selected. This makes it possible to simplify the process of selecting a back image that suggests a degree of advantage for the player, and reduce the processing load.

Next, the contents of the rear image selection table 222c in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). The back image selection table 222c is a table that is referred to when a back image is selected in the back image change process 7 (S2651). The back image selection table 222c is provided with a high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 and a low-reliability back image selection table 222c2. In the back image selection table of each reliability, the same back image as in the fourth embodiment (in ascending order of expectation, "town", "mountain", "sandy beach", "seabed", "fish school") is defined. ing.

The details will be described later, but in the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1, when the total value of the discrimination values is small (“0”), the back image with high expectation (the back image of the “seabed”) Is specified not to be selected. On the contrary, when the total value of the discriminant values is large (“4”), it is stipulated that the rear image with low expectation (the rear image of the “town”) is not selected. On the other hand, in the low-reliability rear image selection table 222c2, even when the total value of the discrimination values is small (“0”), the rear image with high expectation (the rear image of the “seabed”) is displayed. It is stipulated that it may be selected. In addition, even if the total value of the discriminant values is large (“4”), it is stipulated that a rear image with a low degree of expectation (a rear image of “town”) may be selected. There is. That is, the rear image set based on the high-reliability rear image selection table 222c1 makes it easy to predict the current variation pattern selection table (that is, the degree of advantage for the player) set for each special symbol. It is a so-called highly reliable back image. On the other hand, the rear image set based on the low-reliability rear image selection table 222c2 is difficult to predict the current variation pattern selection table (that is, the degree of advantage to the player) set for each special symbol. It is a so-called back image with low reliability.

Here, the details of the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (c). In the high-reliability rear image selection table 222c1, in the rear image setting process 7 (see FIG. 119) described later, the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter is smaller than 10, and the value of the effect counter 223g is “151 to 198”. Is referenced to select a back image (see S5055 in FIG. 119).

When the total value of the judgment values of the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is "0", the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "city" is set for the value "0 to 99" of, the back image of the "mountain" is set for the value "100 to 189" of the effect counter 223 g, and the value "190" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of "sandy beach" is set for "~ 198".

When the total value of the determination values is "1", the rear image of the "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 149" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "mountain" is set, and the back image of the "sandy beach" is set for the values "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223 g.

When the total value of the determination values is "2", the back image of the "mountain" is set for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "100 to 179" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "sandy beach" is set, and the back image of the "seabed" is set for the values "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223 g.

When the total value of the determination values is "3", the back image of the "mountain" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 149" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "sandy beach" is set, and the back image of the "seabed" is set for the values "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223 g.

When the total value of the judgment values is "4", the back image of "sandy beach" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and the value "50 to 179" of the effect counter 223 g is set. The back image of the "seabed" is set, and the back image of the "fish school" is set for the values "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223 g.

Next, the details of the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (d). In the low-reliability rear image selection table 222c2, in the rear image setting process 7 (see FIG. 119) described later, the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery count counter 223r is smaller than 10, and the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is When it is "0 to 2", it is referred to for selecting a back image (see S5054 in FIG. 119).

When the total value of the judgment values of the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is "0", the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "town" is set for the value "0 to 99" of, the back image of the "mountain" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the effect counter 223 g, and the value "150" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "sandy beach" is set for "~ 189", and the back image of the "seabed" is set for the value "190 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

When the total value of the determination values is "1", the rear image of the "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 149" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "mountain" is set, the back image of the "sandy beach" is set for the value "150 to 179" of the production counter 223g, and the "seabed" is set for the value "180 to 189" of the production counter 223g. The back image of is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "2", the rear image of the "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 99" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "mountain" is set, the back image of the "sandy beach" is set for the value "100 to 179" of the production counter 223g, and the "seabed" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the production counter 223g. The back image of is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "3", the rear image of the "town" is selected for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 99" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "mountain" is set, the back image of the "sandy beach" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the production counter 223g, and the "seabed" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the production counter 223g. The back image of is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "4", the rear image of the "town" is selected for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 99" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "mountain" is set, the back image of the "sandy beach" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the production counter 223g, and the "seabed" is set for the value "150 to 189" of the production counter 223g. The back image of the "fish school" is set with respect to the value "190 to 198" of the effect counter 223 g.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the third embodiment will be described. First, the variation display setting process 7 (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. The variation display setting process 7 (S2113) in the modified example of the third embodiment adds the processes of S2671 and S2672 to the variation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 89) in the third embodiment, and the back surface. The difference is that the rear image change process 7 (S2651) is executed instead of the image change process (see FIG. 90), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 7 (S2113), first, when it is determined in the process of S2601 that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c is on (S2601: Yes), S2602 and S2601, as in the third embodiment. The process of S2603 is executed. When the process of S2603 is completed, the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is added by 1 (S2671), and the process proceeds to the process of S2604.

In the process of S2604, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2604: Yes), the processes of S2605 and S2606 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment. When the process of S2606 is completed, the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S2672), and the process proceeds to the process of S2607.

In this way, until the fluctuation based on the second special symbol is started, the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter 223r is not initialized, and one by one each time the fluctuation based on the first special symbol is started. It will be added. As a result, when the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter 223r is large, the game ball is not inserted into the second winning opening 64b, and the game ball is inserted only into the first winning opening 64a. Can be determined to be executed.

In the processing of S2607 to S2612, the same processing as the processing of S2607 to S2612 of the third embodiment is executed. After that, the rear image change process 7 is executed (S2651), and this process is terminated.

Here, the rear image selection process 7 (S2651) executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 118) will be described with reference to FIG. 119. The back image selection process 7 (S2651) in the modified example of the third embodiment adds the processes of S5051 to S5055 to the back image selection process (see FIG. 90) in the third embodiment in place of the process of S5003. It differs in that it does, and is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the rear image selection process 7 (S2651), first, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment, and the variable pattern selection table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set. It is discriminated from the fluctuation pattern selection table (S5001, S5002).

When the processing of S5002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter is 10 or more (S5051). In the process of S5051, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter is 10 or more (S5051: No), until the variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, the degree of expectation). (Until a high back image is displayed), there is a high possibility that an illegal game is being performed in which a game ball is gradually inserted into the first winning opening 64a. Therefore, in this case, the rear image of the "city" is selected (S5052) regardless of the set variable pattern selection table for each special symbol, and the process proceeds to S5004. As a result, even if a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set, a rear image with a high degree of expectation is not set, so that the above-mentioned illegal game is prevented (suppressed) from being executed. Can be done.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5051, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter is smaller than 10 (S5051: Yes), the back surface is based on the variation pattern selection table set for each special symbol. In order to set the image, the process proceeds to S5053.

In the process of S5053, it is determined whether or not the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is 0 to 2 (S5053). In the process of S5053, when it is determined that the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is 0 to 2 (S5053: Yes), the rear image is selected using the low reliability rear image selection table 222c2 (S5054). , S5004. Since the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is updated between 0 and 3 as described above, the probability that the back image is selected using the low reliability back image selection table 222c2 is 3/4. (75%).

On the other hand, in the process of S5053, when the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is determined to be 3 (S5053: No), the rear image is selected using the highly reliable rear image selection table 222c1 and the effect counter 223. Then (S5055), the process proceeds to S5004. Since the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is updated between 0 and 3 as described above, the probability that the back image is selected using the highly reliable back image selection table 222c1 is 1/4. It becomes (25%).

After the process of S5004, the processes of S5004 to S5007 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the modified example of the third embodiment, the rear image is set based on the combination of the variation pattern selection tables set for each special symbol (that is, the degree of advantage for the player). To. In this case, until the variable pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set (that is, until the rear image with high expectation is displayed), the game ball is gradually inserted into the first winning opening 64a. There is a possibility that a game will be played. Therefore, in this modification, it is determined by counting (counting) the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r that the game ball has entered only in the first winning opening 64a. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered only in the first winning opening 64a, the rear image with a low degree of expectation (“) regardless of the variable pattern selection table for each special symbol set. It is configured to set the rear image) of "City". As a result, even if the variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set, the rear image having a high degree of expectation is not set, so that the above-mentioned illegal game can be prevented (suppressed) from being executed.

In this modification, a determination value is given to the variation pattern selection table for each special symbol based on the degree of advantage for the player. Then, the degree of advantage for the player is determined based on the total value of the determination values of the variable pattern selection table for each special symbol that has been set, and the back image is selected. Therefore, it is not necessary to prescribe the degree of advantage for the player according to all the combinations of the variable pattern selection tables for each special symbol that have been set. This makes it possible to simplify the process of selecting a back image that suggests a degree of advantage for the player, and reduce the processing load.

<Modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. In the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern selection table that is advantageous for the player is used for a predetermined period from the end of the jackpot game (until the lottery of the special symbol is performed once in the present embodiment). Is configured to select the variation pattern of each special symbol. As a result, even after the jackpot game is completed, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the main controller 110 has been changed. The fourth is about other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in a modified example of the fourth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (a). In this modification, a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f in ROM 202 is changed. FIG. 120A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f after the end of the jackpot in the variation pattern selection table 202f. Since the other configurations of the ROM 202 are the same as those of the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, the fluctuation of the second special symbol has a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation of the first special symbol for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (in this modified example, until the fluctuation is executed once). Fluctuation patterns are specified. As a result, in the state where the game ball enters the second winning opening 64b during the jackpot game and the winning of the second special symbol is suspended, the change of the second special symbol is the first special after the end of the jackpot game. It will be stopped before the symbol changes. That is, it can be in an advantageous state for the player.

Specifically, when the number of remaining selections after the jackpot ends is 1 or more, in the first special symbol, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time) is obtained with respect to the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. 5 seconds) is set, and in the second special symbol, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (b). As shown in FIG. 120 (b), the RAM 203 of the present modification has the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 big hit and after the end of the special figure 2 big hit with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 80). The difference is that the remaining selection number 203v is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is a counter for counting (measuring) a predetermined period from the end of the jackpot game (in the present embodiment, until the change of the first special symbol is executed once). Is. The remaining selection number 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is set to 1 when it is determined in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 123) that it is the ending timing of the jackpot game (see S1491 in FIG. 123). In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (see FIG. 121), when a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table after the end of the jackpot, 1 is subtracted (see S552 in FIG. 121).

The number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is a counter for counting (measuring) a predetermined period from the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the change of the second special symbol is executed once). Is. The number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is set to 1 when it is determined in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 123) that it is the ending timing of the jackpot game (see S1492 in FIG. 123). In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (see FIG. 122), when a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table after the jackpot ends, 1 is subtracted (see S952 in FIG. 122).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. First, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment is a process of S551 to S554 with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the fourth embodiment. The difference is that the above is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304), first, the processes S501 to S505 are executed in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment. Then, the process proceeds to S551.

In the process of S551, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is greater than 0 (S551). In the process of S551, when it is determined that the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 0 (S551: No), the current gaming state changes for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, it varies. Is not (until it is executed once). In this case, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 1 (S551: Yes), the current gaming state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, so S552. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S552, the value of the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is subtracted by 1 (S552), and the process proceeds to the process of S553. In the process of S553, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted special figure 1 jackpot remaining number of selections 203u is 0 (S553). In this modified example, since the value set for the remaining selection number 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 1, the subtracted number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is always 0.

In the process of S553, when it is determined that the value of the remaining selection number 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 0 (S553: Yes), the current gaming state (states A to C) with respect to the first special symbol ) Is set, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S553, if it is determined that the value of the remaining selection number 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is not 0 (S553: No), the process of S554 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment is a process of S951 to S954 with respect to the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 38) in the fourth embodiment. The difference is in the addition of, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704), first, the processes S901 to S905 are executed in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment. Then, the process proceeds to S951.

In the process of S951, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is greater than 0 (S951). In the process of S951, when it is determined that the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 0 (S951: No), the current gaming state changes for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, it varies. Is not (until it is executed once). In this case, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S951, when it is determined that the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 1 (S951: Yes), the current gaming state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, so S952 Move to the processing of.

In the process of S952, the value of the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is subtracted by 1 (S952), and the process proceeds to the process of S953. In the process of S953, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the subtraction of the special figure 2 jackpot is 0 is 0 (S953). In this modified example, since the value set for the remaining selection number 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 1, the subtracted number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is always 0.

In the process of S953, when it is determined that the value of the remaining selection number 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 0 (S953: Yes), the current gaming state (states A to C) with respect to the second special symbol ) Is set, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S953, if it is determined that the value of the remaining selection number 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is not 0 (S953: No), the process of S954 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the jackpot control process 8 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. The jackpot control process 8 (S1304) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment is different in that the processes of S1491 to S1493 are added to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 45) in the fourth embodiment, and other The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S1304), first, the processes of S1401 to S1409 are executed as in the fourth embodiment. In the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is the ending timing of the jackpot game (S1409), the ending command is set (S1410), the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), and the process proceeds to the process of S1491.

In the process of S1491, 1 is set to the special figure 1 jackpot residual variation number 203u (S1491), and then 1 is set to the special figure 2 jackpot residual variation number 203v (S1492). By setting each jackpot residual fluctuation number by the processing of S1491 and S1492, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined period after the jackpot game is completed.

When the processing of S1492 is completed, the variation pattern selection table 202f after the end of the jackpot is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol (S1493). Then, as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, the variation pattern selection table 202f after the end of the jackpot is set (S1494), and this process is terminated. By the processing of S1493 and S1494, in a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot, the fluctuation can be executed in a fluctuation pattern different from the normal time (the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops first).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the player has a predetermined period from the end of the jackpot game (until the lottery of the special symbol is performed once in the present embodiment). It is configured to select the variation pattern of each special symbol using the advantageous variation pattern selection table. As a result, even after the jackpot game is completed, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Structure in which special figure 1 always changes when the change of special figure 2 starts due to simultaneous fluctuation)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and an entry ball for setting a period during which the game ball can enter the second entry means. The first identification information is dynamically displayed based on the control means and the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. It has a display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means. When the second ball entry means is set to the ball entry period, the ball entry control means is characterized in that it is within a predetermined period after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. Game machine A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine A1, the game ball can enter the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the second entry means. The first identification information is dynamically displayed based on the ball entry control means for setting a different period and the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A display means in which the second identification information is dynamically displayed based on the ball, and a privilege grant that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific second identification information is displayed in the display means. The ball entry control means has means, and when the second ball entry means is set to the ball entry period, it is determined after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. Within the period. As a result, when the game ball enters the second entry means, the game ball enters the first entry means earlier than that, so that the first identification information is dynamically displayed first. Since it is executed, the dynamic display of the second identification information to which the privilege can be given can be configured to be executed later, and the player is expected to dynamically display the second identification information of the first identification information. It can show a dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved. Further, since the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information can be suppressed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive granting of benefits.

In the game machine A1, the ball entry control means is varied into a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. The first state includes a variable member and a variable control means for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game ball can enter the ball. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the variable member is made variable by the variable control means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the ball entry control means is a variable member that is variable to a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. , The variable control means for varying the variable member from the first state to the second state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the variable to the one state as a period during which the game ball can enter. The member is made variable by the variable control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem that the second identification information is dynamically displayed before the first identification information can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the privilege granting means can grant a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player than the privilege when the predetermined first identification information is displayed on the display means. A game machine A3 characterized by.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1 or A2, the following effects are played. That is, the privilege granting means can grant a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player than the privilege when the predetermined first identification information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the dynamic display of the second identification information.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the second ball entry means is the first, which is shorter than the shortest dynamic display period of the first identification information after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. A game machine A4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position where it can enter a ball within a period of time.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the following effect is played. That is, the second ball entry means is a position where the game ball can enter the ball within the first period, which is shorter than the shortest dynamic display period of the first identification information, after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. It is located in. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the second entry means during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, a dynamic display executing means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the predetermined first identification. When the dynamic display displayed by the information and the dynamic display displayed by the specific second identification information are executed at the same time, the dynamic display is displayed first with the predetermined first identification information. Has a termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the dynamic display of the specific second identification information with the second identification information different from the specific second identification information when the above is completed. A game machine A5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effect is played. That is, a dynamic display executing means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and a dynamic display displayed with the predetermined first identification information. , When the dynamic display displayed by the specific second identification information is executed at the same time, and when the dynamic display is displayed first by the predetermined first identification information and the dynamic display ends, the specific It has an termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information with the second identification information different from the specific second identification information. Therefore, the advantages and disadvantages can be changed depending on the dynamic display period executed by the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively, and there is an effect that a novel playability can be provided to the player.

In any of the game machines A2 to A5, the ball entry control means is detected by the detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball to enter the first ball entry means and the detection means. Based on this, the gaming machine A6 is characterized by having a period determining means for determining a period from the first state to the second state of the variable member by the variable control means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A2 to A5, the following effects can be played. That is, the ball entry control means is a detection means that detects the passage of a game ball that will enter the first ball entry means, and the variable control means based on the detection by the detection means. It has a period determining means for determining a period from the first state to the second state of the variable member. Therefore, there is an effect that the profit given to the player can be changed depending on the period determined by the period determining means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, there is a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the discriminating means is specified by the discriminating means. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means when the determination result of the above is determined.

According to the game machine A7, in any of the game machines A1 to A6, a privilege advantageous to the player is given by discriminating a specific discrimination result, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved. ..

In the game machine A7, when a special discrimination result is discriminated by the discriminating means, a special privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege is given by the privilege granting means. Machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A7, a special privilege that is more advantageous to the player is given, so that there is an effect that the game can be given a fresh taste.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the variable ball entry means. Based on the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition and the privilege being granted by the privilege granting means, the variable ball entering means is moved from the second state to the first. It has a variable control means that can be changed to a state, and the privilege giving means is characterized in that when a game ball enters the specific area, a special privilege that is more advantageous than the privilege is given. Game machine A9 to play.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the player can expect the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to pass through a specific area, and the game can be expected. It has the effect of improving the interest.

<Characteristic B group> (Simultaneous fluctuation, setting the deviation to a small hit, special 1 small hit short open, special 2 small hit long open configuration)
Based on the first ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the game ball entering the first ball-entry means, the first The discrimination means that executes the discrimination and executes the second discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the first identification information based on the discrimination result of the first discrimination, and the second discrimination. A display means in which the second identification information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination is displayed at the same time, and a dynamic display capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. The execution means, the dynamic display period determination means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the said based on a predetermined determination result. When the first identification information is displayed, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the game is more than the first privilege game. The privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game that is advantageous to the person, the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result, and the second identification information based on the specific second determination result are simultaneously present. In the case of dynamic display, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result is completed first, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is completed. It is characterized by having an termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the display with the second knowledge identification information indicating the discrimination result based on the discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result. Game machine B1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine B1, the game ball has entered the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means. Based on this, the first determination is executed, and the determination means for executing the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means and the first determination result based on the determination result of the first determination. The display means in which the 1 identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second discrimination are displayed at the same time, and the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the display means, respectively. A dynamic display execution means capable of determining a dynamic display period, and a dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. When the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the said Based on the privilege game execution means capable of executing the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result, and the specific second determination result. When the second identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed at the same time, and the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result is completed first, the specific second determination result is displayed. An termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second identification information indicating the discrimination result based on the discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result. Have. Therefore, by stopping the dynamic display of the second identification information before the dynamic display of the first identification information, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute a privileged game, and it is possible to provide a novel game property. Therefore, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine B1, a specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Special privilege game execution means to be executed, and an operation means for operating the ball entry guide member in the first motion in which the game ball is easy to enter the specific ball entry means and the second motion in which the game ball is harder to enter than the first motion. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that, when the second privilege game is executed, the operation means thereof is easier to execute the first operation than the first privilege game.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, a special entry means capable of entering a game ball and a special privilege game for executing a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game when the game ball enters the specific entry means. It has a privilege game execution means and an operation means for operating the ball entry guide member in a first motion in which the game ball easily enters the specific ball entry means and a second motion in which the game ball is harder to enter than the first motion. However, the operation means is easier to execute the first operation when the second privilege game is executed than the first privilege game. Therefore, the privilege to the player can be changed depending on whether or not the game ball is allowed to enter the specific ball entry means by the second privilege game executed when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the player in multiple stages.

In the game machine B2, the operation means sets the period for operating the ball entry guide member to a position where the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means longer in the first operation than in the second operation. A game machine B3 characterized by being something to do.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2, the following effects are played. That is, the operation means sets the period for operating the ball entry guide member to a position where the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means in the first operation longer than in the second operation. is there. Therefore, it is possible to switch between advantages and disadvantages with easy control, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

In the game machine B2 or B3, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game The specific ball-entry means includes a variable control means that changes the variable ball-entry means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the specific ball-entry means is the variable ball-entry means. The game machine B4, characterized in that the game ball that has entered the ball is arranged at a position where the ball can enter.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2 or B3, the variable ball entry means is put into the first state by executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game, and the specific ball entry means is entered. Since the opportunity to enter the ball is given, there is an effect that the value of the first privilege game or the second privilege game can be improved.

In the game machine B4, when the first privilege game is executed, the operation means performs the first operation before the variable ball entry means enters the first state, and then the first operation is performed. Two movements are executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the first movement is executed during the period when the variable ball entry means is in the first state. Game machine B5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered into the specific ball entry means during the second privilege game, and the value of the second privilege game can be improved.

In either the game machine B4 or B5, the first privilege game and the second privilege game are characterized in that the variable ball-entry means is changed to the first state the same number of times. B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4 or B5, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the difference between the first privilege game and the second privilege game from the operation of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which whether or not to enter the specific ball entry means is determined from the type of the privilege game.

<Characteristic C group> (Give a type to the small hit and switch the variable table of special 2 with the small hit of special 1)
A discrimination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and a first determination based on the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second discrimination, and the display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively. A possible dynamic display means and a variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the display of the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result. A game machine C1 characterized by having.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine C1, the first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second determination is executed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the second determination and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information. A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each, and a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the display of the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result. It has a variable control means that makes it variable. Therefore, since the dynamic display period executed for the second identification information is changed by displaying the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result, the game playability is changed according to the determination result of the first determination. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine C1, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. The gaming machine C2 is characterized by having a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege in the case of the case.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has a privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege. Therefore, since the dynamic display period in which the second discrimination is determined, which is advantageous to the player, is variable depending on the discrimination result of the first discrimination, the player is also interested in the display of the first identification information, which has little profit. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, respectively, and the predetermined determination result. When the first identification information based on the above and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first. Then, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result is provided with an ending means for displaying and ending the second identification information based on a determination result different from the specific determination result. A game machine C3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the first identification based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is completed first, the specific identification information is displayed. It has a terminating means for displaying and terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous for the player, and there is an effect that the player can be expected to play the game dynamically in the short dynamic display period. ..

In the game machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is executed with priority given to the dynamic display of the identification information set as priority based on a predetermined priority condition. The gaming machine C4, characterized in that it has a priority means for

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is set to be prioritized based on a predetermined priority condition. It has a priority means for preferentially executing the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and their operation. The setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is determined by the target display period determining means, and the setting means has the first identification information indicating the predetermined determination result. The gaming machine C5 is configured so that the dynamic display period group corresponding to the second identification information can be variably set based on the display.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, and the dynamic display period determining means thereof. It has a setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the target display period is determined, and the setting means is based on the fact that the first identification information indicating the predetermined determination result is displayed. It is configured so that the dynamic display period group corresponding to the second identification information can be variably set. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage of the game can be easily changed by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any of the game machines C2 to C5, when a special determination result is determined by the first determination or the second determination by the determination means, the player is given more than the first privilege and the second privilege. The gaming machine C6, characterized in that an advantageous special privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C2 to C5, there is an effect that the player can be expected to play a game with a special determination result.

The game machine C7 is characterized in that any of the game machines C2 to C6 is set so that the special privilege is given as the second privilege when the special condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine C7, since the special privilege is given when the special condition is satisfied in any of the game machines C2 to C6, it is possible to further give the player an advantageous privilege. , There is an effect that the attractiveness of the second privilege can be improved.

In any of the game machines C2 to C7, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the variable ball entry means. Based on the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition and the second privilege being given by the privilege giving means, the variable ball entering means is moved from the second state to the above. The gaming machine C8, which has a variable control means that can be changed to the first state, and the privilege granting means grants the special privilege when the gaming ball enters the specific area. ..

According to the game machine C8, it is possible to make the player expect the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to pass through a specific area, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (SP for small hits where the fluctuation pattern of Special 2 can be switched)
A discrimination means that executes the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first condition, a display means that displays the first identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means that moves the first identification information. A dynamic display means for displaying the target, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the determination result, and predetermined When the first identification information indicating the determination result of is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game which is advantageous to the player, and the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. , The specific ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter, the first action that allows the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and the second action that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first action. The operation means for operating the operation member and the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, and the privilege giving means is the determination. Even when the first identification information based on the special discrimination result is displayed as the discrimination result by the means, the privilege is given, and the first dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is given. In the embodiment, at least a special dynamic display mode in which the determination ratio is set high is set in the case of the special discrimination result, and the special dynamic display mode is the predetermined discrimination result. Based on this, the gaming machine D1 is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine D1, the discriminating means for executing the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first condition, the display means for displaying the first discriminating information based on the discriminating result by the discriminating means, and the display means thereof. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and a dynamic display mode for determining the first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are determined based on the determination result. The display mode determining means, the privileged game executing means for executing the first privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information indicating the predetermined determination result is displayed, and the privileged game executing means for the privileged game executing means. When a game is executed, it is more difficult to enter the ball than the specific entry means that allows the game ball to enter, the first action that allows the game ball to enter the specific entry means, and the first action. It has an operation means for operating the operation member in the second operation, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. The privilege granting means grants the privilege even when the first identification information based on the special discrimination result is displayed as the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. In the first dynamic display mode, at least a special dynamic display mode in which the determination ratio is set high is set in the case of the special determination result, and the special dynamic display mode is the predetermined It is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the determination result of. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine D1, the discrimination means executes the second discrimination based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, and the display means is based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination. The second identification information is displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information, and the privilege game execution means is the second identification based on a specific determination result. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that when the information is displayed, the second privilege game having less benefits than the first privilege game can be executed.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, the discrimination means executes the second discrimination based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition, and the display means performs the second discrimination based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination. The information is displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information, and the privilege game execution means displays the second identification information based on a specific determination result. When this is done, the second privilege game, which has fewer benefits than the first privilege game, can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to change the advantages and disadvantages for the player between the first determination and the second determination, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine D2, the second privilege game is characterized in that the period during which the operation member becomes the first operation is set shorter than that of the first privilege game.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D2, the second privilege game is set to have a shorter period in which the operating member is in the first operation than the first privilege game, so that the privilege is given. There is an effect that it can be easily made difficult to be given.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the special dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode having a high expectation that a privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D3, the special dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which the privilege is highly expected to be given by the privilege giving means. Since the first privilege game is executed even when is not given, there is an effect that the disappointment of the player can be reduced.

In any of the game machines D2 to D4, the dynamic display means can dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. Machine D5.

According to the game machine D5, since the first identification information and the second identification information can be dynamically displayed at the same time on any of the game machines D2 to D4, there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed. ..

In the game machine D5, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed at the same time, the termination means for forcibly ending the other dynamic display based on the end of one dynamic display. A game machine D6, characterized in that it has.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the other is forcibly terminated in the dynamic display end timing of one by the ending means, so that more efficient game can be performed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine D6, when the dynamic display is forcibly terminated by the termination means, it is regulated that a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the identification information at which the dynamic display is terminated. The gaming machine D7, which is characterized by having such regulatory means.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, there is an effect that gambling can be suppressed by restricting the granting of benefits by regulatory means.

<Characteristic E group> (Switch between special 1 and special 2 fluctuation tables depending on the number of fluctuations)
A discrimination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and a first determination result of the first determination by the discrimination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the discrimination result and the second identification information based on the second discrimination result which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, and the first discrimination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information based on the above or the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the display means A dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information at the same time, and a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A plurality of dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and a plurality of dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information. A first dynamic display period group in which a dynamic display period is set and a second dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information are set. The group determining means for determining each type and the group determining means having the group change the type of the first dynamic display period group or the second dynamic display period group based on the establishment of the change condition. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is determined by

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine E1, the first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, the second determination is executed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. The display means on which the first identification information based on the first discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the above, and the second identification information based on the second discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, are displayed, and the display means thereof. When the first identification information based on the specific first determination result or the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player. A dynamic display executing means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the first dynamic display executing means dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, and the dynamic display period of the first identification information by the dynamic display period determining means. A first dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the above are set, and a second dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information are set. It has a group determining means for determining the type of the dynamic display period group, and the group determining means has the first dynamic display period group or the second dynamic display based on the establishment of the change condition. The type of period group is changed and determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E1, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means at the same time, either the first identification information or the second identification information is used. Is the dynamic display of the other when the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is completed before the other. The gaming machine E2 is characterized by having a stopping means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display by displaying the first identification information or the second identification information corresponding to a predetermined determination result.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means at the same time, the first identification information The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second identification result is earlier than the other. Since it has a canceling means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display by displaying the other dynamic display with the first identification information or the second identification information corresponding to the predetermined determination result. , There is an effect that the player can be expected to finish the dynamic display of the second identification information first.

In the game machine E1 or E2, a dynamic display period longer than a predetermined first period is determined for the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group determined by the group determination means. The long first dynamic display period group and the long second dynamic display period group that are easy to be performed, and the short first dynamic display period group and the short second dynamic that the dynamic display period shorter than the first period is easy to be determined. The gaming machine E3, characterized in that the display period group is at least set.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means have a predetermined first. The long first dynamic display period group and the long second dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period longer than one period is easily determined, and the short first in which the dynamic display period shorter than the first period is easily determined. Since at least the dynamic display period group and the short second dynamic display period group are set, there is an effect that the game playability can be changed by switching the dynamic display mode group.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the predetermined discrimination result is set to a discrimination result in which a privilege advantageous to the player is not given.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E2 or E3, a privilege advantageous to the player is not given, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, based on the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which it is difficult to enter, and the execution of the privilege game, the first state. The gaming machine E5 is characterized by having a variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means from the two states to the first state.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E4, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, so that the player can easily understand that the privilege game is being executed. It has the effect of being able to be recognized.

In the game machine E5, a specific area in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter, a regulated state that regulates the entry of the game ball into the specific area, and a release state in which the regulation is released. The privilege game execution means executes a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game when the game ball enters the specific area. A game machine E6 characterized by being a thing.

In the game machine E6, the variable means is in the released state in the privilege game executed based on the specific second determination result, as compared with the privilege game executed based on the specific first determination result. A game machine E7 characterized in that it is set so as to be easily variable.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, there is an effect that the second identification information is stopped before the first identification information, which is more advantageous to the player.

<Characteristic F group> (No special 1 hold, special 2 hold 1 configuration, aiming to win special 2 during big hit or small hit)
The first determination is executed based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the entry into the first entry means. , The discriminating means that executes the second discrimination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, the first identification information based on the first discriminating result that is the discriminating result of the first discrimination by the discriminating means The display means on which the second identification information based on the second discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, is displayed, and the first identification information based on the specific first discrimination result are displayed on the display means. In this case, when the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed and the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the first privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is displayed. 2. The privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, the dynamic display executing means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the dynamic display thereof. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the executing means and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, and the second identification information move. A storage means for storing the right to execute the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means when the target is displayed, and the specific first 1 When the identification information or the specific second identification information is displayed, the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information during the dynamic display period is other than the specific first determination result. Alternatively, the dynamic display period determining means includes a termination means for forcibly displaying a discrimination result other than the specific second discrimination result to end the dynamic display, and the dynamic display period determining means dynamically displays the first identification information. It is configured so that the dynamic display period of the second identification information, which is longer than the display period, can be easily determined, and when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is not executed, the determination is made in the storage means. It is difficult to memorize the right, and when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed, the storage means has an execution right control means that makes it easy to memorize the execution right. A game machine F1 characterized by.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine F1, based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the entry into the first entry means. , The determination means that executes the first determination and executes the second determination based on the entry into the second ball entry means, and the first determination result that is the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the first identification information and the second identification information based on the second discrimination result which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, and a first discrimination result based on the first discrimination result specific to the display means. 1 When the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is more than the first privilege game. Dynamic display execution capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time as the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game that is advantageous to the player. The means, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively. A memory that stores the right to execute the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. The specific means and the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information during the dynamic display period when the specific first identification information or the specific second identification information is displayed. The dynamic display period determining means includes an ending means for forcibly displaying a discrimination result other than the first discrimination result or a discrimination result other than the specific second discrimination result to end the dynamic display. When the dynamic display period of the second identification information, which is longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information, is easily determined, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game is not executed, the first privilege game or the second privilege game is not executed. , The execution right control means that makes it difficult to store the discrimination right in the storage means and makes it easy to store the execution right in the storage means when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed. And have. Therefore, since the game can be performed with the expectation that the execution right is memorized during the privilege game, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine F1 is characterized in that the game machine F1 has a delay means for delaying the entry of the game balls into the second entry means at intervals of a predetermined interval or more so that the game balls are entered one by one.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the second ball entry means has a delay means for delaying entry so that the game balls are entered one by one at intervals of a predetermined interval or more. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution right can be easily suppressed from being memorized.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the predetermined interval is formed in a period shorter than the execution period of the first privilege game.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, the predetermined interval is composed of a period shorter than the execution period of the first privilege game, so that the first privilege game can be achieved. When executed, it has the effect of making it easier to remember the execution right.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, a specific area in which the game ball can enter, a first state in which the game ball can easily enter the specific area, and a first state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. It has a variable member capable of being variable to two states, and a variable control means for changing the variable member to either the second state or the first state, and the variable control means is said to have the same variable control means. When the first privilege game is executed, the variable member is more easily changed to the first state than the second state, and when the second privilege game is executed, the variable member is moved to the first state. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is easier to change to the second state than the first state.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines F1 to F3, the following effects are played. That is, it is possible to change between a specific area in which the game ball can enter, a first state in which the game ball easily enters the specific area, and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. It has a possible variable member and a variable control means that changes the variable member to either the second state or the first state, and the variable control means executes the first privilege game. In this case, the variable member is more likely to be changed to the first state than the second state, and when the second privilege game is executed, the variable member is changed to the second state than the first state. Since it is easy to change, it is possible to give a privilege step by step, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game. The gaming machine F5 is characterized by having a variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means to the open state based on the above.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 or k to F4, the variable ball entry means is opened based on the execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, so that the first privilege game Alternatively, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the second privilege game is in progress.

In the game machine F5, the specific area is arranged at a position where a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter the game machine F6.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F5, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter a specific area based on the execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, and the interest of the game is Has the effect of improving.

In any of the game machines F2 to F6, the delay means has a rolling surface capable of rolling the game ball for a period of a predetermined interval or more.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F2 to F6, there is an effect that a predetermined interval or more can be secured by a rolling surface capable of rolling for a period of a predetermined interval or more. is there.

<Characteristic G group> (Structure that regulates the occurrence of hold in Special 2)
The first determination is executed based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the entry into the first entry means. , The discriminating means for executing the second discrimination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, the first identification information based on the first discriminating result which is the discriminating result of the first discrimination by the discriminating means, The display means on which the second identification information based on the second discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, is displayed, and the first identification information based on the specific first discrimination result are displayed on the display means. In this case, when the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed and the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the first privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is displayed. 2. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display execution thereof. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the means and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the second identification information are dynamically displayed. A storage means that stores the right to execute the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means when displayed, and the storage means described above. It is characterized by having a state setting means capable of switching between a first state in which the execution right is easily stored and a second state in which the execution right is less likely to be stored than the first state. Game machine G1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine G1, based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the entry into the first entry means. , The determination means that executes the first determination and executes the second determination based on the entry into the second ball entry means, and the first determination result that is the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the first identification information and the second identification information based on the second discrimination result which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, and a first discrimination result based on the first discrimination result specific to the display means. 1 When the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is more than the first privilege game. A privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, respectively. And the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively. A storage means for storing the execution right of the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. The storage means has a state setting means capable of switching between a first state in which the execution right is easily stored and a second state in which the execution right is less likely to be stored than the first state. Is. Therefore, since it is possible to make it a special state that the game ball continuously enters the second ball entry means, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine G1 is characterized by having a delay means for delaying the entry interval of the game ball to an interval equal to or higher than the first interval when the game ball enters the second entry means. Machine G2.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the delay means for delaying the ball entry interval of the game ball to an interval equal to or greater than the first interval. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from continuously entering the second ball entry means.

In the game machine G2, the delay means is arranged at a position where it can be guided to the second ball entry means, and the rolling means capable of rolling the game ball for the first period or more, and the rolling means thereof. The game machine G3 is characterized by having a guide portion for guiding the game ball that has been rolled for the first period or more to the second ball entry means.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the following effects are played. That is, the delay means is arranged at a position where it can be guided to the second ball entry means, and the rolling means capable of rolling the game ball for the first period or longer and the rolling means thereof are referred to as the first. It has a guide unit that guides a game ball that has been rolled for a period of time or longer to the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution right can be suppressed from being memorized during a period other than the privilege game.

In the game machines G1 to G3, the state setting means is set by switching to the first state based on the execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game. Game machine G4.

In the game machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G1 to G3, the execution right is easily memorized by executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game, and only the dynamic display of the second identification information is performed. It has the effect of making it easier to do. Therefore, there is an effect that the second privilege game, which is advantageous to the player, can be easily executed.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the open state in which the game ball can enter and the closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game are executed. A variable control means that changes the variable ball entry means in the open state, a specific area in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball in the specific area. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that it has a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed, so that an opportunity to put the game ball into a specific area is given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved. In addition, as the privilege given by the privilege granting means, the variable ball entering means is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied, the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or the second determination result is set high, and the like. Is equivalent.

In the game machine G5, the second privilege game is set so that the game ball can easily enter the specific area as compared with the first privilege game.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G5, by executing the second privilege game, the privilege can be easily given, and the execution right to dynamically display the second identification information is stored. Has the effect of making it more valuable.

<Characteristic H group> (Give a type to the small hit and switch the fluctuation table of special 2 with the small hit of special 1. Shift according to the number of fluctuations on the special figure 1 side)
A discrimination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and a first determination based on the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second discrimination, and the display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively. A variable control means that changes the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information when a possible dynamic display means and a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 characterized by having and.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine H1, the first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, the second determination is executed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the second determination and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information. Dynamic display in the dynamic display of the second identification information when the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each and the variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied. It has a variable control means that changes the period. Therefore, since the dynamic display period executed for the second identification information is changed by satisfying the variable condition that is satisfied by displaying the first identification information, the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. There is. If it is easy to select a second identification information having a short fluctuation time, the second identification information can be efficiently and dynamically displayed. Here, the variable condition corresponds to a display mode in which the first identification information is displayed, a number of times of dynamic display is a predetermined number, and the like.

In the game machine H1, when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. The gaming machine H2 is characterized by having a privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege in the case.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the following effects are played. That is, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the above two major benefits. Therefore, since the dynamic display period in which the second discrimination is determined, which is advantageous to the player, is variable depending on the discrimination result of the first discrimination, the player is also interested in the display of the first identification information, which has little profit. It has the effect of being able to.

The game machine H2 is characterized in that the variable condition is satisfied based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege, which has less privilege than the second privilege, is executed. It is possible to expect the establishment of variable conditions, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In the game machine H2, the variable condition is satisfied based on the number of times the first identification information is dynamically displayed becomes a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times or more.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H2, the number of times of the dynamic display of the first identification information can also be of interest to the player, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the predetermined When the first identification information based on the determination result and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is performed. When it ends first, it has an ending means for displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result and ending by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. A game machine H5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H4, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the first identification based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is completed first, the specific identification information is displayed. It has a terminating means for displaying and terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous for the player, and there is an effect that the player can be expected to play the game dynamically in the short dynamic display period. ..

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is prioritized based on a predetermined priority condition. The gaming machine H6, which has a priority means for executing the game.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is prioritized based on a predetermined priority condition. Since it has a priority means for preferentially executing the dynamic display of the set identification information, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and their operation. The target display period determining means has a setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is determined, and the setting means has the second setting means based on the establishment of the variable condition. The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that the dynamic display period group corresponding to the identification information can be variably set.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, and the dynamic display period determining means thereof. It has a setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the target display period is determined, and the setting means is the dynamic corresponding to the second identification information based on the establishment of the variable condition. It is configured so that the display period group can be variably set. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage of the game can be easily changed by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any of the game machines H2 to H7, when a special determination result is determined by the first determination or the second determination by the determination means, the player is given more than the first privilege and the second privilege. The gaming machine H8, characterized in that an advantageous special privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines H2 to H5, there is an effect that the player can be expected to play a game with a special determination result.

The game machine H9 is characterized in that any one of the game machines H2 to H8 is set so that the special privilege is given when the special condition is satisfied as the second privilege.

According to the game machine H9, when the special condition is satisfied in any of the game machines H2 to H8, the special privilege is given, so that the privilege that is more advantageous to the player can be given. , There is an effect that the attractiveness of the second privilege can be improved.

In any of the game machines H2 to H9, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the variable ball entry means. Based on the specific area in which the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition and the second privilege being granted by the privilege giving means, the variable ball entering means is moved from the second state to the above. A gaming machine having a variable control means that can be changed to a first state, and the privilege giving means grants the special privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. H10.

According to the game machine H10, it is possible to make the player expect the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to pass through a specific area, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine H10, the special privilege is the game machine H11 characterized in that a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed.

According to the game machine H11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H10, a privilege game is executed as a special privilege, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved. Here, when the second privilege is given, the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short because the second identification information may be given by stopping before the first identification information. There is an effect that the player can play the game with interest by being changed to the variable control means so as to be.

The game machine H10 has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the determination means determines a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result. The privilege is the gaming machine H12, wherein the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the determination means is set high until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine H12, in addition to the effect of the game machine H11, as a special privilege, the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result is set to be high, so that the player is given a high probability. It has the effect of increasing the value of the second benefit.

<Characteristic I group> (Special 1 small hit, special 2 variable variable. Transition to the ceiling on the special figure 1 side. H group similar version)
A discrimination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and a first determination based on the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second discrimination, and the display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively. Dynamic display means capable of, and dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means can be determined at a predetermined opportunity. When the display period determining means and the variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied, the display period determining means determines the dynamic display period in response to the dynamic display of the second identification information. The gaming machine I1 is characterized by having a variable control means for varying the dynamic display period.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and the game tends to be monotonous. There was a need to further improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game. Here, in the conventional game machine, the main interest of the game is changed only by changing the probability of determining the success or failure of the game, and the game tends to be monotonous. There has been a demand for a gaming machine that can change the advantageous state.

According to the game machine I1, the first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, the second determination is executed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the second determination and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information. The dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each and the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are determined at predetermined triggers. When the dynamic display period determination means that can be used and the variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied, the operation corresponds to the dynamic display of the second identification information. It has a variable control means for varying the dynamic display period determined by the target display period determining means. Therefore, since the dynamic display period determined for the second identification information is changed by satisfying the variable condition that is satisfied by displaying the first identification information, the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. There is. If it is easy to select a second identification information having a short fluctuation time, the second identification information can be efficiently and dynamically displayed. Here, the variable condition corresponds to a display mode (discrimination result) in which the first identification information is displayed, a predetermined number of times of dynamic display, and the like.

The game machine I1 has a dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods whose dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means is set, and the dynamic display period group is the first. 2. As the dynamic display period of the identification information, the first dynamic display period group in which the first dynamic display period is easily selected and the second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period are easily selected. At least two dynamic display period groups are set, and the variable control means is a type of the dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period of the second identification information is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the dynamic display period of the second identification information is changed by changing and setting.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the dynamic display period of the second identification information can be changed by changing the type of the dynamic display period group, so that the second identification information can be easily controlled. The period of identification information can be changed.

In the game machine I1 or I2, when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. The gaming machine I3 is characterized by having a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege when the prize is granted.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I1 or I2, the following effects are played. That is, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the above two major benefits. Therefore, since the dynamic display period in which the second discrimination is determined, which is advantageous to the player, is variable depending on the discrimination result of the first discrimination, the player is also interested in the display of the first identification information, which has little profit. It has the effect of being able to.

The game machine I3 is characterized in that the variable condition is satisfied based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I3, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege, which has less privilege than the second privilege, is executed. It is possible to expect the establishment of variable conditions, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In the game machine I3, the variable condition is satisfied based on the number of times the first identification information is dynamically displayed becomes a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times or more.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I3, the number of times the first identification information is dynamically displayed can also be of interest to the player, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

In any of the game machines I1 to I5, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. When the first identification information based on the determination result and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is performed. When it ends first, it has an ending means for displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result and ending by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. A game machine I6 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines I1 to I5, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the first identification based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is completed first, the specific identification information is displayed. It has a terminating means for displaying and terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous for the player, and there is an effect that the player can be expected to play the game dynamically in the short dynamic display period. ..

In any of the game machines I1 to I5, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is prioritized based on a predetermined priority condition. The gaming machine I7, which has a priority means for executing the game.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I5, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is prioritized based on a predetermined priority condition. Since it has a priority means for preferentially executing the dynamic display of the set identification information, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines I1 to I7, a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and their operation. The target display period determining means has a setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is determined, and the setting means has the second setting means based on the establishment of the variable condition. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the dynamic display period group corresponding to the identification information can be variably set.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I7, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, and the dynamic display period determining means thereof. It has a setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the target display period is determined, and the setting means is the dynamic corresponding to the second identification information based on the establishment of the variable condition. It is configured so that the display period group can be variably set. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage of the game can be easily changed by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any of the game machines I3 to I8, when a special determination result is determined by the first determination or the second determination by the determination means, the player is more likely than the first privilege and the second privilege. The gaming machine I9, characterized in that advantageous special benefits are granted by the privilege granting means.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines I3 to I8, there is an effect that the player can be expected to play a game with a special determination result.

The game machine I10 is characterized in that any one of the game machines I3 to I9 is set so that the special privilege is given when the special condition is satisfied as the second privilege.

According to the game machine I10, since the special privilege is given when the special condition is satisfied in any of the game machines I3 to I9, it is possible to further give the player an advantageous privilege. , There is an effect that the attractiveness of the second privilege can be improved.

In any of the game machines I3 to I10, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the variable entry means for entering the ball. Based on the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition and the second privilege being given by the privilege giving means, the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the above. A gaming machine having a variable control means that is variable to a first state, and the privilege giving means grants the special privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. I11.

According to the game machine I11, it is possible to make the player expect the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to pass through a specific area, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine I11, the special privilege is the game machine I12, wherein the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed.

According to the game machine I12, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I11, the privilege game is executed as a special privilege, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved. Here, when the second privilege is given, the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short because the second identification information may be given by stopping before the first identification information. There is an effect that the player can play the game with interest by being changed to the variable control means so as to be.

The game machine I11 has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the determination means determines a special first determination result or a special second determination result. The privilege is the gaming machine I13, wherein the probability of being determined as the special first determination result or the special second determination result by the determination means is set high until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine I13, in addition to the effect of the game machine I11, as a special privilege, the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result is set to be high, so that the player is given a high probability. It has the effect of increasing the value of the second benefit.

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H12, and I1 to I13, the game machine is a slot machine. A game machine Z1 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H12, and I1 to I13, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A game machine Z2 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H12, and I1 to I13, the game machine is a pachinko machine. A game machine Z3 characterized by being fused with a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
37 First symbol display device (part of display means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of display means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display means)
S303, S703 Discrimination means S609, S919 Variable control means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. Some award games are executed. By setting a plurality of types of privilege games to be executed, a game machine has been proposed in which the interest of the player can be changed according to the privilege games to be executed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-265765

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having further improved the interest of the game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, based on the establishment of the first condition, and executes the first determination, based on the establishment of the second condition, it is possible to execute a second determination and Do discriminating means, a first display area the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is a determination result of the first determination by the determination means is displayed, the determination of the second determination by the determination means A display means having a second display area on which the second identification information for showing the second discrimination result which is the result is displayed , and the first identification information for showing the specific first discrimination result to the display means. Alternatively, when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means thereof. When the privilege game is executed, a specific area in which the game ball can be entered, a first state in which the game ball can be entered in the specific area, and a game ball that is more than the first state. A state setting means capable of setting a second state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. a, a first dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information to the display unit, a dynamic display is performed in the first identification information by its first dynamic display execution means The second dynamic display executing means capable of causing the display means to start the dynamic display of the second identification information during the period, and the first dynamic display executing means dynamically displaying the identification information. Dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display execution means. The first dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information are set by the dynamic display period determination means and the operation of the second identification information. A group determination means capable of determining each of the second dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the target display period are set, and a predetermined first specific condition are established. If the dynamic display of the second identification information is started during the period during which the dynamic display of the first identification information is being executed, the first display area of the display means and the first display area are used. Execution of the specific effect is started in the third display area larger than the second display area, and the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed during the period during which the dynamic display of the second identification information is not executed. If there is Includes a specific effect executing means capable of not starting the execution of the specific effect, and the group determining means determines the first dynamic display period group or the determined dynamic display period group when a variable condition is satisfied. The second dynamic display period group can be changed, and the first identification for showing the specific first determination result during the period when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Based on the fact that the information is stopped and displayed in the first display area prior to the second identification information, the specific effect is forcibly terminated to determine that the information is the specific first determination result. The first dynamic display period group, which can execute an identifiable effect and can easily determine a first dynamic display period for stopping and displaying the first identification information prior to the second identification information, When determined by the group determining means, the special notification mode can be displayed in the third display area in response to the establishment of the predetermined second specific condition, and the state setting means can display the above-mentioned state setting means. When the first identification information for showing the specific first discrimination result is displayed, the second state is set, and the second identification information for showing the specific second discrimination result is displayed. If so, the first state can be set .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a determination means capable of executing the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executing the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, The first display area in which the first identification information for showing the first discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means , is displayed, and the second, which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination by the discrimination means . display means for second identification information for indicating the determination result is a second display area to be displayed, the first identification information or a particular said to denote particular the first determination result first on the display unit 2 When the second identification information for indicating the determination result is displayed, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means. In that case, a specific area where the game ball can be entered, a first state where the game ball can be entered into the specific area, and a more difficult entry of the game ball than the first state. The display includes a state setting means capable of setting the second state, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. a first dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information to the unit, the dynamic display is performed a period of said first identification information by its first dynamic display execution means The second dynamic display executing means capable of causing the display means to start the dynamic display of the second identification information, and the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display executing means. A dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period and a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display executing means, and its dynamic The first dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information are set by the display period determining means and the dynamic display period of the second identification information are determined. When a group determining means capable of determining each of the second dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods are set and a predetermined first specific condition are satisfied. When the dynamic display of the second identification information is started during the period during which the dynamic display of the first identification information is being executed, the first display area and the second display area of the display means are more than. When the execution of the specific effect is started in the large third display area and the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed during the period during which the dynamic display of the second identification information is not executed, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed. The specific effect The group determining means has a specific effect executing means capable of not starting the execution of the above, and the group determining means determines the first dynamic display period group or the second dynamic display when the variable condition is satisfied. The period group can be changed, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result during the period when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means is the second. Based on the fact that the specific effect is stopped and displayed in the first display area prior to the identification information, the specific effect is forcibly terminated to execute an effect that can identify the specific first determination result. The first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means, which makes it easy to determine the first dynamic display period for stopping and displaying the first identification information before the second identification information. If this is the case, the special notification mode can be displayed in the third display area in response to the establishment of the predetermined second specific condition, and the state setting means can display the specific first determination. When the first identification information for showing the result is displayed, the second state is set, and when the second identification information for showing the specific second discrimination result is displayed, the first identification information is displayed. The state can be set . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a first variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (d) are schematic views schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) to (d) are schematic views schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the relationship between the stop timing of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (A) and (b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the stop timing of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fusion effect selection table in the ROM of the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the work RAM of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a forced stop process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a small hit stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. (A) is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 forced stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller, and (b) is the special figure 2 small hit stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which showed. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting process executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit ending process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation time measurement process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the fusion effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing the V winning effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a per-variation pattern selection table provided in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) to (c) are voices in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 1 variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 variation start processing 2 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device according to the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the RAM configuration of the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. (A) to (e) are schematic views schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device according to the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a rear image provided in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the details of the selection table schematically, and (c) is the schematic diagram which which typically showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol change start processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation start processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 small hit stop process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 3 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the back image change processing executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is an enlarged perspective view of the Kroon provided in the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation start processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically showing the details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change stop process 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device according to the sixth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are provided in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of various tables schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing 6 executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing 6 executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit ending process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 variation start processing 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the SP reach selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) is the schematic diagram of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of RAM schematically. (A) is a determination value calculation pattern table provided in the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) to (d) are the voice in the modified example of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the rear image selection table provided in the RAM in a lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the back image change process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pattern selection table after the end of the jackpot provided in the ROM of the main control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a modified diagram of the modified embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in an example. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 73, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown. In addition to rails 61 and 62 (not shown), general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64a, second winning opening 64b, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) ) 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64a, the second winning opening 64b, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 64b, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37A and the second symbol display device 37B are configured to be able to operate (variate) at the same time, and the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time. The configuration is such that the player can be notified (variably displayed at the same time).

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As a jackpot type determined here, a 15R jackpot (big hit A) is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. .. Here, the "15R jackpot (big hit A)" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the open flat door of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and a game ball is reached to the second specific winning opening 650a. This is a jackpot in which the jackpot round that allows the player to enter the ball is executed up to 15 times.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, if it is determined that the pachinko machine is not a big hit in the big hit lottery conducted when the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b is won, it is determined to be a small hit. If it is determined to be a small hit, the type of small hit is determined. As the small hit type determined here, small hit A, small hit B and small hit C are set as small hits based on the entry into the first winning opening 64a. Further, a small hit D is set as a small hit based on a ball entering the second winning opening 64b. In the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, when the result of the lottery is a small hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a symbol corresponding to the small hit type is displayed.

Here, the "small hit A" is a small hit with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, and is a small hit in which the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened / closed at most twice. .. Similarly, "small hit B", "small hit C", and "small hit D" are small hits with a maximum number of rounds of 2, but each period during which the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened ( The time) is configured to be different. The details will be described later, but it is set so that whether or not the V winning switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 can win a prize differs depending on the type of small hit.

Specifically, in the small hit A to the small hit D, the switching member 65h rotates downward and the guide piece 65h2 rotates downward for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit game, and the special discharge port 65e2 The flow path to is open. Then, in "small hit A", the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed 2 times for 1 second x 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game, and in "small hit B", the opening / closing door is opened / closed 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game. 65f1 is opened and closed for 1 second x 2 times, and in "small hit C", the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and closed for 1 second x 2 times 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game. On the other hand, in the "small hit D", the opening and closing operation is performed twice for 1 second from the start of the small hit game (immediately after the start of the small hit game).

That is, in the small hit A to the small hit C, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, the switching member 65h has already moved to the normal discharge port 65e1. It has been switched to the state of guiding the ball (see FIG. 10B) (hereinafter referred to as the normal guidance state), and the game ball enters the first variable winning device 65 with small hits A to C. However, it is difficult to pass the game ball through the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, the small hits A to C are set as small hits that are disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the small hit D, since the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened from the start of the small hit game, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the V winning switch 65e3. As described above, the switching member 65h is operated at the same operation timing from the start of the small hit game regardless of the small hit type. On the other hand, since the opening timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be different depending on the small hit type, the small hit D which is advantageous to the player and the small hit A to C which are disadvantageous to the player Are set respectively. With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the operation control of the switching member 65h. Further, since the operation timing of the switching member 65h is constant regardless of the small hit type, the player can be expected to pass the game ball to the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, the small hit D is set to a small hit that is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, since it is possible to win the small hit D only for the second special symbol, the second winning opening 64b is an advantageous winning opening and the first winning opening 64a is disadvantageous for the player. It is set as a winning opening.

Here, in each small hit game, a display mode (display mode during the round) indicating that the small hit game is in progress is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small hit game. Specifically, the character "Right-handed !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is given a game in which the game ball is launched so that the game ball passes on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Will be notified. Then, the characters "Get a big hit with a V prize !!" are also displayed, and if the game ball can be passed through the V prize switch 65e3, a big hit game (a game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened (big hit A)). ) Is notified to the player that it will be started after this small hit game. The timing at which the display mode displayed during the small hit game is displayed is 3 seconds before the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened in each small hit game, and the game ball enters at the timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. It is the timing when the ball is possible. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the start of the small hit game is the timing when the display mode of the small hit game is started by the third symbol display device 81, and the small hit game is displayed in each small hit. Since the period from when the mode is displayed until the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened is constant at 3 seconds, it is difficult to recognize that the opening timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 differs depending on the small hit type. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the small hit type from being determined at the opening timing of the opening / closing door 65f1. Therefore, when the small hit game is started, it is possible to expect the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 regardless of the small hit type.

Further, in each small hit (small hits A to C), a fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 16) when the second special symbol is removed, which is set after the end of the small hit game, is set. Specifically, when the small hit game of "small hit A" is completed, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 1 (state A) is set (see FIG. 16B). When the small hit game of "small hit B" is completed, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 2 (state B) is set (see FIG. 16 (c)). When the small hit game of "small hit C" is completed, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 3 (state C) is set (see FIG. 16 (d)). The details of each fluctuation pattern table will be described later, but each fluctuation pattern table is configured so that the fluctuation time that can be easily selected is variable. Therefore, the fluctuation time (dynamic display time) selected in the second special symbol can be changed according to the small hit type of the first special symbol. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time, the second special symbol is stopped first, so that the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. If it is a small hit D, the small hit game of the small hit D is executed. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is stopped first, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol that is changing is a small hit D, it is forcibly stopped as a miss. Therefore, it can be said that an advantageous state of the player is set when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is easily selected to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Therefore, setting a variation pattern table in which a short variation time is easily selected according to the small hit type according to the first special symbol can set a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, by variably setting the fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to change the state advantageous to the player, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting not only the jackpot but also the type of the fluctuation pattern table.

In the present embodiment, it is configured so as not to shift to the high probability state or the time saving state (electric support state) after the end of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot is provided. May be good. Here, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of the game. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 64b. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, the time saving state (during the time saving) is a game in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 64b. It refers to the state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 64b1 is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 64b as compared with the case where the electric accessory 64b1 is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 64b, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 64b1 is opened more than during normal operation. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 64b1 is released at the time when the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 64b1 is opened per hit is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display and the second symbol variable display triggered by the passage of a ball of a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64a (starting winning), the first special symbol is changed on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the ball. Further, when the ball enters the second winning opening 65b (starting winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes the variation of the second special symbol with the trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, when the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively shown) in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of (referred to as a special symbol) is performed. As for the third symbol, a dedicated symbol is variedly displayed for each variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed at the same time.

Since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed, the first special symbol is always changed. Details of this configuration will be described later.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that the third symbol (○ ×) becomes the first special symbol. , Is displayed for each of the second special symbols. In addition, a fusion effect indicating whether or not the small hit D, which is advantageous to the player, has been won is displayed in a display area larger than the third symbol. Details will be described later, but when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit D, the display mode indicating whether or not the second special symbol stops before the first special symbol is that of the rabbit and the turtle. The player is notified in a display mode imitating a competition. If the turtle beats the rabbit, it means that the small hit D is won.

In the present embodiment, the turtle is configured to win only when the small hit D is won, but the turtle is not limited to this, and the turtle is also executed when the small hits A to C by the first special symbol are executed. As a configuration in which the winning effect may be executed, the player may be given the pleasure of being able to insert the game ball into the V winning switch 67e3 by the subsequent small hit game. Further, the competition result between the rabbit and the turtle is not displayed at the time of winning the small hit, and the winning of the turtle may be confirmed by the game ball entering the V winning switch 65e3. With this configuration, the player can enjoy the small hit game more.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the third symbol has a first display area Ds1 in which the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and is on the right. A second display area Ds2 in which the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed is set below. In both the first display area Ds1 and the second display area, the symbols of "○ ×" are displayed in two columns in parallel, and when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, "○○" is displayed. In the case of a small hit, "○ ×" is displayed, and in the case of a miss, "XX" is displayed. During the variable display, the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol in each column are displayed alternately at high speed.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the fusion effect, character symbols, characters, and the like are displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Will be done. If the game is not played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as a model name of the pachinko machine 10 or a digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

The second symbol display device (not shown) has a “○” symbol and “×” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The symbol of "" is alternately lit for a predetermined time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled at a position above the first winning opening 64a in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and all the game balls that enter the first winning opening 64a. Is normally configured to enter the ball after passing through the symbol start port (through gate) 67. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not reserved. Therefore, only when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, the winning lottery of the second symbol is performed and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started. To.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of balls at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 0, and may be set to 1 or more (for example, 4). Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the lower part of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

A first winning opening 64a in which a ball can win is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 and at a position below the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64a, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. (See FIG. 11), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64a, a second winning opening 64b in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 64b, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. (See FIG. 11), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

As shown in FIG. 2, the second winning opening 64b is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64a. The second winning opening 64b passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the game ball that has not won the first winning opening 64a can enter a position or the game passing through the right side of the variable display unit 80. It is arranged in a position where the ball can enter. Further, above the second winning opening 64b, an ordinary electric accessory 64b1 having a bow shape capable of closing the entry opening of the second winning opening 64b is arranged, and is always shown in FIG. As shown, it is arranged at a position that restricts (does not allow) the game ball from entering the second starting port 64a, and when it hits a normal symbol, it rotates counterclockwise by about 90 degrees and the second The normal electric accessory 64b1 guides the game ball to the winning opening 64b, and the game ball can enter the second winning opening 64b (hereinafter, referred to as an open state).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds or 1 second is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. After the fluctuation time, when the normal symbol hits, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is changed to the open state for 0.5 seconds. That is, the period during which the game ball can pass through the second winning opening 64b after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 is 0.5 seconds to 1 second after the game ball passes through the through gate 67. (When the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds) or 1 to 1.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 (when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second) In some cases. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to always enter the first winning opening 64a after that, and the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 and entered the first winning opening 64a. Since the period until it is detected by the detection switch (not shown) that detects the above is about 0.2 seconds, the game ball is moved to 64b at the second starting port after the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts. The period during which the ball can be entered is the period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the game ball enters the first winning opening 64a (when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds). ), The period is from 0.8 seconds to 1.3 seconds. That is, the timing at which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started is the period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, or from 0.8 seconds to 1.3 seconds. There are two types of periods until the latter. Therefore, the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol is configured 1.3 seconds after the fluctuation start of the first special symbol, even at the latest timing.

In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit (in the present embodiment, in the lottery at the start of fluctuation, all the lottery results other than the big hit are small hits), the fluctuation of the shortest fluctuation time Even if it is a pattern, it is 5 seconds, and it is configured so that the first special symbol is always changing at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery at the start of the change of the second special symbol is also a small hit except for the big hit, and the lottery result is a small hit for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. At the same time, it is easily variable. However, if they are fluctuating at the same time, the small hit of the special symbol that has stopped fluctuating first is executed, and one of the special symbols is forcibly stopped by the determination result of the deviation. Therefore, when the second special symbol becomes a small hit, the small hit D is always executed, which is advantageous for the player, but the remaining fluctuation of the first special symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. If the time is shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol, the lottery small hit D is forcibly stopped as a loss, which is advantageous for the player. It is configured so that the hit D is not executed.

Further, since the reserved balls are not stored in the first winning opening 64a (first special symbol) and the second starting opening 64 (second special symbol), the game is continuously played in the second winning opening 64b. Even if two balls enter, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second special symbol fluctuates independently.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b is also one of the winning openings in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64a and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 64b are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64a and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 64b are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64a. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 64b may be configured as five.

The probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a small hit are the same when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a and when the ball wins the second winning opening 64b (see FIG. 14B). However, the small hit type selected in the case of a small hit is that the first variable winning device 65 is selected when the ball wins the second winning opening 64b than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a. The small hit D, which is easy for the game ball to pass through, is selected for the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to make a small hit at the second winning opening 64b.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the second winning opening 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a small hit is determined by a big hit lottery performed due to winning a prize in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b, the variation time selected based on the determination result is used. When the fluctuation of the special symbol is started and the stop display is performed before the other special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on and the small hit is displayed so as to be the stop symbol of the small hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of a small hit is indicated. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (small hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened twice with an opening time of 1 second at the opening timing according to the small hit type already described above.

A second variable winning device 650 is provided above the first variable winning device 65. Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a, and a large opening solenoid (opening / closing solenoid) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The second specific winning opening 650a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, and the tilted opening / closing plate receives the game ball flowing down the front of the game board, so that the ball is the second specified winning opening 650a. It temporarily forms an open state that makes it easy to win a prize, and operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normally closed state.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is won after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the second variable winning device 65 is opened by the jackpot game. This open state is continued until 10 game balls win a prize in the second specific winning opening 650a or 30 seconds have passed, and then the closed state is established. This operation is set as one round, and after being repeated up to 15 rounds, the jackpot game ends. Further, as will be described in detail later, a big hit also occurs when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 650 described above. After that, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state (special game state) in which the ball is easy to win.

The jackpot game state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64a or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64a, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 in front view, and is shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
The details of the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 8, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b, and is first variable. A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13 and a base member 65c arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to light an LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Opening and closing for opening and closing the LED substrate 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, the back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with the base member 65c, and the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. An opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h that projects to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back cover thereof. A flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing to the back cover body 65j with screws. It is composed of.

FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. 9 (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 9 (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 9B, the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 9B. The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 10B.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13). With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the second winning opening 64b side. It is configured to be guided.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

9 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 9 (b). As shown in FIG. 9A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 10, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 10A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 10A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. .. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by the V winning switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged as an out ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. To.

In the present embodiment, in the small hits A to D (all small hits), the guide piece 65h2 is switched to the open state shown in FIG. 10A for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit game. On the other hand, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game in the small hits A to C, and at that time, the guide piece 65h2 is switched to the closed state, so that a specific prize is given. The game ball winning in the mouth 65a cannot be guided to the specific discharge port 65e2. That is, it is set to be impossible (difficult) to win the V winning switch 65e3.

On the other hand, in the small hit D, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for 1 second from the start of the small hit game, and then closed for 0.2 seconds, and then the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened again for 1 second. As a result, when the game ball enters the specific entry port 65a in the open state in the small hit D, the guide piece 65h2 is set to the open state, so that the guide piece 65h2 causes the game ball to enter the special discharge port 65e2. Is guided to win the V winning switch 65e3. As a result, after the small hit D, the start of the big hit game is executed.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball passes through the above-mentioned V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit game (small hit D), so that the big hit game is performed after the small hit game. Is started. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is set as a winning opening to which a jackpot game is given. The probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is 1/400, but the probability of winning a small hit is as high as 399/400. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the big hit game will be given by winning the small hit D, rather than the big hit being given by the lottery of the special symbol.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 10 (b). In the small hits A to D in the present embodiment, the closed state shown in FIG. 10B is changed after 2 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game. FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state (closed state) in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the V prize switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player is given a prize ball (for one ball winning in the present embodiment). 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give a jackpot game state by configuring the game ball after the detection to be able to sort whether or not to pass through the V winning switch 65e3. it can. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the jackpot game state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

In the present embodiment, a jackpot is given based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65 described above. As a result, even if the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot, the player plays the game in the small hit game with the expectation that the game ball will pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like can be used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 44). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol execution area 203a corresponding to a prize in the first winning opening 64a consisting of one execution area and a second special symbol execution area 203b corresponding to a winning in the second winning opening 64b, respectively. Each of these areas is provided with a random number counter C1 per first, a type counter C2 per first, and a stop type selection counter according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. The values of C3 and the small hit type counter C4 are stored respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal drawing execution area 203c composed of one execution area, and in each of these areas, the timing when the ball passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side is matched. Then, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is stored.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches a maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 44).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. Is stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the jackpot random number table (see FIG. 14A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the first hit random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 14A. The jackpot random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, it is determined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "399". If it is "399", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is any of "0 to 398", and if it is any of "0 to 398", it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, a small hit of the special symbol. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol (when the stop symbol is stopped before one of the special symbols).

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is that of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol execution area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, when the probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is low, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "399" is as described above. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/400".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 198. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 198", the jackpot type is "15R jackpot (big hit A)". In the present embodiment, the type of jackpot is one type, but the type is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more player. You can expect it.

The small hit type counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 198. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14D). ~ D) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (d).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 44) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table (see FIGS. 15 (c) and 16) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the main control device 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

A plurality of fluctuation pattern tables (see FIGS. 15C and 16) are set in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. In this fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of dedicated fluctuation pattern tables are set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern table is set for each of the winning / failing determination results. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15 (c) and 16.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reaches the maximum value (that is, 100), and then returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal map execution area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table 202b (see FIG. 14B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the random number counter C4 per second. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the random number table 202b per normal figure, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol).

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), the counter returns to 0. When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal map fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 and the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 15 (b).

FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the above-mentioned random number table 202b per normal diagram. In this random number table 202b per ordinary symbol, there are 10 random number values that can be hit by the ordinary symbol at a low probability of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "0 to 9". These random number values are stored in the random number table 202b per figure. Since the total number of winning random values is 10 while the total number of random values is 100 in this way, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the sphere passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 0.5 seconds or 1 second on the second symbol display device 83. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 64b is opened only for "0.5 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the playability is not impaired.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 339), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 44).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 44) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 43) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 42) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the jackpot random number table 202a, the normal figure hit random number table 202b, and the jackpot type table 202c already described above, the small hit type selection table 202d, the state transition table 202e, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g , Small hit scenario table 202h, big hit scenario table 202i, and other data table 202z are set respectively.

The small hit type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (d). This small hit type selection table 202d is selected based on the small hit type selection counter C4 that has acquired the small hit type to be executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. It is a selection table of. The small hit type selection counter C4 is a random number value that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is acquired based on the fact that the game ball enters the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. It is a numerical value. FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202d. In the small hit type selection table 202d, a dedicated small hit type is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the first special symbol, three types of small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C are set. In the small hit A, "0 to 179" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4, and in the small hit B, "180 to 195" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4. As for the small hit C, "196 to 198" is set as a determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit D, and the small hit D is always set for the small hit of the second special symbol. It is configured to.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is switched by executing the small hits A to D. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (d), when the small hit A is executed, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)) is set as the state A. When the small hit B is executed, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table 2 (see FIG. 16C) is set as the state B, and when the small hit C and the small hit D are executed, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table 2 (see FIG. 16C) is set. As the state C, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table 3 (see FIG. 16D) is set. As will be described later, when the states B and C are set, the special symbol of the number of transitions set in the state transition table 202e (see FIG. 15A) is changed when the special symbol is changed. The state A is configured to be set. That is, after the small hit B, small hit C, and small hit D are executed, each fluctuation pattern table is selected only during the set number of transitions, and then the fluctuation pattern table of the state A is switched to. It is configured as follows. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table set in the state A is set as the fluctuation pattern table in the normal state.

FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state transition table 202e. As described above, the state transition table 202e is a data table in which the periods in which the states A to C are set are set. In the state A, an infinite number of times is set. That is, the state A is set until any of the small hits B to D is executed. In the state B, 40 state transition times are set. When the small hit B is executed and the state B is set, the state B is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 40 times, and then the state B is set. A is set. In the state C, the number of state transitions of 30 times is set. When the small hit C or small hit D is executed and the state C is set, the state C is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) becomes 30 times. After that, the state A is set. In the present embodiment, the state is changed to the state A after the number of state transitions has elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the state may be changed to another state. For example, it may be configured to shift from state C to state B and then to state A. Further, in the state C, the small hit C and the small hit D have the same number of state transitions, but the number of transitions may be different between the small hit C and the small hit D. Further, when the small hit D is executed, it may be configured to set a state other than the state C. In addition, although the small hit type of the second special symbol is set to one type, two types are set, and one is set to have a finite number of transitions (for example, 30 times) and the other has an infinite number of transitions. As described above, the variable pattern table that makes it easy to win the next small hit D can be continuously set, and the state in which the next big hit game is easily given to the player and the state in which it is difficult to give the next big hit game can be sorted.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 (c) and 16. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, a fluctuation pattern table that is exclusively selected for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set. FIG. 15C shows a hit variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. It is a schematic diagram which showed the contents of the selection table 202f. In the hit variation pattern selection table 202f, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern A (variation time 0.5 seconds), the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern B (variation time 3 seconds), and the special figure 1 The jackpot fluctuation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is set respectively. “0 to 50” is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern A, and “0 to 50” is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern B. "51 to 100" is set, and "101 to 198" is set as a determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern C. In this way, when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern C composed of the fluctuation time of 4 seconds is most likely to be selected, and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern A, the special figure. 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern B is set with substantially the same selection ratio. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, if one of the fluctuations stops first, the other fluctuation is forcibly rewritten as a lottery result. It is forcibly stopped even in the middle of the fluctuation time. Therefore, even if the fluctuation of the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, if the fluctuation of the small hit of the first special symbol is stopped first, the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the jackpot will be the result of the lottery. It is conceivable that the jackpot will be invalidated due to being rewritten and forcibly stopped and displayed. However, as will be described later, since the shortest fluctuation time for the small hit of the second special symbol is 4 seconds, the fluctuation of the second special symbol of the small hit that always starts to fluctuate after the first special symbol stops first. It is a configuration that does not have to be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the fluctuation drawn by the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes invalid.

On the other hand, as the fluctuation pattern that becomes the jackpot of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern D (variation time 0.5 seconds) is set. In the present embodiment, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and when the jackpot is determined by the second special symbol, the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern D is always selected. It is configured. Since the fluctuation time of this special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern D is composed of 0.5 seconds, it is set to a fluctuation time that always stops earlier than the fluctuation of the first special symbol which is a small hit. When the big hit is determined by the special symbol, the fluctuation that becomes the small hit of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first, and the problem that the fluctuation that becomes the big hit of the second special symbol becomes invalid can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16A, when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a small hit, the special figure 1 small for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. The hit variation pattern selection table 202f will be described. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern selection table 202f. In the present embodiment, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit, that is, if it is a miss, it is determined that all the hits are small hits.

As shown in FIG. 16A, in the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B are selected as the types of fluctuation patterns. (Variation time 7 seconds), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 10 seconds) are set. .. “0 to 99” is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A, and as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B. "100 to 149" is set, and "150 to 179" is set as a determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C, and for the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D. Is set to "180 to 190" as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and "191 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Has been done. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A having the shortest fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set to be selected with the highest probability of 100/199. It is configured to. Therefore, when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit, a short fluctuation time is easily selected. Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B having a fluctuation time of 7 seconds has a probability of 50/199, and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds has a probability of 30/199 and a fluctuation time of 15 seconds. The fluctuation pattern D is configured to be selected with a probability of 11/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E having a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is configured to be selected with a probability of 8/199.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the second special symbol fluctuates as the longer fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol stops first. Therefore, it is configured to be advantageous to the player by executing the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the probability of being selected is set lower as the fluctuation pattern of the longer fluctuation time is set, so that the disadvantage on the amusement store side can be suppressed and the gambling becomes too high. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables for the second special symbol, which will be described later, are provided, and the probability (ratio) of selecting each variation pattern is set to be different in each table. Since the switching of the variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol is made to be switched according to the small hit type of the first special symbol, even if it is a small hit of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player, By switching the variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol to the variation pattern selection table in which the variation pattern of the short variation time is easily selected, it is possible to set the gaming state which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the game state that is advantageous to the player (the game state in which the small hit of the second special symbol is easily executed) and the game state that is disadvantageous to the player (the game state in which the small hit of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) are the first. 2 There is an effect that it can be performed by switching the variation pattern selection table of the special symbol.

With reference to FIGS. 16 (b) to 16 (d), the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection tables 1 to 3 for selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit will be described. To do. FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1. The special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1 is a table that is set when the state A is set. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the states A to C are selected and set. In these states A to C, when the small hit of the first special symbol is executed, the state corresponding to the small hit type is set (see FIG. 14 (d)). When the states B and C are set, the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner (lottery count) reaches a predetermined predetermined number of times, or is newly set. It is continuously set until it is set to a different state by the small hit of the first special symbol. When the specified number of times is reached, the state shifts to A and is set. Therefore, the state A is a state set at the normal time (including the case where the power is turned on after being initialized). As described above, the specified number of times of the state B and the state C is set by the state transition table 202e shown in FIG. 15A, and in the state B, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set. 40 times, in the state C, 30 times is set as the specified number of times as the total number of fluctuations.

Details will be described later, but when the state B is set, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 is set, and when the state C is set, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3 is set. Are set respectively. The probability that a short fluctuation pattern is selected is set higher in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2 than in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 1, and it is set higher than in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2. In the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3, the probability that a short variation pattern is selected is set high. That is, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3 is a variation pattern selection table in which the gaming state that is most advantageous for the player is set, and the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 is next. The variation pattern selection table 1 which is advantageous to the player and is most disadvantageous to the player in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table becomes the variation pattern selection table.

As shown in FIGS. 16 (b) to 16 (d), in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds). ), Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds), special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds), special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) are special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table. It is set to 1 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 16B, in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 1, “0” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F, and the special figure 2 “1 to 7” is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the fluctuation pattern G, and “8 to 27” is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern H. As a judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I, "28 to 47" is set as a judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J. 48 to 198 "is set. The probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F having the shortest fluctuation time is selected is 1/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G having the next shortest fluctuation time is selected is 7/199. The probability that a short fluctuation time is selected is set low. On the other hand, the probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation patterns H to J, which are fluctuation patterns having a relatively long fluctuation time, is selected is set higher than that of other fluctuation pattern selection tables. Therefore, in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1, the probability that a short variation pattern is selected is set low, and the variation pattern selection table (game state disadvantageous to the player) is set to be disadvantageous to the player. ing.

Next, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (c). FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2. The special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 is a variation pattern selection table that is set when the above-mentioned state B is set. Since it differs from the above-mentioned special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16B) only in that the selection rate of each variation pattern is different, only the selection rate will be described.

As shown in FIG. 16 (c), in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2, "0 to 2" is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F. FIG. 2 “3 to 17” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the variation pattern G, and “18 to 47” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H. It is set, and "48 to 97" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I, and is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J. "98 to 198" is set. The probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F having the shortest fluctuation time is selected is 3/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G having the next shortest fluctuation time is selected is 15/199. Therefore, as compared with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16B), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F is set with a selection probability three times, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G is about 2. It is set with a double selection probability. Therefore, since there is a high probability that a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected, it becomes easier to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops before the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is advantageous to the player. The small hit of the second special symbol is set so that it can be easily executed.

Next, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (d). FIG. 16D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3. Special figure 2 The small hit variation pattern selection table 3 is a variation pattern selection table that is set when the above-mentioned state C is set. The selection ratio of each variation pattern is different from the above-mentioned special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)) and special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 (see FIG. 16 (c)). Since they differ only in different points, only the selection ratio will be described.

As shown in FIG. 16 (d), in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 3, “0 to 7” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F. FIG. 2 “8 to 48” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the variation pattern G, and “49 to 98” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H. It is set, and "99 to 198" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I, and the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J. It is configured so that it is not set, that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J is not selected. The probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F having the shortest fluctuation time is selected is 8/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G having the next shortest fluctuation time is selected is 41/199. Therefore, as compared with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16B), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F is set with an eight-fold selection probability, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G has about 6 times. It is set with a double selection probability. Therefore, since there is a high probability that a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected, it becomes easier to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops before the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is advantageous to the player. The small hit of the second special symbol is set so that it can be easily executed. Further, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 3 is configured so that the special figure 2 variation pattern J is not selected.

Here, in the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern J (19 seconds), as already explained with reference to FIG. 18, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 0.5 seconds. Only when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (selection probability 8/199) in which is 20 seconds is selected, the second special symbol can be stopped first, and the probability that the second special symbol stops first is high. It is set extremely low. Therefore, in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3, since the special figure 2 variation pattern J is configured not to be selected, it is set more advantageously for the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability that the variation time of the second special symbol is selected is changed so as to switch between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state for the player. Here, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the variation of the second special symbol is stopped first by the combination of the variation pattern of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the second special symbol (special diagram 2). The combination of fluctuation patterns to be performed will be described. FIG. 17 is a quick reference table showing a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the second special symbol stops first, and FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing the stop timing of each fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. is there.

First, with reference to FIG. 18, a case where the variable display period of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may overlap will be described. In the present embodiment, when the change of the second special symbol is started, the first special symbol is configured to be changed without fail. The game ball that wins the first winning opening 64a, which triggers the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, passes through the through gate 67 about 0.2 seconds before entering the first winning opening 64a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts 0.2 seconds before the ball enters the first winning opening 64a (special figure 1 winning). The variation patterns selected for the determination result of the small hit of the first special symbol are the special figure 1 variation pattern A (abbreviated as “A”) and the special figure 1 variation pattern B (abbreviated as “B”). ), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (abbreviated as "C"), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (abbreviated as "D"), Special Figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (shown as "E") There are five types (omitted), and each fluctuation period is shown in FIG. 18A with a timing chart.

Two types of fluctuation time of the normal symbol are set, 0.5 seconds and 1 second, and the time chart of each fluctuation period of the second special symbol when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds is displayed. FIG. 18 (b) shows a time chart of each fluctuation period of the second special symbol when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second.

As shown in FIG. 18B, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends 0.3 seconds after the first special symbol starts the fluctuation. In the case of hitting a normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the game ball can enter the second winning opening 64b is set for 0.5 seconds. .. That is, the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol is a period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the fluctuation start of the first special symbol. In FIG. 18B, as an example in which the second special symbol starts to fluctuate earliest, the timing when the second winning opening 64b is won 0.3 seconds after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and starts to fluctuate. The chart is shown. As shown in FIG. 18B, the fluctuation patterns when it is determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol are the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (abbreviated as “F”) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G. (Abbreviated as "G"), Special Figure 2 fluctuation pattern H (abbreviated as "H"), Special Figure 2 fluctuation pattern I (abbreviated as "I"), Special Figure 2 fluctuation pattern There are five types of J (abbreviated as "J"), and the fluctuation end timing is shown for each fluctuation pattern.

In the case of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), even if the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) having the shortest fluctuation time of the first special symbol is executed, the feature is specified. FIG. 1 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern F of the special figure 2 ends 0.7 seconds earlier than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern A ends. As a result, regardless of which variation pattern is executed in the first special symbol, the special diagram 2 variation pattern F ends first, and the small hit of the second special symbol is executed (see FIG. 17 (a)). ). Further, the variable period of the second special symbol is 0.5 seconds from the timing shown in FIG. 18B, but even if the fluctuation starts 0.5 seconds after the latest, the fluctuation pattern A is larger than that of the special figure 1. The fluctuation pattern F of the special figure 2 stops 0.2 seconds earlier. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, and when the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern F is selected, the fluctuation of the second special symbol always stops earlier than the first special symbol, and the second special symbol A small hit in favor of the player is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it advantageous for the player that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F is executed with the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being 0.5 seconds.

Similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, the fluctuation pattern that stops first with respect to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E. Become. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, the variation pattern stops first with respect to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, the fluctuation pattern stops first with respect to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, the fluctuation pattern stops first only with respect to the fluctuation pattern E in the special figure 1. As described above, the state shown in FIG. 17A does not change even if the ball is entered into the second winning opening 64b at the late arrival timing (0.5 seconds later). Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal figure is 0.5 seconds, if the ball is entered during the opening period when the normal electric accessory 64b1 is in the open state, the player is not disadvantaged by the timing of entering the ball. Has been done.

Next, a case where the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (c). When the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened 1.3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 18A (judgment result of the normal symbol). If is a hit). Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the period from 1.3 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the period during which the second winning opening 64b can be won. .. In FIG. 18C, the second winning opening 64b is 1.3 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the timing at which the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts earliest when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second. The timing chart of the small hit fluctuation pattern of each second special symbol when winning a prize is shown.

As shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the case of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) having the shortest fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Even when is executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F ends 0.3 seconds later than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A ends. As a result, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A will stop fluctuating first, and at that timing, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F will be rewritten to be out of alignment and will be forcibly stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17B, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F ends earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E, and the small hit of the second special symbol Is executed. The variable period of the second special symbol is 0.5 seconds from the timing shown in FIG. 18 (c), but even if the fluctuation starts 0.5 seconds after the latest, each of the above-mentioned first special symbols The relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the stop timing is invariant. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, if the special figure 1 fluctuation patterns B to E are executed, it is advantageous for the player to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F. Become.

Similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17B, the fluctuation pattern stops first with respect to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17B, the fluctuation pattern stops first with respect to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17B, the fluctuation pattern stops first with respect to only the fluctuation pattern E in FIG. 1. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17B, it is a fluctuation pattern that cannot be stopped first for all the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the fluctuation pattern is such that the small hit of the first special symbol is always executed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a summary of the fluctuation stop timing when the small hit fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuates at the same time will be described. In FIG. 17A, when a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol having a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected after passing through the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened by the fluctuation, and the first 2 When the second special symbol can be stopped first by the combination of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern in the second special symbol when the winning opening 64b is won. Is a quick reference table indicated by "○" and "x" when the first special symbol is a combination that stops first (the second special symbol is a combination that cannot be stopped first).

When the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (abbreviated by the symbol "A") is selected in the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol) The second special symbol can be stopped first only when (omitted by the symbol "F") is selected. When the other special figure 2 fluctuation patterns G to J are selected, the first special symbol is stopped first, and the second special symbol is forcibly disengaged and forcibly stopped.

Similarly, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B (indicated by a symbol "B" for short) in the first special symbol, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G are in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C. In (abbreviated as "C" and symbolized), special figure 2 fluctuation patterns F to H, and in special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (abbreviated and indicated by "D"), special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F to In I, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (abbreviated as "E" and symbolized), special figure 2 fluctuation patterns F to J (that is, a fluctuation pattern that is a small hit of all the second special symbols and is the second special (The symbol can be stopped first), and the second special symbol can be stopped first. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation pattern E is selected in the first special symbol, it is most advantageous to the player, and by making the second winning opening 64b win, a small hit is executed in the second special symbol. (If the lottery result is a small hit). Although omitted in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variation pattern E is selected, a notification prompting the player to win a prize in the second winning opening 64b is displayed by voice or in the third symbol display device 81. , It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to win the second winning opening 64b by executing the notification with a lamp or the like.

FIG. 17B is a quick look showing a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the second special symbol is stopped first when 1 second is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol with respect to FIG. 17A. It is a display. As shown in FIG. 17B, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (abbreviated as “A”) in the first special symbol, for all the small hit fluctuation patterns of the second special symbol, The second special symbol does not stop first, and the small hit of the first special symbol is executed.

In the first special symbol, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern B (abbreviated as "B" and symbol) is the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (abbreviated as "C" and symbolized). ), The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern D (abbreviated as “D”), the special figure 2 fluctuation patterns F to H and the special figure 1 In the fluctuation pattern E (abbreviated as "E"), the special figure 2 fluctuation patterns F to I (that is, the second special symbol stops first in the fluctuation pattern that is a small hit of all the second special symbols). The second special symbol can be stopped first. Therefore, if 1 second is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the period during which the second winning opening 64b can be won is delayed, so that the second special symbol can be stopped earlier than the case of 0.5 seconds. There are fewer combinations, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the disadvantage and advantage of the player can be changed not only by the combination of the variation type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol but also by the variation pattern type of the normal symbol. When 0.5 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, the type of the fluctuation start sound of the normal symbol is changed, or an effect suggesting the fluctuation type of the Nunotsu symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This may be configured to suggest that the player is in an advantageous state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15 (b), the normal figure variation pattern table 202 g in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 13) of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern table 202g. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table 202g determines the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the normal symbol based on the acquired value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 when the game ball passes through the through gate 67. It is a selection table of. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation pattern A and the normal map variation pattern B are set as the variation patterns of the selected ordinary symbols, respectively. The normal map fluctuation pattern A is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Further, the normal map fluctuation pattern B is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 1000 ms (1 second). For the normal figure fluctuation pattern A, "0 to 29" is set as a judgment value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2, and for the normal figure fluctuation pattern B, "30 to 198" is set as a judgment value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2. Is set. As described above, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of 1 second is set to be easier to select than the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds.

Here, in the present embodiment, the advantages and disadvantages for the player differ depending on the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is detected by the detection switch in the first winning opening 64a 0.2 seconds later, and the variation of the first special symbol is started. Here, since the small hit D is easily executed by stopping the second special symbol earlier than the first special symbol, the second winning opening 64b is earlier than the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is more advantageous for the player to win the game ball. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to have a shorter fluctuation time of the normal map. In the present embodiment, since the normal map fluctuation pattern A (0.5 second fluctuation) is set to be more difficult to select than the normal map fluctuation pattern B (1 second), it is configured to suppress gambling.

In this embodiment, the normal map fluctuation pattern table is constant regardless of the game state, but the table is not limited to this, and is configured to be switched depending on when a small hit is executed or when a big hit game is executed. You may. With this configuration, it is possible to switch to a state advantageous to the player by switching to the normal map fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation time shorter than that in the normal time is easily selected.

The small hit scenario table 202h (see FIG. 13) is a data table for executing opening / closing control of the first variable winning device 65 when the small hit game is executed. The small hit scenario table 202h is set in each small hit scenario table corresponding to each small hit type. The pointers are set in chronological order, and the pointers are updated one by one with the passage of time. Each control of the first variable winning device 65 set by the pointer is executed. As a result, even if the opening control or the like is different for each small hit type, the control can be easily executed.

The jackpot scenario table 202i (see FIG. 13) will be described. The jackpot scenario table 202i is a scenario table set when the jackpot game is executed, and is a data table in which the control contents of the second variable winning device 650 are defined. Similar to the small hit scenario table 202i, the control contents of the second variable winning device 650 are defined for each pointer set in chronological order, and the pointer is updated one by one with the passage of time, and the updated pointer is used. Control is executed according to the specified control contents.

In the other data table 202z, various data, tables, and the like necessary for other games are set, but since the contents are known and have nothing to do with the contents of the present invention, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol execution area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal figure execution area 203c, a first winning counter 203d1, a second winning counter 203d2, a V winning flag 203e, and a jackpot. Flag 203f, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h, special figure 1 small hit flag 203i, special figure 2 small hit flag 203j, state counter 203k, state setting area 203m, and other memory area 203z. doing.

The first special symbol execution area 203a is composed of one execution area as shown in FIG. In the first special symbol execution area 203a, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a (starting winning), the first special symbol is stopped (variation ends), not during the small hit game or the big hit game. If this is the case, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C4, which are acquired based on the winning, are stored. .. After that, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 28, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes each process for starting the variation of the first special symbol.

The second special symbol execution area 203b differs from the first special symbol execution area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second winning opening 64b are stored, and the other configurations are different. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol execution area 203c has one execution area like the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second special symbol execution area 203b. In the normal map execution area 203c, the values of the second random number counter C4 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port 67, the normal symbol is not in the hit game, and the normal symbol is stopped (the change of the normal symbol is completed). ), The values of the second random number counter C4 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal figure execution area 203c.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal figure execution area 203c is the normal figure execution area. It is shifted (moved) to 203c, and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal figure execution area 203c. After that, the normal map fluctuation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2, and the normal map fluctuation is executed.

The first winning counter 203d1 enters the number of game balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 in one round (open state) in the small hit game (that is, the second variable winning device 650). The number of game balls that have been balled) and the second winning counter 203d2 are the number of game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the first variable winning device). It is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered 65). Specifically, the second winning counter 203d2 is added one by one based on the fact that the game ball passes through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 8) provided in the first variable winning device 65 and is detected by the detection switch. The first winning counter 203d1 is added and updated one by one based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection switch (not shown) provided in the second variable winning device 650. Will be done. On the other hand, the value of the first winning counter 203d1 determines whether the number of winnings (the value of the winning number counter 203j) in the first variable winning device 65 and the number discharged are the same when one round is completed. After that, it is reset to the initial value "0". Further, the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is reset to the initial value "0" based on the completion of one round. The value of the winning number counter 203d is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The jackpot flag 203e is a flag indicating that the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot. The jackpot flag 203e is configured to be able to identify whether it is a jackpot determination of the first special symbol or a jackpot determination of the second special symbol.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is a flag indicating that it is the timing to forcibly stop the first special symbol that is changing. The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is set to on when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit is stopped with respect to the second special symbol (see S913 in FIG. 39 and S941 in FIG. 40 (b)). .. On the other hand, it is set to off when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is on during the change of the first special symbol (S611 in FIG. 34). As a result, the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped at the timing when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol is stopped first.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is a flag indicating that it is the timing to forcibly stop the second special symbol that is changing. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to on when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit is stopped for the second special symbol (see S603 in FIG. 33 and S621 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is on during the change of the second special symbol, it is set to off (S931 in FIG. 40 (a)). As a result, the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped at the timing when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol is stopped first.

The state counter 203k is a counter for counting the specified number of times in the state B or the state C in which the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern 2 or the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern 3 is selected. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the small hit B or small hit C of the first special symbol and the small hit D of the second special symbol are won, the small hit fluctuation pattern table of the second special symbol thereafter is displayed. It was set to switch to the predetermined fluctuation pattern table a specified number of times. The specified number of times defines the number of times that the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate, and when the specified number of times is reached, the state A is entered and the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the state A is set. .. When the small hit of the first special symbol and the small hit of the second special symbol are completed, the state counter 203k is set to the corresponding state, and the value of the state counter corresponding to the set state is set. (S1807, S1809 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to fluctuate, they are subtracted and updated by 1 (S305 in FIG. 30 and S705 in FIG. 36).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a solenoid for opening and closing the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the second specified winning opening 650a to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 inputs and outputs. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including switch groups and sensor groups (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 42) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 20, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a fusion effect selection table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a data table in which variation pattern data for displaying variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection table 222a shows the variation display pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2 shown in FIG. 4 (a). Is stored. In this fluctuation display pattern, a pattern is set in which the “◯” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately switched and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation time determined by the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 20B, the fusion effect selection table 222b is composed of a winning fusion effect selection table 222b1, a losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, a preparing effect selection table 222b3, and a special effect selection table 222b4. This is a selection table for selecting the fusion effect to be displayed in the effect display area Ds3 of the display device 81. The winning fusion effect and the losing fusion effect are fusion effects displayed in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 during the period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time. Specifically, in the winning fusion effect, the display mode in which the rabbit and the turtle start the competition shown in FIG. 4 (b) is displayed, and the display mode in which the turtle shown in FIG. 5 (b) wins the rabbit in the competition is displayed. After that, it is composed of a blackout effect. The losing fusion production differs in that the rabbit wins against the winning fusion production. The victory of the turtle notifies that the second special symbol stops before the first special symbol and the small hit D of the second special symbol is executed. On the other hand, the victory of the rabbit indicates that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped first, and any of the small hits A to C of the first special symbol is executed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol always starts to fluctuate before the second special symbol (see FIG. 4A). Here, for the player, even if the first special symbol is stopped first and the small hit of the first special symbol is executed, the profit obtained for the player is a small amount of balls (prize balls) or the first. 2 The change pattern table of the special symbol is switched, which does not directly trigger the big hit, and is set to be disadvantageous compared to the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, the player is interested in the fact that the second special symbol starts to change.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the third symbol (the symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2) indicating the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is marked with "○". With the "x" display, the display area was further reduced and placed at the lower left and right edges of the display area so that it would not stand out. On the other hand, the effect display area Ds3 is set larger than the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2 so as to be conspicuous to the player. Therefore, the player mainly looks at the effect display area Ds3 and plays the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the variation of the second special symbol is started and the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the same time, the effect display area Ds3 shown in FIG. 4A is displayed. The rabbit and turtle race shown in FIG. 4 (b) is started from the state before the rabbit and turtle race (competition) is started. For the player, the message "If the turtle wins in the race, chance!" Is displayed at the top of the production display area Ds3, and the turtle wins, giving the player a chance to win a V prize, which is advantageous to the player. It is informed that it will be done. In the present embodiment, the small hit D of the second special symbol is executed, so that the small hit game in which the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is executed. When the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the player is given the right to start the big hit game after the small hit game, so that the player is given an advantageous state that the small hit D is executed. It will be done.

In the fusion effect, when the first special symbol stops first, the effect that the rabbit finishes before the turtle is executed (see FIG. 5 (a)), and when the second special symbol stops first. Is an effect in which the turtle finishes before the rabbit (see FIG. 5B). After that, after the first special symbol stops first and the fusion effect (see FIG. 5 (a)) in which the rabbit finishes before the turtle is displayed, "Sorry!" Shown in FIG. 6 (a)! "Normal chance!" Is displayed. When the display mode of this fusion effect is displayed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and stops (stops at the combination of "○ ×" indicating a small hit), and at that timing, the second special symbol changes. It is forcibly stopped by a symbol (stopped by the combination of "XX") indicating a deviation in the middle of the fluctuation time. Further, when the display mode of the fusion effect of FIG. 6A is displayed, the player is subsequently executed a small hit of the first special symbol, and has a chance of winning a V (that is, the right to execute the big hit game). There is no possibility of getting a ball), but you can recognize that you can get a ball in a small hit game. Therefore, the player prepares for a game in which the game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 650 by a game method (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed game) in which the game ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the fusion effect in which the turtle wins the race is displayed, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has elapsed, and the symbol indicating a small hit (“○ ×”) The stop display is performed at the combination stop symbol), and at that timing, the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating the deviation in the middle of the fluctuation time (the stop symbol of the combination of “XX”). After that, as shown in FIG. 6B, the characters "Congratulations !! V winning chance!" Are displayed, and after that, the player is notified that a small hit game with a possibility of V winning will be executed. To. Therefore, the player can play a right-handed game and prepare for a game aiming for a V prize. As described above, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, and the player can display the fusion effect although it is a complicated game. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a small hit game that is advantageous to the player is started based on the content of the fusion effect, and the game can be performed more easily.

The above-mentioned fusion effect in which the rabbit and turtle race is performed is executed when the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both small hits. If the lottery result of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol is a big hit, the variation display of the fusion effect is not started, and the character "big hit" is displayed at the timing when the variation time of the selected variation pattern has elapsed. Suddenly displayed. Further, if the second special symbol does not start to change during the change period of the first special symbol after the first special symbol changes (the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit), the change display of the fusion effect is not started. , A display mode indicating that the small hit game of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6A is started at the timing when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the fusion effect is not started until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate after the small hit fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, but the first special symbol is not limited to this. It may be configured to start the fluctuation of the fusion effect (the start of the rabbit and turtle race) at the timing when the fluctuation starts. In this case, at the timing when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the control for resetting the fusion effect is set based on the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol that stops fluctuating first. Further, in the present embodiment, the turtle is configured to execute the winning effect in the fusion effect only when the second special symbol stops first (the winning / failing determination result is a small hit), but the second is not limited to this. At the start of the change of the special symbol, the production lottery is executed with a predetermined probability, and based on the lottery result, it is decided whether the turtle wins or the rabbit wins. In this case, if the second special symbol is a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the second special symbol stops first (the winning / failing judgment result is a small hit), the execution probability of the fusion effect in which the turtle wins is set high, and the first special When the symbol is a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the symbol stops first (the result of winning / failing is a small hit), the execution probability of the fusion effect in which the rabbit wins is set high. Then, regardless of whether the rabbit wins or the turtle wins, the display modes of FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (b) are not displayed, and the characters "V winning chance" are displayed instead, and the V winning is won. Perform a production that makes the player think that there is a possibility of this in the small hit game after this. Here, if the rabbit wins, the possibility of V winning is low, and if the turtle wins, the possibility of V winning is high, so that the player is notified after that. Even during the small hit game, the game can be played with the expectation of V prize, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the above-described modification, the fusion effect is started from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, but the fusion effect may be started from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the fusion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is not limited to this. (For example, it is composed of three rows of symbols and the determination result is notified by the combination of the symbols) and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, it is composed of three rows of symbols and the combination of the symbols). The determination result) may be displayed in a variable manner, and the game may be performed with the expectation that the third symbol indicating the small hit will be displayed in the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be variablely displayed at the same time.

The preparatory effect selected from the preparatory effect selection table 222b3 is a display mode before the rabbit and the turtle shown in FIG. 4A start the competition. In this case, the preparatory effect is selected and displayed when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and when the variable display of only the first special symbol is started. ..

The special effect selection table 222b4 is a table in which a special effect is set, which is selected when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate before the first special symbol. In this special effect, the characters "abnormal fluctuation" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an error comment. As a result, it is possible to notify at an early stage that a normal prize or game has not been played.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (c). As shown in FIG. 20B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d, and a special figure 1. Stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f, effect counter 223g, slave state setting area 223h, special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time counter 223i, special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time counter 223j, fusion effect start flag 223k, etc. A memory area 223z is provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is a storage area for temporarily storing commands output from the main control device 110 and each control device to the voice lamp control device 113.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area corresponding to the first special symbol and one execution area corresponding to the second special symbol, and each of these areas includes the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Information such as a fluctuation pattern output from the main control device 110 when each of the second special symbols starts to fluctuate, a hit / fail determination result, and the like is stored.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command for the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2301 in FIG. 54), and the first special in the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display of the symbol is set (see S2602 in FIG. 57). When the variation start flag 223d of the special figure 1 is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern for the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variation effect is started so as to be performed.

The special figure 2 variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command for the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2401 in FIG. 55), and the second special in the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display of the symbol is set (see S2602 in FIG. 57). When the variation start flag 223d of the special figure 1 is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command. The display variation pattern command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as the above-described first special symbol variation pattern command.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the special figure 1 stop type command corresponding to the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2501 in FIG. 56), and the third symbol display. It is turned off when the stop type of the first special symbol in the device 81 is set (see S2611 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command. In the present embodiment, the display stop mode displayed in the first display area Ds1 is set.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when the special figure 2 stop type command corresponding to the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2501 in FIG. 56), and the third symbol display. It is turned off when the stop type of the second special symbol in the device 81 is set (see S2611 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command. In the present embodiment, the display stop mode displayed in the first display area Ds1 is set.

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The slave state setting area 223h is a storage area for storing the state information (any of the states A to A to C) set by the main control device 110. In the slave state setting area 223h, when a state command (S308 in FIG. 30, S708 in FIG. 36, S1808 in FIG. 49) output from the main control unit 110 is received, the state information indicated by the state command is stored. (S2210 in FIG. 53). With this configuration, the same state can be set in the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the state set in the main control device 110.

The special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is a counter for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received, the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is set as the residual fluctuation time indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command (see S2310 in FIG. 54). When the residual fluctuation time is set in the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i (special figure 1 residual fluctuation time> 0), the counter value corresponding to the elapsed time for each execution cycle of the main process (see FIG. 52) (see FIG. 52). In this embodiment, 1) is subtracted and updated (see S2702 in FIG. 58). Note that the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is set to 0 in the initial state.

The special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received, the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j determines the residual fluctuation time (value of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i) of the first special symbol being changed. When the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the selected second special symbol, the value of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is set to the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j. Set. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time of the selected second special symbol is shorter than the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time of the selected second special symbol is set in the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j. With this configuration, even when the small hit of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped, the accurate second special symbol can be used. The remaining fluctuation time can be set. The value of the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is used to determine the fluctuation time of the fusion effect when the fusion effect is selected. Also in this case, since the accurate residual fluctuation time at which the second special symbol fluctuates and stops is set in the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j, the fusion effect is stopped by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. It is possible to set a fusion effect of the variable time according to the timing of the operation.

The fusion effect start flag 223k is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the fusion effect. The fusion effect start flag 223k is set to ON when the special figure 2 variation pattern command for the second special symbol is received and the lottery result is a small hit (S2405 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the display fusion effect command indicating the display mode (fusion effect pattern) of the selected fusion effect is set, it is set to off (S2609 in FIG. 57). The fusion effect start flag 223k is a flag that is set to off in the initial setting such as when the power is turned on.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 81) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, each third symbol is variablely displayed and displayed in a variable manner based on the reception of the variable pattern command between the first special symbol and the second special symbol output from the main control device 110. The fusion effect is selected and executed according to the timing when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate and the period until the timing when the second special symbol stops fluctuating. As a result, the small hit of the present embodiment is drawn with a high probability (both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 398/399), and the small hit of the first special symbol is frequently executed. Even if there is, by displaying the fusion effect, the player can determine whether or not it is the timing to play the game with expectation, and the game can be played with sharpness. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the effect indicating that the small hit of the first special symbol is executed is frequently executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

In addition, the playability of the present embodiment is such that when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner in the lottery result of the small hit, the small hit of the special symbol that stops after the fluctuation time elapses first. Is executed. The small hit of the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous than the small hit of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped before the first special symbol, which is advantageous to the player. (A state in which a small hit of the second special symbol is executed) can be given. However, it is difficult to identify from the third symbol whether or not the change of the second special symbol is stopped first, and the interest of the game is lowered. In the present embodiment, the variation of the fusion effect is started at the timing when the variation of the second special symbol starts, and whether or not the variation of the second special symbol is stopped first is configured to be notified by a rabbit and turtle race. did. By doing so, the player simultaneously monitors the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and sees the fusion effect without determining the type of the special symbol to be stopped first. You can learn about the special symbols that stop first. Therefore, even if the game is complicated, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner with a simple effect.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by 1. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions constituting the control program can be read. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be enabled in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) executed after the boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 59) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 61 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b at power-on, the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64a is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 59).

An image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the first ball-entry port 64, the fluctuating image at power-on The image controller 237 is displayed from the MPU 231 so that the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed to. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball has entered the first winning opening 64a, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of the normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the through gate 67, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be performed more often, and the chance of winning the normal symbol will also increase. Therefore, since there are many chances that the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 64b, and the lottery of the special symbol can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit of the special symbol, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first winning opening 64a is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal pattern, and the ball becomes the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 64b, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even when the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit with a special pattern without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery will be a big hit of the special symbol, the player can perform the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that the jackpot will be a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot will definitely be a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or the back side A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 25). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. Is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. ..

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 26). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. The Null data meaning that is specified.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In addition, in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 26, in the example of FIG. 26). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 59) (see S2805 in FIG. 59). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 72 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3101 in FIG. 61B), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 61B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 61B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 61 (b) see S3109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 62 to 68) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 71) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 72 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is set for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 61 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 69) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 27) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 27, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 61 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4307 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 73). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 73). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4902 in FIG. 74).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 61 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S4902 of FIG. 74).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 50. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). The details of this special symbol variation processing (S104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

After executing the special symbol variation processing, the processing for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and the processing for passing the sphere at the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are executed. (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104) makes various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and displays the determined variation by predetermined control. In the embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control the variable display, or control the stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in the middle (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in the middle or the small hit is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display elapses, the processing of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Will be done. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), the second special symbol is variable-stopped with a symbol indicating a big hit (or small hit), and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol during the variable display is executed. When the second special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the variation display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, an extremely short fluctuation time is selected so as not to be forcibly stopped due to the fluctuation of the other. ing. As a result, it is possible to configure the jackpot determination so that it is not forcibly stopped and displayed as a lottery result that is out of order due to forced stop. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variation display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start processing is executed (S203). In the first special symbol change start process (S203), a process related to the start of change of the first special symbol is executed. The first special symbol change start processing (S203) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32.

After the first special symbol change start process (S203) or the second special symbol change stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is displaying the change (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed. , The process of stopping the variable display is executed with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variation display (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start processing is executed (S206). In the second special symbol change start process (S206), the process required to start the change of the second special symbol is executed. The second special symbol variation start processing (S206) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S203).

In the first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 30, S203), first, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64a (S301). If there is no winning in the first winning opening 64a (S301: No), this process ends as it is. If there is a prize in the first winning opening 64a (S301: Yes), then each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. (S302).

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S303). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303) will be described in detail later, but the game state is set based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. Based on, the determination of big hit, small hit, etc. is executed. The details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303) will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S304). In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), the variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. The process for selecting based on each counter value is executed. The details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304) will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

After the first symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), 1 is subtracted from the value of the state counter 203k (S305), and it is determined whether the value of the state counter 203k is larger than 0 (S306). If the value of the status counter 203k is larger than 0 (S306: Yes), this process ends as it is. If the value of the state counter 203k is 0 (S306: No), then the state A is set in the state setting area 203m (S307), the state command indicating the state A is set (S308), and then this process is performed. To finish.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the state counter 203k is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, and when the state counter 203k becomes 0, the state A which is the initial state (normal state) is set. Will be done. As a result, when the state B or the state C is set, the value of the state counter becomes 0, and the state A is automatically shifted to the state A and set. As a result, the state is changed according to the number of times the special symbol is changed, and the change pattern selection table for the small hit of the second special symbol is switched to give the player an advantageous state for a certain period of time with easy control. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, based on the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 14A), the lottery result is acquired depending on whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value (S402). Here, as shown in FIG. 14A, "399" is set as the big hit determination value with respect to the value of the first random number counter C1, and "0 to 398" is set as the small hit determination value. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, if it is not a big hit, it is determined that all are small hits.

It is determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S403), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S403: Yes), the big hit flag 203f is set on for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S404). , The special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is set as a jackpot (S405), and the jackpot of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the hit type counter. A symbol is set (S406), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit in the process of S403, that is, it is determined that it is a small hit (S403: No), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203i is set to ON (S407), and the special figure 1 The lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is set as a small hit (S408), the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and then this process is performed. finish.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 30, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S304), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is first acquired (S501), and then in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303), the first It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot flag is set to ON for the first special symbol (S502).

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S502: Yes), the jackpot fluctuation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S503). , S505. In the processing of S503, one of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation patterns A to C is selected based on the hit variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 15C) and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S502, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a jackpot (that is, the jackpot flag 203f for the first special symbol is off) (S502: No), the acquired variation type counter. A small hit variation pattern is selected from the set small hit variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 16A) based on the value of CS1 (S504), and then the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S505, a special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern is generated (S505), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 33, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the jackpot flag 203f is turned on for the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is determined whether or not it is set to (S602). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203f is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to ON (S603). Although not shown, when the process of S603 is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is turned on is set.

When the processing of S603 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (S605). After that, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S606). Then, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the jackpot flag 203f is set to off for the first special symbol (S602: No), the special figure 1 small hit stop process is executed (S610), and this process ends as it is. To do. In this special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610), a process related to the stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the small hit of the determination result is executed. The details of the special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is turned on. Determine (S608). If it is determined in the process of S608 that the variation stop flag 203g in FIG. 1 is off (S608: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S608 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203g is on (S608: Yes), it means that the second special symbol is stopped by a big hit or a small hit. 1 In order to stop the fluctuation based on the special symbol, the special figure 1 forced stop process is executed (S609). The details of this special figure 1 forced stop process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

In this way, in the first special symbol stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed (S601: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is used. The process of stopping the variation display (S603 to S609 or S612) is executed. Further, when the second special symbol is stopped fluctuating with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the fluctuation display is displayed. The process (S612) of forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. When the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) (S610: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol being displayed is interrupted (temporarily stopped). You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special figure 1 forced stop process (S609), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 33, S204), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 forced stop process (S609).

In the special figure 1 forced stop process (FIG. 34, S609), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203 g is set to off (S611), and then the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203 g is turned off. A stop command is set (S612). Then, the variation type of the first special symbol is set to out (S613), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped to change with the outlier symbol (S614), and the special symbol 1 confirmation command of the first special symbol is set. After setting (S615), this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is turned on (the timing at which the fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit in the second special symbol stops), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not yet set. Even if it has passed, it is forcibly stopped as a result of the judgment of disconnection. As a result, even if the lottery results are variablely displayed for the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, it is sufficient to execute a small hit or a big hit for only one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 33, S204), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610).

In the special figure 1 small hit stop process (FIG. 35, S610), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to on (S621), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is turned on. The fluctuation stop command is set (S622). Then, the small hit scenario corresponding to the selected small hit type is set (S623), the confirmation command of the first special symbol is set (S624), and the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set. After stopping (S625), this process ends.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIGS. 29, S104), will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. 36 to 38 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol change start processing (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 36, S206), the process for the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol in contrast to the above-mentioned first special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 30, S203). The only difference is that the processing for the second special symbol is changed to the first special symbol, and the same processing is executed for the other processing, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 36, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703).

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 37, S703) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303) in the following points. In the process of S801 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol execution area 203a is changed to the second special symbol execution area 203b, and in each process of S804 to S809 corresponding to each process of S404 to S409. , Special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to special figure 2 (second special symbol). Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 38, S704) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S304) in the following points. In the process of S902 corresponding to the process of S502, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S503 to S505. In each process of S903 to S905 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 29, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 33 and S204) in the following points. In the process of S912 corresponding to the process of S602, "for special figure 1" is changed to "for special figure 2", and in the process of S913 corresponding to the process of S603, special figure 2 The point that the fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag, the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the processing of S1914 corresponding to the processing of S604, and the point of S608. In the processing of S918 corresponding to the processing, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag, and in the processing of S917 corresponding to the processing of S607, the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol is the second. The point that the special symbol is changed to the variable stop, the point that the special figure 1 forced stop process is changed to the special figure 2 forced stop process in the process of S919 corresponding to the process of S609, and the point that corresponds to the process of S610 is 920. The difference is that the special figure 1 small hit stop process is changed to the special figure 2 small hit stop process in the above processing. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the special figure 2 forced stop process (see S919 and FIG. 40 (a) in FIG. 39) executed in the second special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 39) and the second special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 39) are also performed. Similarly, the special figure 2 small hit stop process (see S920 and FIG. 40 (b) in FIG. 39) executed in (see) also includes the above-mentioned special figure 1 forced stop process (see FIG. 34) and the special figure 1 small hit. Since the same process as the stop process (see FIG. 35) is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously variablely displayed. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display for a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display mounting unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S1001). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes from the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device (not shown) to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 632. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S1001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1001: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device is in variable display (S1002). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1011). ). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S1009, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device (not shown).

In the process of S1011, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1011: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1011 when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S1011: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1012). In the process of S1012, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1007, the "○" symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lit up). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the miss is set by the process of S1010, the second symbol display device (not shown) has an "x" symbol as the second symbol. It is set to be stopped (lit). When the stop display is set by the process of S1012, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S1007 and the process of S1009. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1013). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1013: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1014). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (S1013: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1002: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S1003). When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S1003: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 are stored in the normal figure execution area 203c, respectively. (S1004). The validity determination of the second random number value acquired based on the random number table 202b per normal figure is executed (S1005). It is determined whether the lottery result of S1005 is a win (S1006). When it is determined that the lottery result of S1005 is a win (S1006: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S1007). The opening time of the electric accessory 64b1 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1008). After that, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is selected based on the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S1004 and the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202 g (S1009). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1006, when it is determined that the second symbol is out of alignment, the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S1010), and then the process of S1009 is executed, and then this process is terminated.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1101) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 43), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1201). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1202). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1203).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1204), and if it is turned on (S1204: Yes), the process shifts to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1204: No), it is further determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205), and if it is not stored. (S1205: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1512 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1206), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1207: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1512 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S1212, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1212). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1213, S1514) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1213, S1214) is executed.

In addition, the initialization process (S1213, S1214) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1213, S1214), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1213), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1214). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1210.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1204: No), the power outage occurrence information is stored (S1205: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is stored. If it is normal (S1207: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1208). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1209), and the process proceeds to S1210. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1210). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1211). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (S1600) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). In this main process (see FIG. 44), the counter update process and the power off time process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 44), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1301).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303) and executed. The jackpot control process is executed (S1304). The jackpot control process (S1304) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45, but a process of setting the operation of the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot game process (S1304) is executed, the small hit control process (S1305) is executed. In this small hit control process (S1305), a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 in the small hit game is executed. This small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1306). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S1306), the opening / closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 64b1 is executed. After that, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S3607).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1308). Briefly, on condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the ordinary electric accessory 64b1 is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1309), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1309: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1309). ), If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S1309: Yes), the process is shifted to S1310, and each process after S1301 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1310: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1311). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1301 (S1312).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1301 to S1308 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1308, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1309: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 42 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1313 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1313), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1314). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1315), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1316), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1319 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1301 to S1308, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1311 and S1312 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1251. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is set in the initial setting process (S1201) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1301 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1304). This jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the second This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S1621). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1401: Yes), the pointer of the set jackpot scenario is updated (S1402). Here, in the jackpot scenario, the processes specified for the pointers that are updated in time series are set, and the processes required for the jackpot game are set in time series.

It is determined whether the data of the jackpot scenario indicated by the updated pointer is the timing indicating the start of the jackpot game (S1403). The jackpot start is data that is set when the pointer is first updated after the jackpot scenario is set. When it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (S1403: Yes), the opening command is set (S1404). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1403, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the start of the big hit (S1403: No), it is determined whether or not the data indicating that it is the start timing of a new round is set (S1405). When it is determined that the data indicating the start of a new round is set (S1405: Yes), the opening of the second variable winning device 650 is set (S1406). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1405 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1405: No), it is determined whether the data indicates the end timing of the round (S1407). When it is determined that the data indicates the end timing of the round (S1407: Yes), the closing of the second variable winning device 650 is set (S1408). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1407 that the data does not indicate the end timing of the round (S1407: No), it is determined whether the data indicates the ending timing (S1409). If it is determined that the data indicates the ending start timing (S1409: Yes), a display command indicating the ending display mode is set (S1410), and the set jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the data does not indicate the ending start timing (S1409: No), the first winning process is executed (S1412).

Here, with reference to FIG. 46, the first winning process (FIG. 46, S1412), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 45, S1304) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first winning process (S1412). In this first winning process (S1412), the winning balls of the second variable winning device 650 during the round are counted, and the corresponding control is executed.

In the first winning process (FIG. 46, S1412), first, it is determined whether the data of the jackpot scenario indicated by the pointer corresponds to the data during the round period (S1501). If it is determined that the round period is not in progress (S1501: No), the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1502). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round period is in progress (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second specific winning opening 650a (S1503). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second specific winning opening 650a (S1503: Yes), the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is added by 1 and updated (S1504). It is determined whether the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (10 balls in this embodiment) (S1505). When it is determined that the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is less than the upper limit value (S1505: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (S1505: Yes), the second variable winning device 650 is set to the closed state (S1506). The pointer of the jackpot scenario is updated to the position indicating the corresponding data at the end of the round (S1507), and then this process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the end condition of one round is 10 balls entered or until the opening period of 30 seconds elapses, but based on the determination that 10 balls have entered, the jackpot scenario By updating the pointer at the end of the round, the end of the round can be set immediately when 10 balls are won, and the process can be shifted to the subsequent processing related to the jackpot game.

Next, the small hit control process (S1305), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process (S1305). In the small hit control process (S1305), the opening control of the first variable winning device 65 in the small hit game is executed.

In the small hit control process (FIG. 47, S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit scenario is not set (S1601: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the small hit scenario is set (S1601: Yes), the pointer of the small hit scenario is updated by 1 (S1602). Here, the small hit scenario is set for each small hit type, and the processing related to the first variable winning device 65 executed in each small hit game is set in chronological order with respect to the pointer.

It is determined whether the data of the small hit scenario indicated by the updated pointer is the data corresponding to the start timing of the small hit game (S1603). When it is determined that the data corresponds to the start timing of the small hit game (S1603: Yes), an opening command indicating the start of the small hit game is set (S1604). After that, this process ends. In the present embodiment, the display mode shown in FIGS. 7 (a) to 7 (b) is displayed for the opening of the small hit game.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit game (S1603: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1605). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1605: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S1606). In this small hit operation setting process (1606), the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k (solenoid that operates the switching member 65h) of the first variable winning device 65 and the operation timing of the opening / closing door 65f are set respectively. The details of this small hit operation setting process (S1606) will be described with reference to FIG. 48.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit operation setting process (S1606), which is one of the small hit control processes (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the small hit operation setting process (S1656), first, the opening operation data of the first variable winning device 65 corresponding to the small hit type is read from the small hit scenario (S1701). As the opening operation data read here, the opening timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the operation timing of the flow path solenoid 65k are read, respectively.

The operation of the flow path solenoid 65k is set based on the opening operation data read in S1701 (S1702). The operation of the flow path solenoid 65k is set until the solenoid is turned on and off. The opening operation (opening timing) of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set (S1703). After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operations of the flow path solenoid and the opening / closing door 65f1 corresponding to the small hit type are set respectively. As a result, it is possible to easily switch between the opening operation that enables the ball to enter the V winning switch 65e3 and the opening operation that makes it difficult to enter the ball (impossible to enter the ball) to the V winning switch 65e3.

In the present embodiment, in the small hits A to D (all small hits), the guide piece 65h2 turns on the flow path solenoid 65k in the open state shown in FIG. 10A for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit game. It can be switched by. On the other hand, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game in the small hits A to C, and at that time, the guide piece 65h2 is switched to the closed state, so that a specific prize is given. The game ball winning in the mouth 65a cannot be guided to the specific discharge port 65e2. That is, it is set to be impossible (difficult) to win the V winning switch 65e3.

On the other hand, in the small hit D, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for 1 second from the start of the small hit game, then closed for 0.2 seconds (interval period between the next rounds), and then opened / closed again for 1 second. The door 65f1 is opened. As a result, when the game ball enters the specific entry port 65a in the open state in the small hit D, the guide piece 65h2 is set to the open state, so that the guide piece 65h2 causes the game ball to enter the special discharge port 65e2. Is guided to win the V winning switch 65e3. As a result, after the small hit D, the start of the big hit game is executed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 47. In the process of S1607, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the round (the opening period of 2 seconds has elapsed) (S1607). When it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the round (S1607: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set (S1608). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1607, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the round (S1607: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the ending (S1609). When it is determined that it is the ending timing (S1609: Yes), the small hit ending process is executed (S1610). The small hit ending process (S1610) will be described later with reference to FIG. 49, but at the end of the small hit game, the V winning switch 65e3 determines whether or not the game ball has passed during the small hit game and passes. If this is the case, control processing such as setting a jackpot game is executed.

A small hit ending process (S1610), which is one of the small hit control processes (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit ending process (S1610).

In the small hit ending process (FIG. 49, S1610), first, the small hit ending command is set (S1801). It is determined whether the V winning flag 203e is set to ON (S1802). Here, the V winning flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit game, and is a second prize executed in the small hit control process (S1305) described later. In the process (FIG. 50, S1611), when it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is on, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3, the V winning flag 203e is set to on. The flag.

If it is determined in the process of S1802 that the V winning flag 203e is on (S1802: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot A is set (S1803). The V winning flag 203e is set to off (S1804), and then the process of S1805 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is off (S1802: No), the process of S1805 is executed. In the process of S1805, the states (states A to C) corresponding to the small hit type executed this time are set in the state setting area 203m (S1805). The value of the status counter corresponding to the set status is set in the status counter 203k (S1806).

The state corresponding to the small hit type set here is set based on the small hit post-state set in the small hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14D). Further, the value of the state counter corresponding to each small hit is set based on the value of the number of state transitions set in the state transition table 202e (see FIG. 15A). After the execution of S1806, a state command corresponding to the set state is set (S1807).

In the present embodiment, when the small hit D of the second special symbol is executed, the most advantageous state C is set. Therefore, even after the small hit D is executed and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 and the big hit game is executed, the state C advantageous to the player is set, so that the small hit D is easily executed. , It is possible to raise the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. Further, even if the game ball cannot be passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the execution of the small hit D, the state C is set after the small hit D, so that the small hit D is expected to be executed again. Can be given to the player, and the player's motivation for the game can be suppressed from being significantly reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 47. In the process of S1609, if it is determined that it is not the ending timing, the second winning process is executed (S1611). After that, this process ends. The second winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG. 50, but the process relating to the entry of the game ball into the first variable winning device 65 is executed.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second winning process (S1661), which is one of the small hit control processes (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the second winning process (S1661), first, it is determined whether the data indicated by the pointer of the small hit scenario is in the round valid period (S1901). The term "valid period of the round" means that the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, the closing condition is satisfied and the door is closed, and the game ball entered in the first variable winning device 65 is discharged. This is the period including the brushing time. In the present embodiment, the ball brushing period is set to 2 seconds.

If it is determined in S1901 that the round is valid (S1901: Yes), the first winning counter 203d1 is reset to the initial value 0 (S1902). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first specific winning opening 65a (S1903). When it is determined that no game ball has entered the first specific winning opening 65a (S1903: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first specific entry port 65a (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the first winning counter 203d1 to update. It is determined whether or not the first winning counter 203d1 is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (10 balls in this embodiment) (S1905). When it is determined that the value of the first winning counter 203d1 is less than the upper limit value, the process of S1908 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first winning counter 203d1 is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (S1905: Yes), the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set to be closed (S1906). The pointer of the small hit scenario is updated to the position of the data indicating the end timing of the round (S1907). After that, the process of S1908 is executed.

In the process of S1908, it is determined whether the V winning flag 203e is on (S1908). When the V winning flag 203e is on (S1908: Yes), the game ball has already passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (the right to execute the big hit game has been acquired in the small hit game), so this process. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is off (S1908: No), it is determined whether the V winning switch 65e3 is on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (S1909). When it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is off (S1909: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is on (S1909: Yes), the V winning flag 203e is set to on (S1910), and the V winning command is set (S1911). After that, this process ends. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this V winning command, a notification mode indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is set. In the present embodiment, the character "V" of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the sound effect "Kyuin" is output, and the corresponding lamp is lit.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 58. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2117 (see FIG. 52) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 52, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 52 and S2114), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2117. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2117 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2003. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2117 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2117, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see FIGS. 52 and S2116). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2117 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S2008 via the processes of S2004 to S2006 This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

Note that the clearing process of S2009 is skipped because when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process (S2101: Yes) was executed (S2101). If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S2102 to S2110 determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111 and the variation display setting process of S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2101: Yes). S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, and the setting is used as a command for the display control device. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). After that, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After that, a fluctuation time measurement process for measuring the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed (S2111). The fluctuation time measurement process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, but a process of subtracting and updating the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the passage of time is performed. Execute.

When the process of S2111 is executed, the command determination process (S2112) that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2113. The details of this command determination process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

In the process of S2113, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is generated by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

When the processing of S2113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2112). This command determination process (S2112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. The details of the command determination process (S2112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 53, S2112), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control device 110 Further, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for variablely displaying the first special symbol, and is mainly a command for designating the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed in order to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (S2202). The special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 54, but the settings required for variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is executed.

Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 54, S2202), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. Extract (S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. From this fluctuation pattern type, the winning / failing judgment result (small hit or big hit) can be determined.

When the process of S2302 is executed, the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is determined (S2303). It is determined whether the lottery result indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is a small hit (S2304). It is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit of the first special symbol (S2304). If the lottery result is not a small hit, that is, a big hit (S2304: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2304: Yes), the fusion effect start flag 223k is set to ON (S2305). It is determined whether the second special symbol is stopped (S2306). When it is determined that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped (S2306: Yes), the preparation effect selection table in the fusion effect selection table 222b is based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the effect counter 223 g. The preparation-preparing effect is selected from 222b3 (S2307). After that, the process of S2310 is executed.

Here, in the configuration of this embodiment, the first special symbol always starts to fluctuate first. Therefore, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, it indicates that it is normal. Further, in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed, the variable display of the fusion effect is started. During the period in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol has started and the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped, the fusion effect before the start of the competition (before the start) shown in FIG. 4A is displayed. Here, in the preparation effect selection table 222b3 in the fusion effect selection table 222b, a plurality of types of fusion effects before the start of the competition as shown in FIG. 4A are set. A value of the effect counter 223 g is assigned to each of the fusion effects before the start of the plurality of competitions, and the corresponding fusion effect is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the fusion production before the competition starts, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored. It should be noted that this pre-competition fusion effect is configured, for example, in a display mode of 5 seconds, and is repeatedly set until a new fusion effect is set or a new display mode is set in the third symbol display device 81. To.

In the present embodiment, the fusion effect before the competition is configured to be selected by the value of the effect counter 223 g, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the fusion effect is selected according to the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol currently being changed. It may be configured as. With this configuration, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol can be recognized from the fusion effect before the race, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol that is advantageous to the player (in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0). It is possible to notify the player that the variation pattern of .5 seconds)) is selected. Furthermore, by switching the type of fusion effect selected according to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened and the game ball can enter the second winning opening 64b. It is possible to notify the person, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player stops firing and misses the winning opportunity to the second winning opening 64b.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S2306: No), the special effect selection table in the fusion effect selection table 222b is based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter. A special effect is set from 222b4 (S2308). An abnormal change command is set (S2309), and then the process of S2310 is executed.

Here, if the second special symbol is already changing at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, it is in an abnormal state in the configuration of the present embodiment. If the change of the second special symbol has already started when the change of the first special symbol starts, it is possible that the game ball that wins the first winning opening 64a is before winning the game ball (through gate 67 and the first winning opening). The game ball is stopped by a magnet or the like at the position between 64a) and the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 64b, or the game is played between the second winning opening 64b and the ordinary electric accessory 64b1. It is conceivable that the ball is pinched and the game ball enters the second winning opening 64b after a while. In this case, the special effect displayed in the effect display area Ds3 is an effect in which the characters "winning abnormality" are displayed. In addition, an alarm sound is output to notify the amusement store that an abnormality has occurred. In addition, a command indicating that the hall computer is abnormally changed (winning abnormality) is output from the external output terminal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from fluctuating before the first special symbol due to fraud or malfunction, or by displaying only the second special symbol in a variable manner, which causes a great disadvantage to the game store side. ..

In the process of S2310, the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time is set in the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (S2310). After that, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. After the process of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 54, S2202) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner. The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command mainly for notifying the success / failure determination result of the second special symbol and the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) is executed. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (S2401), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S2401). S2402). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIGS. 57, S2113) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When the process of S2402 is executed, the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined from the received fluctuation pattern command (S2403). It is determined whether the lottery result indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is a small hit (S2404). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2404: Yes), the fusion effect start flag 223k is set to ON (S2405). It is determined whether the first special symbol is changing (S2406). When it is determined that the first special symbol is changing (S2406: Yes), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time). It is determined whether the time is long (S2407). When it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (S2407: Yes), the first special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player stops first, and the first special symbol is small. Since the hit is executed, the losing fusion effect is selected from the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 of the fusion effect selection table 222b based on the remaining fluctuation time of Special Figure 1 and the effect counter 223 g (S2408).

In this losing fusion effect, the effect of starting the competition shown in FIG. 4 (b) is displayed, and the effect of winning the rabbit shown in FIG. 5 (a) is displayed in the effect display area Ds3 with the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol. It is a production to be executed. By displaying the effect that the turtle loses, the player can recognize that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first. In the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, a plurality of types of losing fusion effects are set corresponding to the values of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, the player can see various effects, and can suppress a problem that the player gets bored early or can predict the result before the result of the effect is displayed.

After that, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set in the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j as the residual fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special figure 2 residual fluctuation time) based on the residual fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (S2409). .. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2407, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (S2407: No), the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 and the value of the effect counter 223 g are set. Based on this, the winning fusion effect is selected and set from the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 of the fusion effect selection table 222b (S2410). The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set in the residual fluctuation time counter 223i of the special figure 1 (S2411). After that, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set in the residual fluctuation time counter 223j of the special figure 2 (S2412).

Here, when the second special symbol determined to be No in S2407 stops before the first special symbol, the small hit of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, as the fusion effect, the effect of starting the competition shown in FIG. 4 (b) is executed, and the winning fusion effect in which the turtle shown in FIG. 5 (b) wins as a result of the competition is selected in the second special symbol. Executed during the variable time. Further, in this winning fusion effect, a plurality of types of winning fusion effects are set in the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, various winning fusion effects can be selected, and a wide variety of effects can be provided to the player.

In each of the above-mentioned winning fusion effects, the winning effect is set corresponding to the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and in the losing fusion effect, the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts from the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Each effect period is set by subtracting the minimum possible period (the period until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate earliest). In the losing fusion effect, 3 seconds until the end is set on the blackout screen, and by adjusting the display period of the blackout according to the timing when the fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol starts, the residual fluctuation of the 1st special symbol It is set to suit the time.

Further, in the processing of S2406, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not changing (S2413), only the second special symbol starts to change, which is an abnormal state. Therefore, the fluctuation time and effect of the second special symbol A special effect is selected based on the value of the counter 223 g (S2413). An abnormal fluctuation command indicating that the fluctuation is abnormal is set (S2414). After that, the process of S2412 described above is executed to end this process.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), this process ends. When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on. (S2501). The stop type (big hit A, small hit A to D, miss, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2502). The extracted stop type is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is of the second special symbol. Each is identifiable as a stop type. After executing the process of S2502, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S2205: No), it is determined whether the state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209). ). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S2209: Yes), the state information (any of the states A to C) indicated by the state command is set in the subordinate state setting area 223h (S2210). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the status command has not been received in the process of S2209 (S2209: No), it is determined whether the V winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2211). When it is determined that the V winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S2211: Yes), a V winning effect indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is set (S2212). A display V prize effect command for instructing the V prize effect (the character "V" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81) is set (S2213). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2211, when it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S2214). When it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S2214: Yes), the special figure 1 confirmation command for display (when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received) or the special figure 2 for display A confirmation command (when a confirmation command in Special Figure 2 is received) is set (S2213). The special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i (when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received) or the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j (when the special figure 2 confirmation command is received) is reset to the initial value 0. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received in the processing of S2214 (S2214: No), the processing corresponding to the other commands is executed (S2217), and this End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the variation display setting process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2113). This variation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) is one process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A, small hits A to D), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is performed. Execute.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2601). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is off (S2601: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the process of S2604 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2601: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S2702).

Next, in the process of S2603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIGS. 53 and S2112) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Acquired from 223z, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S2603). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S2603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2604). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2604: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2607 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S2706). In the process of S2402 of the special figure 2 variation start process (FIG. 55, S2204), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is generated (S2606). Here, the variable display of “◯” and “×” displayed in the second display area Ds2 is set.

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S2606 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 54). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 has a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fusion effect start flag 223k is on (S2607). When it is determined that the fusion effect start flag 223k is on (S2607: Yes), it is the timing to set the fusion effect in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, so that the fusion effect start flag 223k is turned off. Is set to (S2608), and a display fusion effect command indicating the selected fusion effect is set (S2609). After that, the process of S2610 is executed.

In the process of S2610, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON (S2610). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f are not set on (that is, off) (S2610: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is on. The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is set to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2612). ). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the fluctuation time measurement process (S2111), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fluctuation time measurement process (S2111). In this fluctuation time measurement process (S2111), a process of subtracting the remaining fluctuation time of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the passage of time is executed.

It is determined whether or not the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223i in FIG. 1 is greater than 0 (S2701). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is larger than 0 (S2701: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is subtracted by 1 and updated (S2702). After that, the process of S2703 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time counter 223i is 0 (S2701: No), the process of S2703 is executed.

In the process of S2703, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is larger than 0 (S2703). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is larger than 0 (S2703: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is subtracted by 1 (S2704). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is 0 (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the residual fluctuation time of the second special symbol are subtracted and updated by about 1 ms corresponding to the counter value 1, so that the accurate first special symbol and second special symbol are updated. The remaining fluctuation time of the symbol can be measured.

In the configuration of the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection table at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is switched according to the small hit type of the first special symbol, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation of the small hit of the first special symbol is not limited to this. It may be configured to switch the pattern selection table. In this case, the variation time of the first special symbol can be set advantageously for the player by switching to the variation pattern selection table in which a long variation time is easily selected. Further, the present invention is not limited to the small hit of the first special symbol, and may be configured to execute a predetermined lottery (for example, each variation, a table switching lottery is executed with a predetermined probability). Further, the table for selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be switched by the small hit type of the first special symbol, or may be switched by the hit type of the normal symbol or the like. In this case, it is advantageous for the player to switch to a table in which a short fluctuation time of a normal symbol is easily selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reserved balls are not set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but a predetermined number (for example, 4 balls) of reserved balls are set for both or only one of them. You may. For example, by setting the holding ball of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol can be efficiently performed. Further, by setting the holding ball for the second special symbol, the second special symbol can be efficiently changed. When the reserved ball is set in the second special symbol, it is preferable that the opening period of the ordinary electric accessory 64b1 is set to the open state only once during the period when one game ball enters. With this configuration, there is no difference between the number of holdings of the first special symbol (number of winnings) and the number of holdings of the second special symbol (number of winnings), and it is possible to suppress a problem that only the second special symbol fluctuates.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 74. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 59, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2801), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2801) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2801 in FIG. 59) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) (S2905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2801) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 60, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2903 to S2905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2901. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2902 and S2902, the processes of S2903 to S2905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S2903 to S2905 may be executed without performing the processes S2901 and S2902. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 59. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2803, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2804, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 72 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 72 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 23 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61 (b)). The determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 61B) and the simple display setting process (see S3109 in FIG. 61B) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64a, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received via 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 23 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, which is easy. It is possible to perform various fluctuation effects. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2805, interrupt permission is set (S2806), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (a). FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (b). FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 27) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 61B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. Therefore, it is not the image at power-on shown in FIG. 23, but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S3102) is executed, and then the display setting process (S3103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

In the display setting process (S3103), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3102) or the like. Specificly specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S3104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3103) or the simple display setting process (S3109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S3105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S3106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3105), which are determined in the task process (S3104), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S3107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete off, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 23 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3109) is executed to display the image of S3104. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 62, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3201: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S3103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3202), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S3203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3205), the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S3205) will be described with reference to FIG. 63A. FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S3301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S3304), set both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag to off (S3305), and end this process.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 63), in the display setting process, the variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3301. The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the display data table, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the drawing content is transferred by the processing of S3302. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the data table buffer 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is preliminarily stored in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3303, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 62. In the processing of S3204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3206). If there is a display variable type command (S3206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3207), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3207) will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S3401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S3402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S3403), end this stop type command processing, and return to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S3104), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3403, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S3402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3208), and the jackpot-related command is determined. If there is a command (S3208: Yes), the jackpot-related command processing is executed (S3209), and the process returns to the processing of S3201.

Here, the details of the jackpot-related command processing (S3209) will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S3209). This jackpot-related command process (S3209) executes a process corresponding to a jackpot-related command (display opening command, display round number command, display ending command) received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the jackpot-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S3501), and if there is a display opening command (S3501: Yes), the opening command processing is executed. Then (S3502), the process proceeds to S3503.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S3502) will be described with reference to FIG. 65A. FIG. 65A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3605), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3501, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3501: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3503), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S3503: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (b). FIG. 65B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3705), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 64. In the processing of S3503, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3503: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3505), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S3505: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3506), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S3506) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3803). S3804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3805), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 62. In the processing of S3208, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S3208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3210), and the rear image is changed. If there is a command (S3210: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S3211), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S3211) will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (a). FIG. 67A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (see FIG. 73). S3901). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3902), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3901 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3902. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process (S3104), when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S3902 is specified. From, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3902, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 62. In the processing of S3210, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S3210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fusion effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3212), and the display is performed. If there is a fusion effect command for use (S3212: Yes), the fusion effect command process is executed (S3213), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the fusion effect command processing (S3213) will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (b). FIG. 67B is a flowchart showing the fusion effect command processing (S3213). This fusion effect command process (S3213) executes a process corresponding to the display fusion effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the fusion effect command processing (S3213), first, the fusion effect display data table is determined based on the display fusion effect command, the determined fusion effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is used. It is set to 233d (S4001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4002).

Then, based on the fusion effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4004). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S4005), the fusion effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this way, when the fusion effect command for display is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fusion effect command process (S3213) is executed, and the fusion effect (see FIGS. 4 to 7) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. To. As described above, in the present embodiment, when only the first special symbol is changing (the second special symbol is stopped), it is for display indicating the preparation effect (see FIG. 7A) as the fusion effect. The fusion effect command is notified from the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, the winning fusion effect (see FIGS. 4 and 5 (b)) or the losing fusion effect (see FIGS. 4 and 5) as the fusion effect. The display fusion effect command shown (see FIG. 5A) is notified from the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the fusion effect corresponding to the fluctuation state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3212, if it is determined that there is no display fusion effect command (S3212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V winning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3214). If there is a V-winning effect command for display (S3214: Yes), the V-winning effect command process is executed (S3215), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, the details of the V winning effect command processing (S3215) will be described with reference to FIG. 68A. FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing the V winning effect command processing (S3215). This V winning effect command processing (S3215) executes a process corresponding to the display V winning effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V winning effect command processing (S3215), first, the V winning effect display data table is determined based on the V winning effect command for display, and the determined V winning effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

Then, based on the V winning effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4104). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S4105), the V winning effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In this way, when the display V prize effect command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the V prize effect command process (S3215) is executed, and the V prize effect indicating that the third symbol display device 81 has won a V prize (FIG. Not shown) is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the V prize has been won.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3214, if it is determined that there is no display V winning effect command (S3214: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3216), and the error command is determined. If there is (S3216: Yes), the error command process is executed (S3217), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S3219) will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4202). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4202 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4202 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 62. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S3216 (S3216: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3218), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

In the processing of S3201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes). ), The processing of S3202 to S3218 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3201 to S3218 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S3108) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 23 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 63 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 63 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other processes are executed. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 63A) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3301. In addition, the image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S3103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 69, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S4302 to S4304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4302), S4303 to S4304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4401).

In the task processing (S3104), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing such as are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 69. After the warning image setting process (S4304) or in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4305.

In S4305, the pointer update process is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4503), and if it is a demo display data table (S4503: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4505), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4503: No). S4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 69 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S4306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S4309).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4309: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S3104), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the confirmation display flag is on (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S4316). If the demo display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S4317) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S4316, if the demo display flag is on (S4316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S3109), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61B), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, which specifies that the image (one of FIGS. 23B and 23C) is stopped and displayed, is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S3105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 (b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). FIG. 72B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4702). In the process of S4702, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4703. Further, as a result of the processing of S4701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4703.

In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4703 (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 61 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S3109 in FIG. 61 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 62 to 68) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 69 to 71) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) (see S4601: No in FIG. 72 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 contains image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4603), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the display setting process (S3103) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

Further, in the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4802: No), the processes of S4803 and S4804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

In the process of S4806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4807. Further, as a result of the processing of S4805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4807.

In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S4809).

If the rear image change flag 233w is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S4810), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

In the process of S4809, if the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S4809: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4815, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The discrimination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S4813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: No), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S3106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3104) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated (S4901). That is, in the processing of S4901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3104). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S4902 (S4903). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 61 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the fusion effect is displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit for the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. It is configured to be. In the fusion effect based on the jackpot, a so-called cut-in effect called SP effect (see FIG. 75 (b)) is displayed. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the SP effect is displayed while the fusion effect is displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the above-mentioned SP effect is displayed even in the fusion effect executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. If the SP effect is displayed even though the lottery result is a small hit, the effect (shaking) suggesting a state of transition to the SP effect at the end of the SP effect (that is, at the end of the small hit game). Direction) is displayed. As a result, even if the SP effect is displayed but the jackpot is not a big hit, the player is given a privilege that it becomes easy to determine the state to be transferred after that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display control device 81 is partially changed. The configuration of the hit variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the configuration of the winning fusion effect selection table provided in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 75, an example of the fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (c) are continuous views partially showing an example of a fusion effect.

In the present embodiment, when the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol is won, various winning fusion effects (winning fusion effects A, B, C) are displayed, and the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol is won. In some cases, various losing fusion effects (losing fusion effects A, B, C, D, E, F) are displayed (see FIGS. 76 (b) and 76 (c)).

In the winning fusion effect A or the losing fusion effect A displayed when the jackpot is won, an effect imitating the competition between the rabbit and the turtle is started as in the first embodiment described above (FIG. 75 (Fig. 75). a) See). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the competition between the rabbit and the turtle (2 seconds in the present embodiment), the characters "SP chance!" Are displayed in the center of the screen for the SP effect (so-called cut-in). The effect) is displayed (see FIG. 75 (b)). After that, a stop symbol (for example, "777") indicating a jackpot is displayed (not shown). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot has been won. Further, since the player plays the game with the expectation that the SP effect is displayed while the fusion effect is displayed, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the fusion effect displayed when winning various small hits, various fusion effects with SP effect (winning fusion effect B, losing fusion effect B, C, D, E) in which the above-mentioned SP effect is displayed and SP Various fusion effects without production (winning fusion effect C, losing fusion effect F) are available (see FIG. 76 (b)).

In various fusion effects with SP effects, the SP effects are displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed (2 seconds later) from the start of the fusion effects, as in the case of the winning fusion effects A or the losing fusion effects A described above (FIG. 75 (FIG. 75). b) See). After that, a stop symbol (for example, "341") indicating a small hit is displayed (see FIG. 75 (c)). The stop symbol indicating this small hit is shaken up and down a predetermined number of times (2 to 8 times in this embodiment), and then a complete stop display (stationary state) is displayed. The number of times the stop symbol sways is determined according to various fusion effects (winning fusion effect B, losing fusion effect B, C, D, E), and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 (b). To do. As a result, the player can predict the winning small hit type from the number of times the stop symbol sways (that is, it is possible to predict the set game state), so that the number of times the stop symbol sways It can be noticed and the interest of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, in the fusion effect without the SP effect (winning fusion effect C, losing fusion effect F), the same winning fusion effect or the losing fusion effect as in the first embodiment described above is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the SP effect is displayed in the fusion effect, the stop display may be displayed with a stop symbol indicating a small hit. In this case, the effect that the stop symbol sways is executed, and the privilege that the set game state can be predicted is given. As a result, even if the SP effect is displayed in the fusion effect, but then a small hit (not a big hit) occurs, the player will be discouraged from participating in the game. Can be prevented (suppressed).

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 76A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Since the other configurations of the ROM 202 are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 76A, in the hit variation pattern selection table 202f of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Then, “0 to 198” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern C. Therefore, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to secure the production time of the fusion effect (losing fusion effect A) displayed when the above-mentioned jackpot is won.

On the other hand, as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern E (variation time 4 seconds) is set. Then, “0 to 198” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the second jackpot fluctuation pattern E. Therefore, similarly to the first special symbol, when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern (variation time 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to secure the production time of the winning fusion effect (winning fusion effect A) displayed when the above-mentioned jackpot is won.

FIG. 76 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 provided in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 110 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 76 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 110 in the second embodiment. Since the other configurations of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). The winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 is provided with the winning fusion effect A as a fusion effect type when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit. Then, "0 to 198" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the winning fusion effect A. Therefore, when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the winning fusion effect A of the second special symbol is selected regardless of the value of the effect counter 223 g.

On the other hand, as the fusion effect type when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit D (missing), a winning fusion effect B and a winning fusion effect C are provided. Then, "0 to 99" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the winning fusion effect B, and "100 to 198" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the winning fusion effect C. Has been done. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit D (missing), the winning fusion effect B with SP effect is selected with a probability of 100/199, and the winning fusion effect B with SP effect is selected with a probability of 99/199 without SP effect. Winning fusion production C is selected.

Next, the contents of the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (c). In the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, the losing fusion effect A is selected as the fusion effect type when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a big hit. Then, "0 to 198" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect A. Therefore, when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the losing fusion effect A is selected regardless of the value of the effect counter 223 g.

On the other hand, the losing fusion effects B, C, and F are provided as the fusion effect types when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit A (missing). Then, "0 to 19" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect B, and "20 to 49" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect C. For the losing fusion effect F, "50 to 198" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit A (missing), the losing fusion effect B with SP effect (2 times of shaking) is selected with a probability of 20/199, and 30/199. With the probability of, the losing fusion effect C with the SP effect (4 times of shaking) is selected, and with the probability of 149/199, the losing fusion effect F without the SP effect is selected.

Further, as a fusion effect type when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit B (missing), losing fusion effects C, D, and F are provided. Then, "0 to 49" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect C, and "50 to 99" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect D. For the losing fusion effect F, "100 to 198" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit B (missing), the losing fusion effect C with SP effect (4 times of shaking) is selected with a probability of 50/199, and 50/199. With the probability of, the losing fusion effect D with SP effect (6 times of shaking) is selected, and with the probability of 99/199, the losing fusion effect F without SP effect is selected.

Further, as the fusion effect type when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit C (missing), the losing fusion effects D, E, and F are provided. Then, "0 to 74" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect D, and "75 to 149" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g for the losing fusion effect E. For the losing fusion effect F, "150 to 198" is set as a determination value of the effect counter 223 g. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit C (missing), the losing fusion effect D with SP effect (6 times of shaking) is selected with a probability of 75/199, and 75/199. With the probability of, the losing fusion effect E with SP effect (8 times of shaking) is selected, and with the probability of 49/199, the losing fusion effect F without SP effect is selected.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the symbol indicating the small hit is stopped and displayed after the SP effect is displayed, the stopped symbol is completely stopped and displayed according to the small hit type ( The number of times it shakes before it stands still) is set. As a result, the small hit type can be predicted (that is, the set game state can be predicted) based on the number of times the symbol indicating the small hit is shaken until it is completely stopped and displayed (stationary). It is possible to pay attention to the stop display of the displayed symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. The selection ratio of each SP effect described above may be arbitrarily determined.

In the present embodiment, the number of times the symbol indicating the small hit is shaken is changed according to the winning small hit type until the symbol indicating the small hit is completely stopped, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. Absent. Specifically, a specific character image (for example, an image of a boy) may be displayed according to the winning small hit type.

In the present embodiment, the SP effect may be displayed in the fusion effect corresponding to all the small hit types (or big hits), but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the SP effect may be displayed only in the fusion effect corresponding to a specific small hit type (for example, a small hit in which the gaming state is switched to a state advantageous to the player). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has won a specific small hit type (that is, the game state is advantageous to the player).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 77 and 78, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2 (S2202) in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 as in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 54) in the first embodiment. It is a process. The same parts as those of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 54) in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 in the second embodiment, the processes of S2301 to S2303 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, the process shifts to the process of S2305 without executing the process of S2304. That is, regardless of whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the process proceeds to S2305. As a result, the fusion effect can be displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit.

The processing after S2305 (processing of S2305 to S2310) is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing is completed.

Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process 2 in the second embodiment is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, similarly to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 55) in the first embodiment. .. The same parts as those in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 55) in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 in the second embodiment, the processes of S2401 to S2403 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, the process shifts to the process of S2405 without executing the process of S2404. That is, regardless of whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the process proceeds to S2405. As a result, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fusion effect can be displayed.

The processing after S2405 (processing of S2405 to S2410) is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing is completed.

The processing of S2408 is different in that the losing fusion effect is selected by using the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 76 (c). Further, the processing of S2410 is different in that the winning fusion effect is selected by using the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 76 (b). As a result, in the fusion effect, the SP effect can be displayed, and then the effect of shaking the stop symbol of the small hit can be displayed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the fusion effect is displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, and the fusion effect is the SP effect (FIG. 75 (b)). It is configured so that a so-called cut-in effect called (see) is displayed. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the SP effect is displayed while the fusion effect is displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the above-mentioned SP effect is displayed even in the fusion effect executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. If the SP effect is displayed even though the lottery result is a small hit, the effect (shaking) suggesting a state of transition to the SP effect at the end of the SP effect (that is, at the end of the small hit game). Direction) is displayed. As a result, even if the SP effect is displayed but the jackpot is not a big hit, the player is given a privilege that it becomes easy to determine the state to be transferred after that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In the present embodiment, the SP effect may be displayed in the fusion effect corresponding to all the small hit types (or big hits), but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the SP effect may be displayed only in the fusion effect corresponding to a specific small hit type (for example, a small hit in which the gaming state is switched to a state advantageous to the player). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has won a specific small hit type (that is, the game state is advantageous to the player).

In the present embodiment, the number of times the symbol indicating the small hit is shaken is changed according to the winning small hit type until the symbol indicating the small hit is completely stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, it is natural that a specific image (for example, an image of a boy) may be displayed according to the winning small hit type.

In the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is displayed as the SP effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of displaying the cut-in effect, the back image may be changed, the display mode of the effect may be changed, or a specific image (for example, an image of a boy) may be displayed. It may be displayed, or it may be output as a notification sound.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 90. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of the first special symbol. Further, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of each special symbol, that is, the passage of the game time. Since the game state changes according to the situation, the game can be changed and the player's interest can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the count (counting) of the number of lottery of the first special symbol is reset when it becomes a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit E in the present embodiment). Further, the count (counting) of the number of lottery of the second special symbol is reset when it becomes a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit G in this embodiment). As a result, the timing at which the number of lottery of the first special symbol and the number of lottery of the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to changing the game state according to the passage of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to further change the game and improve the interest of the player.

In the third embodiment, the rear image is set (displayed) based on the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern of each special symbol. According to this rear image, the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped before the second special symbol (that is, a gaming state disadvantageous to the player), or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to be stopped first (that is, a state advantageous to the player). As a result, the player can be interested in the setting (display) of the rear image, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display control device 81 is partially changed. The configuration of ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the main control device 110 has been changed. The configuration of the small hit type selection table 202d provided has been partially changed, some processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has changed. The point is that some of the processing to be executed has changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 79, an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the rear image is set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern set for the second special symbol. .. According to this rear image, the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped before the second special symbol (that is, a gaming state disadvantageous to the player), or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to be stopped first (that is, a state advantageous to the player).

For example, a short fluctuation table with a short fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, and a long fluctuation table with a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the second special symbol. If so, a rear image of the "city" indicating that the expectation is 1 (lowest) is displayed (see FIG. 82 (b)). On the other hand, a long fluctuation table with a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, and a short fluctuation table with a short fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the second special symbol. In this case, a back image of the "school of fish" indicating that the expectation is 5 (highest) is displayed (see FIG. 82 (b)). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 (b).

FIG. 79A is a schematic view showing a fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a back image of a “mountain” is set as the back image. In this case, as in the first embodiment described above, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the display area Ds1 at the lower left of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the second is displayed in the display area Ds2 at the lower right of the screen. The variable display of the special symbol is displayed. Then, in the center of the screen, an effect (fusion effect) that imitates the competition between the rabbit and the turtle is displayed, and the back image of the "mountain" is displayed as the back image.

Similarly, FIG. 79 (b) is a schematic view showing a fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a rear image of “sandy beach” is set as the rear image. c) is a schematic view showing a fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a back image of the “seabed” is set as the back image.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 (b), but each rear image has a variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and a variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. It is set by the combination with. Specifically, when a fluctuation table having a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, the selected back image becomes a back image with a high degree of expectation. Further, when a fluctuation table having a short fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, the selected back image becomes a back image with a high degree of expectation. That is, when there is a high possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol, the rear image having a high degree of expectation is selected. ..

As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the rear image having a high degree of expectation will be displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In this embodiment, the rear image is set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern set for the second special symbol. However, it is not limited to this. Instead of changing the setting of the rear image, for example, it may be configured to display a character symbol, it may be configured to change the effect mode, or it may be configured to output a notification sound. Good.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (a). As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is a variable table in which the contents of the small hit type selection table 202d are partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 13). The setting information storage area 202j has been added. The details of the small hit type selection table 202d will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (c).

The variable table setting information storage area 202j is an area in which information defining the relationship between the number of lottery numbers and the variable pattern selection table to be set is stored. A variation pattern selection table for each special symbol is set based on the information in the variation table setting information storage area 202j.

The fluctuation table setting information storage area 202j is referred to in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing 3 (see FIG. 83) when determining whether it is the setting change timing of the fluctuation pattern table (see S352 in FIG. 83). It is referred to when setting the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol based on the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n (see S353 of FIG. 83). Similarly, in the second special symbol change start process 3 (see FIG. 86), it is also referred to when determining whether it is the setting change timing of the change pattern table (see S752 in FIG. 86), and the number of special figure 2 lottery It is referred to when setting the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol based on the value of the counter 203p (see S753 in FIG. 86).

Here, the details of the variable table setting information storage area 202j will be described with reference to FIG. 81. As shown in FIG. 81A, the variable table setting information storage area 202j has a special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 and a special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2. The special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 is a storage area in which a variable pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is defined based on the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n. The special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 is a storage area in which a variable pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is defined based on the value of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p.

First, with reference to FIG. 81 (b), the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described.

In the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1, as the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n, a first short variation table (a variation pattern having a short variation time is easily selected) and a first 1 Medium fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is easier to select than the 1st short fluctuation table) and 1st length fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is easier to select than the 1st medium fluctuation table) ) And are prepared. Details of the first short fluctuation table, the first medium fluctuation table, and the first long fluctuation table will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 (d).

In the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1, the first short variation table is set for the value "0 to 7" of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n, and the value "8 to 7" of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n is set. The first medium fluctuation table is set for "18", the first length fluctuation table is set for the value "19 to 48" of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n, and the value " The first medium fluctuation table is set for "49 to 98", and the first length fluctuation table is set for the value "99 to" of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n.

Next, the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (c).

In the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2, as the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p, a second long variation table (a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected) and a second. 2 Medium fluctuation table (variation pattern with shorter fluctuation time is easier to select than the 2nd long fluctuation table) and 2nd short fluctuation table (variation pattern with shorter fluctuation time is easier to select than the 2nd medium fluctuation table) ) And are prepared. Details of the second long fluctuation table, the second medium fluctuation table, and the second short fluctuation table will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 (e).

In the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2, a second length variation table is set for the value "0 to 7" of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p, and the value "8 to 7" of the special figure 2 lottery counter 203p is set. The second medium fluctuation table is set for "18", the second short fluctuation table is set for the value "19 to 48" of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p, and the value " The second medium fluctuation table is set for "49 to 98", and the second short fluctuation table is set for the value "99 to" of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (d). The first short fluctuation table, the first middle fluctuation table, and the first long fluctuation table are defined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.

The first short fluctuation table is a fluctuation pattern table in which the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) having a short fluctuation time can be easily selected. Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 149" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value "150 to 197" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is special. FIG. 1 Fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the value “198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the first short fluctuation table is set, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 150/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 48/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 1/199.

As the first medium fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds), which have a longer fluctuation time than the first short fluctuation table, are easily selected. It is a pattern table. Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 99" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value "100 to 195" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is special. FIG. 1 Fluctuation pattern C (fluctuation time 10 seconds) is set, and special FIG. 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the values “196 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first middle fluctuation table is set, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 100/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 96/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 3/199.

As the first long fluctuation pattern, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds), which have a longer fluctuation time than the first middle fluctuation table, are easily selected. It is a pattern table. Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 49" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value "50 to 189" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is special. FIG. 1 Fluctuation pattern C (fluctuation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the values “190 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first length fluctuation table is set, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 50/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 140/199, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 9/199.

Next, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (e). The second long fluctuation table, the first middle fluctuation table, and the first short fluctuation table are defined in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.

The second long fluctuation table is a fluctuation pattern table in which the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) having a long fluctuation time can be easily selected. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the special figure 2 is set for the value "1 to 49" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the values “50 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the second length fluctuation table is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 1/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 50/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 149/199.

In the second medium fluctuation table, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds), which have shorter fluctuation times than the second middle fluctuation table, are easily selected. It is a pattern table. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 3" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value "4 to 99" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is special. FIG. 2 Fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the values “100 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the second medium fluctuation table is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 4/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 96/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 99/199.

In the second short fluctuation table, the variation in which the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) having a shorter fluctuation time are more easily selected than in the second short fluctuation table. It is a pattern table. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value “0 to 9” of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value “10 to 149” of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is special. FIG. 2 Fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the values “150 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the second short fluctuation table is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 10/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is selected. Is selected with a probability of 140/199, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 49/199.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. FIG. 80B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19), the RAM 203 of the present embodiment has a special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n and a special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p. Has been added.

The special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is a counter for counting (counting) the number of lottery lottery based on the first special symbol. The special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n is incremented by 1 when a lottery based on the first special symbol is executed in the first special symbol change start processing 3 (see FIG. 83) (see S351 in FIG. 83). 1 In the special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see FIG. 84), when the stop process that becomes a big hit is executed, it is initialized to 0 (see S651 in FIG. 84). Further, in the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (see FIG. 85), even when the stop process for a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed, it is initialized to 0 (see S662 in FIG. 85). ..

The special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of lottery lottery based on the second special symbol. The special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p is incremented by 1 when a lottery based on the second special symbol is executed in the second special symbol change start processing 3 (see FIG. 86) (see S751 in FIG. 86). 1 In the special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see FIG. 87), when the stop process that becomes a big hit is executed, it is initialized to 0 (see S951 in FIG. 87). Further, in the special figure 2 small hit stop process 3 (see FIG. 88), even when the stop process for a specific small hit (small hit G) is executed, it is initialized to 0 (see S962 in FIG. 88). ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 80 (c), the small hit type selection table 202d provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. The small hit type selection table 202d is based on the value of the small hit type selection counter, the small hit type, the presence / absence of passing V, and each lottery count counter after the small hit (Special Figure 1 lottery count counter 203n, Special Figure 2). This is a table used for selecting whether or not to reset the lottery counter 203p).

In the small hit type selection table 202d, a dedicated small hit type is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the first special symbol, two types of small hit E and small hit F are set, and in the second special symbol, two types of small hit G and small hit H are set. In the small hit E, "0 to 3" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4, and in the small hit F, "4 to 198" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4. There is. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit G, and the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit H. Is set as "99 to 198".

In the present embodiment, when the small hit E is executed, the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n is initialized to 0, and the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol is switched. .. Further, when the small hit G is executed, the value of the special figure 2 lottery counter 203p is initialized to 0, and the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol is switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80 (c), the small hit E of the first special symbol is set to "with reset", and the small hit F of the first special symbol is set to "without reset". ing. Further, the small hit G of the second special symbol is set to "with reset", and the small hit H of the second special symbol is set to "without reset".

As in the first embodiment, the small hits (small hits E and F) of the first special symbol are the small hit types that are difficult (or impossible) to pass through V, and the small hits of the second special symbol. (Small hit G, H) is a small hit type that makes it easy (or possible) to pass through V.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variable pattern selection table is configured to be switched according to the number of lottery of the first special symbol (that is, the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n), and the number of lottery of the second special symbol. (That is, the value of the special figure 2 lottery counter 203p) is configured so that the variation pattern selection table can be switched. As a result, the combination of the variable pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variable pattern selection table set for the second special symbol gives the player an advantageous state (for example, the first special symbol). It is possible to set a disadvantageous state (for example, when the fluctuation pattern selection table of the second special symbol is a table with a long fluctuation time) and a disadvantageous state (for example, when the fluctuation pattern selection table of the symbol is a table with a long fluctuation time).

In addition to this, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the number of lottery of the first special symbol and the number of lottery of the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be different. As a result, in addition to changing the game state according to the passage of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to further change the game and improve the interest of the player.

Next, the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (a). As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the ROM 222 of the present embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20 (a)) in that a rear image selection table 222c is added. To do.

Here, the rear image selection table 222c provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (c). The rear image selection table 222c defines a rear image to be set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. It is a table that has been created.

Specifically, first, the case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first short variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second length variation table, the back image of the "town" having the expectation degree of "1" (minimum) is selected. If it is the second medium fluctuation table, the back image of the "mountain" having the expectation degree of "2" is selected. If it is the second short variation table, the back image of the "sandy beach" having the expectation degree of "3" is selected.

Next, the case where the fluctuation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first middle fluctuation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second length variation table, the back image of the "mountain" having the expectation degree of "2" is selected. If it is the second medium fluctuation table, the back image of the "sandy beach" having the expectation degree of "3" is selected. In the case of the second short variation table, the back image of the "seabed" having an expectation degree of "4" is selected.

Next, the case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first short variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second length variation table, the back image of the "sandy beach" having an expectation degree of "3" is selected. If it is the second medium fluctuation table, the back image of the "seabed" having an expectation degree of "4" is selected. In the case of the second short variation table, the back image of the "fish school" having the expectation degree of "5" (highest) is selected.

As described above, when the fluctuation table having a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, the back image having a high expectation is easily selected. Further, when a variation table having a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, a back image having a high degree of expectation can be easily selected. That is, when there is a high possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol, the rear image having a high degree of expectation is easily selected. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the rear image having a high degree of expectation will be displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (c). As shown in FIG. 82 (c), the RAM 223 of the present embodiment is provided with a rear image information storage area 223 m added to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20 (c)). It's different.

The rear image information storage area 223m is an area for storing the currently set rear image type. The back image information storage area 223m is referred to in the back image change process (see FIG. 90) to determine the current back image (see S5004 in FIG. 90), and is based on the back image selected in the process. This is the area to be updated (see S5006 in FIG. 90).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 83 to 88. First, the first special symbol change start processing 3 (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83. The first special symbol variation start processing 3 (S203) in the third embodiment draws a lottery for the first special symbol and selects a variation pattern based on the lottery result. Then, the number of lottery of the first special symbol is counted (counted), and the setting of the variation pattern selection table of the first special symbol is changed according to the counted (counted) number of lottery.

In the first special symbol change start processing 3 (S203) in the third embodiment, the processes S301 to S304 are executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. When the process of S304 is completed, the processes of S351 to S353 are executed instead of the processes of S305 and subsequent steps of the first embodiment.

Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n (S351), and then it is determined whether it is the setting change timing of the fluctuation pattern table (S352). If it is determined in the process of S352 that it is not the timing for changing the setting of the variation pattern table (S352: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S352, when it is determined that it is the setting change timing of the fluctuation pattern table (S352: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n and the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 are set. Based on this, the small hit variation pattern selection is set (S353), and then this process ends.

Next, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84. The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S204) in the third embodiment stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the same manner as the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204, see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. This is a process for initializing the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n to 0 when the process for causing the lottery is performed and the fluctuation is stopped to be a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit E).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S204) in the third embodiment, the processes S601 to S607, S608 and S609 are executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment is that the process of S651 is executed after the process of S607 is completed, and the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 is executed instead of the special figure 1 small hit stop process of S610. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S204), after the process of S607 is executed, the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S651), and this process is terminated. As a result, the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop that becomes a big hit is executed in the first special symbol.

Further, in the process of S602, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not turned on for the special figure 1, that is, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 ( S610) is executed to end this process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, but in the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a specific small hit (small hit E), the special figure 1 The value of the lottery count counter 203n is initialized to 0. As a result, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop that becomes a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed in the first special symbol.

Next, the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85. The special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610) in the third embodiment is the same as the special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610, see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and is a small hit in the first special symbol. This is a process for initializing the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n to 0 when the fluctuation stop processing is executed and the fluctuation stop for a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed.

In the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610) in the third embodiment, the processes S621 to S625 are executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment is that the processes of S661 and S662 are executed after the process of S625 is completed. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the special figure 1 small hit stop processing 3 (S610) in the third embodiment, after the processing of S621 to S625 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is a specific small hit (small hit E) (S661). If it is determined in the process of S661 that it is not a specific small hit (that is, it is a small hit F) (S661: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S661 that it is a specific small hit (that is, it is a small hit E) (S661: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S662). After that, this process ends. As a result, the value of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop that results in a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed.

Next, the second special symbol change start processing 3 (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86. In the second special symbol change start process (FIGS. 86, S206), the special figure 2 lottery count counter is replaced with the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n for the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 83, S203) described above. The variation pattern selection table is set (S752, S753) based on the point where the value of 203p is added (S751) and the information of the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 instead of the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1. ) The only difference is that the detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87. The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S207) in the third embodiment is a special figure in place of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n for the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see FIG. 84) described above. 2 Since the difference is only in that the value of the lottery counter 203p is initialized to 0 (S951 or S920), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the special figure 2 small hit stop process 3 (S920) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88. Is the special figure 2 small hit stop process 3 (S920) in the third embodiment a specific small hit (small hit E) with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (see FIG. 85)? The point changed to the determination (S961) of whether or not it is a specific small hit (small hit G) instead of the determination of, and the value of the special figure 2 lottery count counter 203p is set to 0 instead of the special figure 1 lottery count counter 203n. Since the difference is only in the point of initialization (S962), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 89 and 90, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. First, the variation display setting process 3 (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 89. The variation display setting process 3 (S2113) in the third embodiment is different in that the rear image change process (S2651) is executed with respect to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment. Since the other points are the same, the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the variation display setting process 3 (S2113) in the third embodiment, the processes of S2601 to S2612 are executed in the same manner as in the variation display setting process (S2113) in the first embodiment. When the process of S2610 or S2612 is completed, the rear image change process is executed (S2651), and then this process is terminated.

Here, the rear image change process (S2651) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90. The rear image change process (S2651) in the third embodiment is based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. This is a process for changing the back image.

In the rear image change process (S2651) in the third embodiment, first, the set variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol is determined (S5001), and then the set second special symbol is used. The variation pattern selection table of (S5002) is determined. Then, the back image is selected from the back image selection table 222c based on the discrimination result between S5001 and S5002 (S5003).

Next, the current back image is determined from the back image information storage area 223 m (S5004). It is determined whether or not the back image selected by the process of S5003 is different from the current back image determined by the process of S5004 (S5005). If it is determined in the process of S5005 that the selected back image is the same as the current back image (S5005: No), it is not necessary to change the back image, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5005, when it is determined that the selected back image is different from the current back image (S5005: Yes), the back image information storage area 223 m is updated based on the selected back image (S5006). ), Set a background image change command based on the selected back image (S5007), and end this process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of the first special symbol. Further, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lottery of each special symbol, that is, the passage of the game time. Since the game state changes according to the situation, the game can be changed and the player's interest can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the count (counting) of the number of lottery of the first special symbol is reset when it becomes a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit E in the present embodiment). Further, the count (counting) of the number of lottery of the second special symbol is reset when it becomes a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit G in this embodiment). As a result, the timing at which the number of lottery of the first special symbol and the number of lottery of the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to changing the game state according to the passage of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, the game can be further changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the rear image is set (displayed) based on the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern of each special symbol. According to this rear image, the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped before the second special symbol (that is, a gaming state disadvantageous to the player), or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to be stopped first (that is, a state advantageous to the player). As a result, the player can be interested in the setting (display) of the rear image, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the rear image is set (displayed) based on the fluctuation pattern selection table set for selecting the fluctuation pattern of each special symbol, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. Absent. For example, instead of setting (displaying) the rear image, the effect mode may be changed, a specific character symbol may be displayed, or a notification sound may be output. Naturally good.

In the third embodiment, the number of lottery of the first special symbol is reset (initialized to 0) based on the specific small hit type (small hit E) in the first special symbol, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the number of lottery of the second special symbol may be reset based on the specific small hit type (small hit E) in the first special symbol, or both the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be reset. Of course, the number of lottery draws may be reset. Further, the number of lottery of the first special symbol may not be reset until the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit. In this case, when the number of lottery of the first special symbol becomes a predetermined number or more, a variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player may be set (so-called ceiling is provided). As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's willingness to play even if the state of not being a big hit continues for a long time. The above-described configuration is not limited to the first special symbol, and may be similarly applied to the second special symbol.

The configuration of the third embodiment may be combined with the first embodiment described above. Specifically, in addition to changing the game state (setting of the variable pattern selection table of each special symbol) according to the number of lottery of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), the lottery result is a specific small. It is configured so that the game state (setting of the variation pattern selection table of each special symbol) is changed even when a hit (or a big hit) occurs. As a result, the variation in which the game state changes increases, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 100. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the second prize is obtained by providing the Kroon 900 (means for extending the flow-down period), which allows one game ball to be entered at the same time, above the second prize opening 64b. It is configured so that the game ball does not enter (or is difficult) at an interval shorter than a predetermined interval (20 seconds in this embodiment) into the mouth 64b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 64b excessively.

In the fourth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 64b during the change of the second special symbol, the winning information is reserved. On the other hand, the winning information of the first special symbol is configured so that it cannot be held. As a result, when the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved, if the game ball does not enter the first winning opening 64a (that is, if the launch of the game ball is temporarily interrupted), the second The fluctuation of the special symbol can be stopped (fixed), that is, a state advantageous for the player. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the winning information of the second special symbol is held, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, the winning information (start of fluctuation) of the second special symbol can be reserved, and the interval (20 seconds) at which the game ball enters the second winning opening 64b is based on the first special symbol. It is configured to be longer than the fluctuation time of fluctuation (maximum 19 seconds). Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, two or more game balls do not enter the second winning opening 64b (that is, the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved. There is no such thing as a player's advantage). Although the details will be described later, when the jackpot game is being executed, the winning information of the second special symbol is suspended, which is advantageous for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the croon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b of the game board, and the third symbol display control. The effect mode displayed on the device 81 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided on the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the effect executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed. The partial processing has been changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is provided with a left frame button 22a on the front left side of the front frame 14 and a right frame button on the front right side of the front frame 14 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. The difference is that 22b is provided, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The front frame 14 has a frame left button 22a provided on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) and a frame right button 22b provided on the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) are arranged at intervals (about 500 mm) that are difficult to operate with one hand, and when both buttons are operated, they are arranged. Needs to take his hand off the operating handle 51 and use both hands.

The frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) can be used, for example, to change the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or to change the effect content of the super reach. It is operated by the player when changing it. Further, although the details will be described later, an effect (see FIG. 94 (b)) of simultaneously operating both the frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) is also executed. By displaying (executing) the effect of simultaneously operating both the frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the player's firing operation (operation of the operation handle 51) ) Can be temporarily interrupted.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is different from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above in that the croon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the Kroon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b. The Kroon 900 is composed of a mortar-shaped (inverted dome-shaped) main body portion and a tubular tubular portion extending downward from the center of the mortar-shaped body, and the main body portion and the tubular portion are integrally molded with resin.

The main body portion is composed of a bottom surface portion (ball circumference portion) whose bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center and a wall portion formed on the outer edge portion of the bottom surface portion. The cylinder portion is provided with a through hole having a diameter that allows only one game ball to pass from the upper part to the lower part, and the game ball that has reached the center of the bottom surface portion of the main body portion can flow down. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, but the game ball that has entered (flowed down) into the Kroon 900 goes around the bottom surface (ball orbit) of the main body, and then passes through the through hole of the cylinder and goes down. Flow down to.

The Kroon 900 is inserted from the front side of the game board into a through hole (not shown) made in the game board by router processing, and is pivotally supported from the back side of the game board (not shown). The position in the front-rear direction of the Kroon 900 is such that the tubular portion of the Kroon 900 is in contact with the game board, and the back (back) side of the main body is the back (back) side of the area where the game ball flows down. It is positioned so that it protrudes toward the back side of the board. A lid member (not shown) is provided on the upper part of the main body portion protruding toward the back side of the game board so that the game ball flowing down to the main body part does not jump out to the back side of the game board. ing.

Further, the position of the Kroon 900 in the vertical direction is provided at the upper portion of the second variable winning device 650 and at a position lower than the position of the through gate 67. As a result, the game ball that did not enter the second variable winning device 650 and the game ball that did not pass through the through gate 67 can enter the Kroon 900.

Nails are arranged on the upper side of the Kroon 900 from the upper right part to the upper center, and the game ball can enter only from the upper left part of the Kroon 900. A variable member 901 is provided on the upper left portion of the Kroon 900.

The variable member 901 is configured to move to the front side when a load equivalent to one game ball is applied to the Kroon 900 (not shown). That is, when the game ball orbits the bottom surface of the main body of the Kroon 900, the variable member 901 is moved to the front side, and it is impossible (or difficult) for a new game ball to enter the Kroon 900. ). As a result, it is possible to prevent (prevent) two or more game balls from flowing down to the bottom surface of the main body of the Kroon 900 and circling around.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is an enlarged perspective view of the Kroon 900 provided on the game board of the pachinko machine 10.

The game ball that has flowed down to the Kroon 900 goes around the bottom surface portion (ball circumference portion) of the main body portion for a predetermined period (19 seconds in this embodiment), and then passes through the through hole of the cylinder portion provided in the center of the bottom surface portion. And flow down. When the electric accessory 64b1 is open, the game ball that has flowed downward from the tubular portion of the Kroon 900 enters the second winning opening 64b provided below. Since the time required for the game ball that has flowed downward from the Kroon 900 to enter the second winning opening 64b is 1 second, the game ball that has flowed down to the Kroon 900 enters the second winning opening 64b. The time required for this is 20 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b), an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment will be described. 94 (a) and 94 (b) are examples of the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 94A is a schematic diagram showing an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the first round). By displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94A, it is possible to urge the player to insert the game ball into the second winning opening 64b during the jackpot game.

FIG. 94 (b) shows the third symbol display device 81 when the second special symbol is held at the end of the jackpot game due to the game ball entering the second winning opening 64b during the execution of the jackpot game. It is a figure which showed the mode of the ending effect which is displayed in. By displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94 (b), it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot game will end with the second special symbol on hold. Further, by displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94 (b), the player is urged to simultaneously press the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10. The firing operation (operation of the operation handle 51) can be temporarily interrupted.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is advantageous that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped before the fluctuation of the first special symbol, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the winning of the first special symbol is not held, so in the state where the second special symbol is held, the change of the second special symbol is surely stopped first unless the change of the first special symbol is started. It is a state of doing (that is, a state advantageous for the player). Therefore, in this case, the effect shown in FIG. 94 (b) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to temporarily suspend the firing operation (operation of the operation handle 51), the fluctuation of the first special symbol is not started, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped first. Can be done.

Not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, the right through gate is arranged above the first variable winning device 65, and the right-handed game ball passes through the right through gate, so that the right-handed jackpot game can also be through. The normal electric accessory 64b1 may be easily opened by making it easy to pass through the gate, and the game ball may be easily entered into the second winning opening 64b. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable member 901 is configured to roll only one ball at a time on the croon means 900, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left-handed game ball is a crew as a configuration in which the variable member 901 is not arranged. A nail is arranged so as not to enter the means 900 so that only the right-handed game ball can enter the Kroon means 900. Then, when the ball is hit to the right other than during the big hit game or the small hit game, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (stopped) based on the detection of the game ball by passing through the right through gate, or all the hits are correct. The determination result may be determined as out of alignment, an error may be notified to the third symbol display device 81, an alarm sound may be output, or an error signal may be output from the external output terminal. Further, in the normal game state, the fluctuation time may be lengthened or the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be lowered when passing through the right through gate. Further, always, as the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is the fluctuation time and the hit probability of the normal symbol described in the present embodiment, and is the normal game state such as during the jackpot game (the jackpot game state, but the normal symbol state is In the normal game state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be shortened, or the winning probability may be increased so that the second winning opening 64b can be easily won.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various counters according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r is provided, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r is composed of one execution area and one holding area (holding first area). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64.

Specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 64b (starting winning), and the acquired data is used as one holding area (holding first area). ) Is stored in the empty area. When data is stored in the reserved first area, nothing is newly stored.

When the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Then, based on the winning of the new second winning opening 64b (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 can be acquired and stored in the reserved first area.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is different in that the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r is added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19). The details of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r are as described in FIG. 95, and therefore the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 97 to 99. First, the timer interrupt process 4 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97. The timer interrupt process 4 in the fourth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment in that a part of the special symbol variation process (S104) is changed and the start. The difference is that the winning process (S151) is executed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the timer interrupt process 4 of the fourth embodiment, the start winning process is executed after the processes of S101 to S104 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (S151). By executing this start winning process (S151), the second special symbol can be held. When the process of S151 is completed, the process of S106 to S109 is executed and then this process is terminated, as in the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment.

Next, the start winning process (S151) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 98. The start winning process (S151) in the fourth embodiment is one process in the timer interrupt process 4 (see FIG. 97) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment.

In the start winning process (S151) in the fourth embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 64b (S6001). In the process of S6001, if the ball has not won the second winning opening 64b (S6001: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6001, if the ball has won the second winning opening 64b (S6001: Yes), then the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is acquired (S6002), and the special symbol 2 is reserved. It is determined whether the value (N2) of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is smaller than 1 (S6003). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is larger than 1 (S6003: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s is smaller than 1 (S6003: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s (N2). S6004), then the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set (S6005). Then, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r (S6006), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 99. The second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206) in the fourth embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, similarly to the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. This is one process in the special symbol variation process (S104).

In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206) in the fourth embodiment, the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment is replaced with the processes S701 to S702 in S751. The difference is that the processing of ~ S755 is executed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S206), first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s is acquired (S751), and then the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s (N2). Is greater than 0 (S752). If it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S752: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S752, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s is larger than 0 (S752: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203s is used. 1 is subtracted (S753), the reserved ball number command is set (S754), and the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r is shifted (S755). After that, the processes of S703 to S708 are executed, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 100, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. First, the command determination process 4 (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 100. The command determination process 4 (S2112) in the fourth embodiment is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, similarly to the command determination process (S2112, see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment. The same parts as the command determination process (S2112, see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the command determination process 4 (S2112) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S2201 to S2207 are executed in the same manner as in the command determination process in the first embodiment, and it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received in the process of S2207. If so (S2207: Yes), the process of S2208 is executed. After executing the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 (S2251). Specifically, when the hold ball number command is received during the execution of the change of the second special symbol, it is determined that the hold ball number of the second special symbol becomes 1. On the other hand, if the hold ball number command is received while the change of the second special symbol is stopped, the change of the second special symbol is immediately started based on the pending winning information. That is, since it is a case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not become 1, it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0.

If it is determined in the process of S2251 that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 (S2251: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2251 when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 (S2251: Yes), the display V chance command is set (S2252), and this process is terminated.

The display V chance command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and is a command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. ), It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display V chance command, the display control device 114 notifies that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 (that is, it is in an advantageous state for the player) (that is, it is in an advantageous state for the player). (Not shown) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, if the hold ball number command is not received (S2207: No), the processes of S2209 to S2213 are not executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2253. In the process of S2253, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2253), and if the ending command has been received (S2253: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is on hold 1 (S2254). In the process of S2254, if the special figure 2 is hold 1 (S2254: Yes), the display V chance ending command is set (S2255), and this process ends.

The display V chance ending command set by the process of S2255 is stored in the ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. In the process (S2102), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display V chance ending command, the display control device 114 displays the effect shown in FIG. 94 (b) on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2254, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not the hold 1 (S2254: No), the normal ending command for display is set (S2256), and this process is terminated.

If the ending command is not received in the process of S2253 (S2253: No), the processes of S2214 to S2217 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a Kroon 900 (means for extending the flow-down period) is provided above the second winning opening 64b so that the number of game balls that can be simultaneously entered is one. As a result, the game balls are configured so as not to enter (or are difficult) at intervals shorter than the predetermined intervals in the second winning opening 64b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 64b excessively.

In the fourth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 64b during the change of the second special symbol, the winning information is reserved. On the other hand, the winning information of the first special symbol is configured so that it cannot be held. As a result, when the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved, if the game ball does not enter the first winning opening 64a (that is, if the launch of the game ball is temporarily interrupted), the second The fluctuation of the special symbol can be stopped (fixed), that is, a state advantageous for the player. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the winning information of the second special symbol is held, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the Kroon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b so that the game balls do not enter the second winning opening 64b at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval (20 seconds). , Not limited to this. For example, a known sorting device may be used to sort the game balls at predetermined intervals (or at intervals longer than the predetermined intervals) so as to win a prize in the second winning opening 64b.

In the present embodiment, the game ball orbits the bottom surface (circling portion) of the Kroon 900 so that the time required for the game ball to pass through the Kroon 900 becomes longer, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. Absent. Instead of the Kroon 900, the number of game balls that can be entered at the same time is one, and a means for extending the flow period of the game balls (flow period extension means) may be provided. Specifically, means such as forming the flow passage in a meandering shape to lengthen the flow distance and using a member (speed reduction member) for reducing the speed of the game ball in the flow passage can be considered. As the speed reducing member, for example, a member having a high coefficient of friction (urethane rubber or the like) such that the frictional force generated when the ball rolls becomes high can be considered. It is also conceivable to roughen the ball rolling surface of the flow passage or provide protrusions to increase the frictional force between the ball and the ball rolling surface of the flow passage and reduce the flow speed of the ball.

In the present embodiment, in order to prevent two or more game balls from entering (flowing down) into the Kroon 900 at the same time, a movable member that is movable by the load on the Kroon 900 is used, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, a known non-electric accessory or electric accessory may be provided at the entrance of the Kroon 900. Specifically, when a game ball enters the Kroon 900, the non-electric accessory at the entrance is mechanically moved if it is a non-electric accessory, and if it is an electric accessory, it is electrically operated based on the ball entry detection. The electric accessory at the entrance is movably controlled, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the Kroon 900. Then, when the game ball flows down below the Kroon 900, the non-electric accessory at the entrance is mechanically moved again if it is a non-electric accessory, and electrically based on the flow detection if it is an electric accessory. The electric accessory at the entrance is movably controlled again, and the game ball can enter (or easily) enter the Kroon 900.

In the present embodiment, the Kroon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b, but it may not be provided. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the game board with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The big hit game and the small hit game of Special Figure 1 are games in which the game ball is inserted into the second variable winning device 650 (so-called left-handed game), and only the small hit game of Special Figure 2 is on the right side of the game board. This is a game (so-called right-handed game) in which a game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 65 provided. As a result, the small hit game and the normal game of Special Figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operations for executing the game can be made the same), and occur frequently. It is possible to reduce the operational burden on the player for executing the small hit game shown in the special figure 1.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above is provided with a jackpot type to which a time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is given after the jackpot game is completed. I made it. As a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that the time-saving game state will be given after the jackpot game is completed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 The configuration has been partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the game board of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 moves from the position on the right side to the position on the left side of the game board with respect to the game board of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. The point that has been changed, the point that the right first winning opening 640a is provided above the first variable winning device 65, and the point that the right through gate 670 is provided above the right first winning opening 640a. The difference is, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed (whether or not the ball can be entered is variable) in the big hit game, and the first variable winning is made in the small hit game shown in Special Figure 2. The device 65 is opened and closed (whether or not the ball can enter is variable). On the other hand, in the small hit game of FIG. 1, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed (whether or not the ball can be entered is variable) instead of the first variable winning device 65.

Therefore, the big hit game and the small hit game of Special Figure 1 are games in which a game ball is fired on the left side of the game board (so-called left-handed). As a result, the small hit game and the normal game of Special Figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operations for executing the game can be made the same), and occur frequently. It is possible to reduce the operational burden on the player for executing the small hit game shown in the special figure 1.

In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the game board, and the first variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the game board, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 may be arranged in the center of the game board. As a result, in all the games (normal game, big hit game, small hit game of special figure 1, small hit game of special figure 2), the operation for executing the game can be the same, so that the player can use the same operation. The operation load can be reduced. Further, since each winning device is arranged in the center of the game board, the player can select a right-handed or left-handed player, which can improve the player's interest.

With this configuration, it is not necessary to hit right at the time of a small hit of the first special symbol, and by continuing the left-handed game, the small hit game of the first special symbol is executed, and then the normal game to be executed. Can be continued while left-handed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the small hit of the first special symbol is frequently executed, but the trouble of frequently switching to the right-handed game can be omitted, and the game can be easily and continuously performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot B is executed, the time saving game is given 8 times (the number of times the special symbol is changed). Even in that case, the right side of the game area (first variable) so that the game ball hit right by the right through gate 670 and the right first winning opening 640a (the winning opening that triggers the start of the first special symbol) can enter. Since it is located above the winning device 65), it is possible to execute a time-saving game in a right-handed state. Further, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be played by either left-handed or right-handed, so that the player can easily understand the game method and easily play the game.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot game is configured so that the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first variable winning device 65 may be in the open state. In this case, by controlling the switching member 65h without operating it, it is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpot game is continuously executed. Further, even when the time saving game is given, the right-handed game can be continuously played, and the game operation can be facilitated.

<Electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. The ROM 202 of the present embodiment is different in that the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (a). In the present embodiment, jackpot A (15R jackpot, no electric support) and jackpot B (15R jackpot, 8 times of electric support) are provided as the types of jackpot.

Here, "big hit A (15R big hit, no electric support)" means a normal state (states A to C) after a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds (1 round is up to 30 seconds or 10 balls). It is a big hit. In addition, "big hit B (15R big hit, electric support 8 times)" means a time saving state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes shorter) after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. It is a big hit. Details will be described later, but in the time-saving state, it is easier to select a second special symbol whose fluctuation time is shorter than that of the first special symbol (that is, the first) as compared with the normal state (states A to C). 2 The fluctuation of the special symbol is likely to stop before the fluctuation of the first special symbol), which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot type selection table 202d, the value "0 to 99" of the first hit type counter CS2 is set for the jackpot A, and the value "100 to 198" of the first type counter CS2 is set for the jackpot B. Is set. That is, the probability that the jackpot A is selected is set to 100/199, and the probability that the jackpot B is selected is set to 99/199.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the details of the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 (time saving state) 202f will be described. The special figure 1 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 (time saving state) 202f is a small hit variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol in the time saving state. In the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table 2 (time saving state) 202f, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is defined.

Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is defined for the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, the probability that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the small hit of the first special symbol in the time saving state is set to 199/199 (that is, 100%).

Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (c), the details of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 4 (time saving state) 202f will be described. The special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 4 (time saving state) 202f is a small hit variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol in the time saving state. In the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table 2 (time saving state) 202f, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) are defined.

Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is defined for the value "0 to 65" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value "66 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined. On the other hand, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) is defined. That is, the probability that the second fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the small hit of the second special symbol in the time saving state is set to 66/199, and the second fluctuation pattern G ( The probability that (variation time 6 seconds) is selected is set to 133/199.

Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability that the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is selected in the second special symbol is 66/199. As a result, the time saving state is in a state in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is more likely to stop earlier than the first special symbol (that is, a state advantageous for the player) as compared with the normal state (states A to C).

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. As shown in FIG. 103, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a time saving counter 203t is added, and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving counter 203t is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is larger than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203t is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. The time saving medium counter 203t is set to 8 at the end of the jackpot B (16R time saving jackpot) (see S1453 in FIG. 106). In this time-saving state, a small hit variation pattern selection table for the time-saving state is set (S1452), and the variation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is shortened (see FIGS. 103 (b) and 103 (c)). ). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 104) or the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 105), one is subtracted each time the fluctuation of each special symbol is stopped (S673 in FIG. 104). , See S973 in FIG. 105).

As described above, the small hit fluctuation pattern set in the time saving state is such that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol as compared with the normal state (states A to C). It is configured so that it can be easily selected (that is, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to stop before the fluctuation of the first special symbol). As a result, after the end of the jackpot B, the second special symbol is likely to stop before the first special symbol, which is advantageous for the player (time saving state). Therefore, since the game can be performed with the goal of becoming a jackpot B, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 104 to 107. First, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 104. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S204) in the fifth embodiment, the processes S671 to S676 are added to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. The other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends (S601: Yes) as in the case of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the first embodiment, and the lottery result. If is a big hit (S602: Yes), the processes of S603 to S607 are executed, the time saving counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S671), and the process shifts to the processing of S675 in order to end the time saving state.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends (S601: Yes) and the lottery result is a small hit (S602: No), the process of S610 is executed and the process proceeds to S672. If the first special symbol is changing (S601: No) and the special figure 1 change stop flag 203g is on (S608: Yes), the process of S609 is executed and the process proceeds to S672.

In the process of S672, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203t is larger than 0 (S672), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S672: No), this processing is terminated as it is. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S672, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is larger than 0 (S672: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S673), and the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0. Whether or not it is determined (S674).

If it is determined in the process of S674 that the time saving counter 203t is not 0 (S674: No), the time saving state is continued, so the present processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is 0 in the processing of S674 (S674: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S675 in order to end the time saving state.

When the processing of S671 or S674 is completed, the current state is acquired from the state setting area (S675), the variation pattern selection table is set based on the acquired state in the processing of S675 (S676), and this processing is performed. finish. By the process of S676, the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the time saving state can be changed, and the time saving state can be ended.

Next, the details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 105. The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S207) differs from the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment in that the processes S971 to S976 are added, and the like. The parts of are the same. Since the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S207) executes the same processing as the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 104) described above for the second special symbol, the details thereof are detailed. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the details of the jackpot control process 5 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The jackpot control process 5 (S1304) is different from the jackpot control process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1451 to S1453 are additionally executed at the ending timing. Other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot control process 5 (S1304), the processes S1401 to S1409 are executed in the same manner as the jackpot process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. In the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is the ending timing (S1409: Yes), the ending command is set (S1410), and the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411). After that, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is the jackpot B (S1451).

If it is determined in the process of S1451 that the lottery result is the jackpot A (S1451: No), it is not necessary to give a time saving state after the jackpot ends, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1451 that the lottery result is the jackpot B (S1451: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1452 in order to give a time saving state after the jackpot ends.

In the process of S1452, the small hit variation pattern selection table for the time saving state (see FIGS. 102 (b) and (c)) is set as the small hit variation pattern selection table of each special symbol (S1452), and the value of the time saving counter 203t. Is set to 8 to end this process. As a result, it is possible to impart a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B.

Next, the details of the small hit control process 5 (S1305) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. The small hit control process 5 (S1305) is different from the small hit control process (FIG. 47) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1651 to S1654 are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 5 (S1305), the processes S1601 to S1605 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the process of S1605, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1605: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit of the first special symbol (S1651).

In the process of S1651, when it is determined that the first special symbol is a small hit (S1651: Yes), the opening of the second variable winning device 650 is set in order to open the second variable winning device 650 (S1651: Yes). S1652), this process is terminated. In the process of S1651, when it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit (S1651: No), the small hit operation process is executed in order to open the first variable winning device 65 (S1616). This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1605 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1605: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1607. In the process of S1607, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S1607), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit of the first special symbol (S1653).

In the process of S1653, when it is determined that the first special symbol is a small hit (S1653: Yes), the closing of the second variable winning device 650 is set in order to close the second variable winning device 650 (S1653: Yes). S1654), this process is terminated. In the process of S1653, when it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit (S1653: No), the closing of the first variable winning device 65 is set in order to close the first variable winning device 65 (S1653: No). S1608), this process is terminated.

By this small hit control process 5 (S1305), at the time of a small hit of the first special symbol, the second variable winning device 650 provided on the left side of the game board can be opened and closed (variable) to perform a so-called left-handed game. it can. Further, at the time of a small hit of the second special symbol, the first variable winning device 65 provided on the right side of the game board can be opened and closed (variable) to allow a so-called right-handed game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the game board with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The big hit game and the small hit game of Special Figure 1 are games in which the game ball is inserted into the second variable winning device 650 (so-called left-handed game), and only the small hit game of Special Figure 2 is on the right side of the game board. This is a game (so-called right-handed game) in which a game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 65 provided. As a result, the small hit game and the normal game of Special Figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operations for executing the game can be made the same), and occur frequently. It is possible to reduce the operational burden on the player for executing the small hit game shown in the special figure 1.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above is provided with a jackpot type to which a time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is given after the jackpot game is completed. I made it. As a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that the time-saving game state will be given after the jackpot game is completed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115. The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts to change to be a big hit. The lottery of the special symbol was forcibly removed and the fluctuation was executed (that is, the fluctuation that became a big hit was not forcibly stopped). As a result, for example, when the fluctuation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of the small hit based on the first special symbol is stopped first, so that the fluctuation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is changed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the change to be off. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) not to be a big hit even though the effect suggesting that it is a big hit is executed (displayed), and to prevent (suppress) to reduce the player's willingness to participate. ..

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of jackpots (big hits A1, A2, A3) given to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment when passing through the V winning switch 65e3. I have to. Then, depending on the jackpot type, the state of being transferred after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be different. As a result, the game state can be changed (changed) not only when the lottery result is a small hit but also when the lottery result is a big hit, so that the game can be changed. Can improve the interest of the person.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is configured to execute (display) the SP reach effect for the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment when the lottery result is a big hit. As a result, the player can be made to feel the arrival of a big hit, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has an SP reach effect (for special figure 1 small hit) even when the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is a small hit that shifts to the state B or the state C. , Or, special figure 2 for small hits) was configured to be executed (displayed). As a result, the frequency with which the SP reach effect is displayed increases, so that the player's interest can be improved, and even if the SP reach effect is displayed but the jackpot is not obtained, it is advantageous for the player. Since the state shifts to the state B or the state C, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the main control A part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the device 110 has been changed, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 108, an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (c) are examples of an effect mode of the SP reach effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the SP reach effect (special figure 2 big hit) is executed (displayed) when the second special symbol is a big hit, and when the first special symbol is a small hit and a predetermined condition is satisfied. SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) is executed (displayed), and SP reach effect (special figure 2 small hit) is executed (displayed) when it becomes a small hit of the second special symbol and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. ).

In various SP reach effects, variable display is executed in a normal effect mode (see FIG. 108 (a)). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display (2 seconds later in the present embodiment), the characters "Super Reach !!" are displayed at the upper part of the screen (see FIG. 108 (b)). After that, if the SP reach effect indicates a special figure 2 jackpot, a stop symbol (for example, "777") indicating the jackpot is displayed (not shown). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot has been won. Further, since the player plays the game with the expectation that the SP reach effect is displayed, the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, if the SP reach effect indicates a special figure 1 small hit or a special figure 2 small hit, after the characters "Super Reach !!" are displayed at the upper part of the screen, a stop symbol indicating the small hit (for example, "341" and the like) are displayed (see FIG. 108 (c)). The stop symbol indicating this small hit is shaken up and down a predetermined number of times (2 to 8 times in this embodiment), and then a complete stop display (stationary state) is displayed. The number of times the stop symbol sways is predetermined according to the winning small hit type.

The relationship between the small hit type and the number of times the stop symbol sways is the same as in the second embodiment. Specifically, in the case of small hit A, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 19", the number of shakings is "2 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "20 to 49", the number of shakings is "2 times". It becomes "4 times", and if the value of the effect counter 223g is "50 to 198", the number of shakings becomes "0 times".

In the case of small hit B, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 49", the number of shaking is "4 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "50 to 99", the number of shaking is "6 times". If the value of the effect counter 223g is "100 to 198", the number of shakings is "0".

In the case of small hit C, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 74", the number of shaking is "6 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "75 to 149", the number of shaking is "8 times". If the value of the effect counter 223g is "150 to 198", the number of shakings is "0".

In the case of small hit D, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 99", the number of shakings is "8 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "100 to 198", the number of shakings is "0 times". It becomes.

As a result, the player can predict the winning small hit type from the number of times the stop symbol sways (that is, it is possible to predict the set game state), so that the number of times the stop symbol sways It can be noticed and the interest of the player can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the SP reach effect is displayed, the stop display may be displayed with a stop symbol indicating a small hit. In this case, the effect that the stop symbol sways is executed, and the privilege that the set game state can be predicted is given. This prevents the player from losing the motivation to participate in the game even if the SP reach effect is displayed but then a small hit (not a big hit) occurs. Can be suppressed).

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (c). As shown in FIG. 109 (a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is partially modified from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in the variation pattern selection table 202f. , V Passing jackpot type selection table 202k is added, and other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the hit variation pattern selection table 202f, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f, will be described with reference to FIG. 109 (b). The hit variation pattern selection table 202f is a table in which a variation pattern selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined when a big hit occurs in each special symbol.

In the first special symbol, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern E (variation time 10 seconds) is set for the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern E is selected with a probability of 199/199 (1/1).

In the second special symbol, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern F (variation time 9 seconds) is set for the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern F is selected with a probability of 199/199 (1/1).

Next, with reference to FIG. 109 (c), the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202k when passing through V will be described. The jackpot type selection table 202k at the time of passing V is a table that defines the jackpot type selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. The jackpot type selection table 202k at the time of passing V is when the V winning flag 203e is on (that is, when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the small hit game) in the small hit ending process 6 (see FIG. 113). , Referenced to select jackpot type.

In the jackpot type selection table 202k when passing through V, the jackpot A1 (15R jackpot) is set for the value "0 to 89" of the first hit type counter C2, and the value "90 to 179" of the first hit type counter C2 is set. On the other hand, the jackpot A2 (15R jackpot) is set, and the jackpot A3 (15R jackpot) is set for the value "180 to 198" of the first hit type counter C2. That is, as for the jackpot type selected based on the passage of the game ball through the V winning switch 65e3, the probability of selecting the jackpot A1 is set to 90/199, and the probability of selecting the jackpot A2 is set to 90/199. It is set, and the probability that the jackpot A3 is selected is set to 19/199.

Here, the "big hit A1 (15R jackpot)" is a jackpot that shifts to the state A after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds (1 round is up to 30 seconds or 10 balls). "Big hit A2 (15R big hit)" is a big hit that shifts to state B after a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. The "big hit A3 (15R jackpot)" is a jackpot that shifts to the state C after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. In this way, the state of transition after that can be changed according to the jackpot type given based on passing through the V winning switch 65e3.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 110 to 113. First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 110. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) in the sixth embodiment, the processes S451 to S453 are added to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) in the sixth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the variation based on the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed (S451). In the process of S451, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the second special symbol is not being executed (S451: No), the processes of S401 to S409 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S451, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed (S451: Yes), the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed and the lottery result is forcibly removed. In order to set to, the process proceeds to S452.

In the process of S452, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to be out (S452), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S453), and this process is terminated. .. As a result, if the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the fluctuation that becomes the big hit is started, the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed and the lottery result is forcibly set to be out. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol from becoming big hits at the same time, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) in the sixth embodiment, the processes S851 to S853 are added to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) in the sixth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed (S851). In the process of S851, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is not being executed (S851: No), the processes of S801 to S809 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S851, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed (S851: Yes), the lottery of the second special symbol is not performed and the lottery result is forcibly removed. In order to set to, the process proceeds to S852.

In the process of S852, the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to be out (S852), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S853), and this process is terminated. .. As a result, if the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the fluctuation that becomes the big hit is started, the lottery of the second special symbol is not performed and the lottery result is forcibly set to be out. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol from becoming big hits at the same time, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, the jackpot control process 6 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 112. The jackpot control process 6 (S1304) in the sixth embodiment is different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1471 to S1472 are added, and the other parts are different. It is the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot control process 6 (S1304) in the sixth embodiment, the processes S1401 to S1409 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending in the jackpot game (S1409: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1410. In the process of S1410, the ending command is set (S1410), the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), and the process proceeds to the process of S1471.

In the process of S1471, the state corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the state setting area 223h (S1471). Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A1, state A is set, when jackpot A2 is set, state B is set, and when jackpot A3 is set, state C is set (FIG. 109). (C)). Next, the state counter 203k is set (S1472) based on the state set in the process of S1471, the state command corresponding to the set state is set (S1473), and the present process is terminated.

The state command set by the process of S1703 is stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving this state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the subordinate state area 223h (see S2210 in FIG. 53).

Next, the small hit ending process 6 (S1610) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 113. The small hit ending process 6 (S1610) in the sixth embodiment is different from the small hit ending process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1851 to S1853 are added. The parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit ending process 6 (S1610) in the sixth embodiment, the processes S1801 to S1802 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is on (S1802: Yes), then the value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired (S1851).

Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1851, the jackpot type is acquired from the jackpot type selection table 202k when passing through V (S1852). A jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type acquired in the process of S1852 is set (S1853), and the process proceeds to the process of S1804. When the processes from S1804 to S1807 are executed, this process ends. Since the processes of S1804 to S1807 are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 114 and 115. First, with reference to FIG. 114, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (S2204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment performs the processes of S2451 and S2452 in place of the process of S2404 with respect to the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 55) in the first embodiment. It differs in that it has been modified to do so, and is otherwise the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment, the processes S2401 to S2403 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. After that, the SP reach selection process is executed (S2451), and the process proceeds to the process of S2452. Details of the SP reach selection process (S2451) will be described later with reference to FIG. 115.

When SP reach is selected in the process of S2452 (S2452: No), the SP reach effect is executed (displayed) and the fusion effect is not executed (displayed). Therefore, the processes of S2405 to S2414 are skipped. , End this process. On the other hand, if SP reach is not selected in the process of S2451 (S2452: Yes), the processes of S2405 to S2414 are executed and the present process is terminated in order to execute (display) the fusion effect. Since the processes of S2405 to S2414 are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the SP reach selection process (S2451) executed in the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 115. This SP reach selection process (S2451) is a process for selecting an SP reach effect.

In the SP reach selection process (S2451), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5101). In the process of S5101, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S5101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5102 in order to execute (display) the SP reach effect based on the big hit.

In the process of S5102, the SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot) is selected (S5102), and this process is terminated. Here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a jackpot is the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern F (variation time 9 seconds). Therefore, the production time of the SP reach production (special figure 2 big hit) was also set to 9 seconds. As a result, the production time of the SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot) can be matched with the fluctuation time that is the jackpot of the second special symbol, and it is possible to provide the player with a natural effect. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5101: Yes), then whether or not the lottery result is a small hit B or a small hit C is determined. Determine (S5103).

If the lottery result is determined to be the small hit A in the processing of S5103 (S5103: No), the state is changed to the state A after the small hit game is completed, so the SP reach effect is executed (displayed). In order not to do so, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is determined to be a small hit B or a small hit C in the processing of S5103 (S5103: Yes), the state is changed to the state B or the state C after the end of the small hit game. , In order to execute (display) the SP reach effect, the process proceeds to S5104.

In the process of S5104, it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (S5104). In the processing of S5104, when it is determined that the residual variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104: Yes), the variation of the first special symbol is based on the variation of the second special symbol. Is also the case when it is stopped first. In this case, it is then determined whether or not the residual variation time of the first special symbol is between 8.7 seconds and 9.7 seconds (S5105).

In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the residual variation time of the first special symbol is between 8.7 seconds and 9.7 seconds (S5105: Yes), the residual variation time of the first special symbol is SP. Since the reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) can be executed (displayed), the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) is selected (S5106), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5105, when it is determined that the residual variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than 8.7 seconds or longer than 9.7 seconds (S5105: No), the first special symbol Since the remaining fluctuation time is not within the range in which the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) can be executed (displayed), this process is terminated as it is. If the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) is not selected, then the fusion effect is selected in the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (see FIG. 114).

In the processing of S5104, when it is determined that the residual variation time of the first special symbol is longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104: No), the variation of the second special symbol is based on the variation of the first special symbol. Is also the case when it is stopped first. In this case, it is then determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 9 seconds (S5107).

In the process of S5107, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 9 seconds (S5107: Yes), the SP reach effect (special figure 2 small hit) is selected, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5107, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is not 9 seconds (S5107: No), this process is terminated as it is. As a result, the SP reach effect (special figure 2 small hit) can be executed (displayed) according to the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to match the production time of the SP reach effect (special figure 2 small hit) with the fluctuation time which is the small hit of the second special symbol, and to provide the player with a natural effect. Can be done.

In this way, when the second special symbol becomes a big hit, by executing (displaying) the SP reach effect (special figure 2 big hit), the player can be made to predict the arrival of the big hit, and the player. Can improve the interest of.

Further, in the case of a small hit that shifts to the state B or the state C, the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) or the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit), which is the same effect mode as the SP reach effect (special figure 2 big hit). (Fig. 2 Small hit) is executed (displayed). As a result, the frequency with which the SP reach effect is displayed increases, so that the player's interest can be improved, and even if the SP reach effect is displayed but the jackpot is not obtained, it is advantageous for the player. Since the state shifts to the state B or the state C, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when a big hit change is started in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the lottery of the other special symbol is forcibly performed. It was configured to be off and perform fluctuations. As a result, for example, when the fluctuation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of the small hit based on the first special symbol is stopped first, so that the fluctuation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is changed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the change to be off. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from not being a big hit even though the effect suggesting that it is a big hit is executed (displayed), and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's willingness to participate. ..

In the sixth embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots (big hits A1, A2, A3) given when passing through the V winning switch 65e3 are provided. Then, depending on the jackpot type, the state of being transferred after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be different. As a result, the game state can be changed (changed) not only when the lottery result is a small hit but also when the lottery result is a big hit, so that the game can be changed. Can improve the interest of the person.

The sixth embodiment may be combined with the fourth embodiment described above. Specifically, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation of the jackpot is not forcibly stopped. As a result, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball enters the first winning opening 64a even though the second special symbol is reserved, and the change of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit is forcibly changed. It is no longer necessary to display an effect (see FIG. 94 (b)) for preventing the vehicle from being stopped. As a result, it is not necessary to display an effect (see FIG. 94 (b)) that urges the player to press the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b, and the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is won, the big hit game is given after the small hit D is completed, but the probability of the big hit is not limited to the normal probability (1/399). ) Is set higher than the high probability state (probability variation: for example, 1/39) from the end of the small hit D to the next big hit or a predetermined number of times until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate. It may be configured to set up to the period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that gives a probability change.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment has each special symbol when the lottery based on the first special symbol is continuously executed for the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment described above. It is configured to select the back image regardless of the variation pattern selection table set for. When the lottery based on the first special symbol is continuously executed, the first is until the variable pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, until the back image with high expectation is displayed). There is a high possibility that an illegal game is being performed in which a game ball is gradually inserted into the winning opening 64a. Therefore, in this modified example, when such an illegal game is executed, a rear image with a low expectation (a rear image of the "town") is forcibly set. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the above-mentioned illegal game from being executed.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the voice. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113 has been changed. The third is about other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in a modified example of the third embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). As shown in FIG. 116A, the ROM 222 of the present modification is partially modified from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 80) in the rear image selection table 222c. The differences are the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. The details of the rear image selection table 222c will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (b). As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the RAM 223 of the present modification, the special drawing 1 continuous lottery counter 223r and the table selection effect counter 223s are added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 80). The differences are in that they are the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of times that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is continuously executed. The special figure 1 continuous lottery counter 223r is used when the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on in the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 118) (that is, when the variation of the first special symbol is started). Is added to, and is initialized to 0 when the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag is on (that is, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started). The value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter 223r is referred to in the rear image change process 7 (see FIG. 119), and is set for each special symbol when it is determined that the value is 10 or more. The back image of the "city" will be selected regardless of the variation pattern selection table.

Special figure 1 When the value of the continuous lottery counter 223r is large (10 or more in this modification), a rear image with a high degree of expectation is displayed until a variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, a back image with high expectation is displayed). (Until this is done), there is a high possibility that an illegal game is being performed in which a game ball is gradually inserted into the first winning opening 64a. Therefore, in this modified example, when such an illegal game is executed, a rear image with a low expectation (a rear image of the "town") is forcibly set. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the above-mentioned illegal game from being executed.

The table selection effect counter 223s is a counter for determining which of the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 and the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2, which will be described later, is used to select the back image. The table selection effect counter 223s is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 3". Although not shown, the effect counter 223g is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

Next, the back image set in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 117. First, a method of calculating the determination value for selecting the back image will be described with reference to the determination value calculation pattern table of FIG. 117 (a). In this modification, the determination value is set in each of the various tables (first short variation table, second long variation table, etc.) set for each special symbol. There are three types of determination values set in each table, "0", "1", and "2", and the more advantageous the table is for the player, the larger the determination value is set. This determination value is used to determine the combination of the variation pattern selection tables set for each special symbol.

Specifically, among the fluctuation pattern selection tables set for the first special symbol, "0" is set as the judgment value of the first short fluctuation table, and "1" is set as the judgment value of the first middle fluctuation table. It is set, and "2" is set as a determination value of the first length variation table. That is, as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the value of the determination value is set so as to be easily selected as the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time.

On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol, "0" is set as the judgment value of the second length fluctuation table, and "1" is set as the judgment value of the second middle fluctuation pattern. "2" is set as the determination value of the second short fluctuation pattern. That is, as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the value of the determination value is set so that the easier it is to select the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time.

Here, in the present modification, it is advantageous for the player that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped before the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is long, it is advantageous for the player. That is, when the variation pattern selection table having a large value of the above-mentioned determination value is set as the variation pattern for the first special symbol, it is in an advantageous state for the player. Further, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is also advantageous for the player. That is, even when a variation pattern selection table having a large determination value is set as the variation pattern for the second special symbol, it is in an advantageous state for the player.

As a result, as a combination of the variation pattern selection tables set for each special symbol, it is very advantageous for the player when the variation pattern selection table having a large judgment value is set for each special symbol. It becomes a state. That is, the larger the total value of the determined values of the variable pattern selection table for each set special symbol, the more advantageous the player is.

Therefore, in the present modification, the back image suggesting the degree of advantage for the player is selected based on the total value of the above-mentioned determination values and the value of the effect counter 223 g. Details will be described later, but the larger the total value of the judgment values, the easier it is to select the back image with a high degree of expectation. Conversely, the smaller the total value of the judgment values, the higher the degree of expectation. The rear image with a low value is easily selected. This makes it possible to simplify the process of selecting a back image that suggests a degree of advantage for the player, and reduce the processing load.

Next, the contents of the rear image selection table 222c in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). The back image selection table 222c is a table that is referred to when a back image is selected in the back image change process 7 (S2651). The back image selection table 222c is provided with a high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 and a low-reliability back image selection table 222c2. In the back image selection table of each reliability, the same back image as in the fourth embodiment (in ascending order of expectation, "town", "mountain", "sandy beach", "seabed", "fish school") is defined. ing.

The details will be described later, but in the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1, when the total value of the discrimination values is small (“0”), the back image with high expectation (the back image of the “seabed”) Is specified not to be selected. On the contrary, when the total value of the discriminant values is large (“4”), it is stipulated that the rear image with low expectation (the rear image of the “town”) is not selected. On the other hand, in the low-reliability rear image selection table 222c2, even when the total value of the discrimination values is small (“0”), the rear image with high expectation (the rear image of the “seabed”) is displayed. It is stipulated that it may be selected. In addition, even if the total value of the discriminant values is large (“4”), it is stipulated that a rear image with a low degree of expectation (a rear image of “town”) may be selected. There is. That is, the rear image set based on the high-reliability rear image selection table 222c1 makes it easy to predict the current variation pattern selection table (that is, the degree of advantage for the player) set for each special symbol. It is a so-called highly reliable back image. On the other hand, the rear image set based on the low-reliability rear image selection table 222c2 is difficult to predict the current variation pattern selection table (that is, the degree of advantage to the player) set for each special symbol. It is a so-called back image with low reliability.

Here, the details of the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (c). In the high-reliability rear image selection table 222c1, in the rear image setting process 7 (see FIG. 119) described later, the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter is smaller than 10, and the value of the effect counter 223g is “151 to 198”. Is referenced to select a back image (see S5055 in FIG. 119).

When the total value of the judgment values of the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is "0", the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "city" is set for the value "0 to 99" of, the back image of the "mountain" is set for the value "100 to 189" of the effect counter 223 g, and the value "190" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of "sandy beach" is set for "~ 198".

When the total value of the determination values is "1", the rear image of the "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 149" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "mountain" is set, and the back image of the "sandy beach" is set for the values "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223 g.

When the total value of the determination values is "2", the back image of the "mountain" is set for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "100 to 179" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "sandy beach" is set, and the back image of the "seabed" is set for the values "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223 g.

When the total value of the determination values is "3", the back image of the "mountain" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 149" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "sandy beach" is set, and the back image of the "seabed" is set for the values "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223 g.

When the total value of the judgment values is "4", the back image of "sandy beach" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and the value "50 to 179" of the effect counter 223 g is set. The back image of the "seabed" is set, and the back image of the "fish school" is set for the values "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223 g.

Next, the details of the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (d). In the low-reliability rear image selection table 222c2, in the rear image setting process 7 (see FIG. 119) described later, the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery count counter 223r is smaller than 10, and the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is When it is "0 to 2", it is referred to for selecting a back image (see S5054 in FIG. 119).

When the total value of the judgment values of the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is "0", the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "town" is set for the value "0 to 99" of, the back image of the "mountain" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the effect counter 223 g, and the value "150" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "sandy beach" is set for "~ 189", and the back image of the "seabed" is set for the value "190 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

When the total value of the determination values is "1", the rear image of the "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 149" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "mountain" is set, the back image of the "sandy beach" is set for the value "150 to 179" of the production counter 223g, and the "seabed" is set for the value "180 to 189" of the production counter 223g. The back image of is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "2", the rear image of the "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 99" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "mountain" is set, the back image of the "sandy beach" is set for the value "100 to 179" of the production counter 223g, and the "seabed" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the production counter 223g. The back image of is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "3", the rear image of the "town" is selected for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 99" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "mountain" is set, the back image of the "sandy beach" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the production counter 223g, and the "seabed" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the production counter 223g. The back image of is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "4", the rear image of the "town" is selected for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223 g, and for the value "50 to 99" of the effect counter 223 g. The back image of the "mountain" is set, the back image of the "sandy beach" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the production counter 223g, and the "seabed" is set for the value "150 to 189" of the production counter 223g. The back image of the "fish school" is set with respect to the value "190 to 198" of the effect counter 223 g.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the third embodiment will be described. First, the variation display setting process 7 (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. The variation display setting process 7 (S2113) in the modified example of the third embodiment adds the processes of S2671 and S2672 to the variation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 89) in the third embodiment, and the back surface. The difference is that the rear image change process 7 (S2651) is executed instead of the image change process (see FIG. 90), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 7 (S2113), first, when it is determined in the process of S2601 that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c is on (S2601: Yes), S2602 and S2601, as in the third embodiment. The process of S2603 is executed. When the process of S2603 is completed, the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is added by 1 (S2671), and the process proceeds to the process of S2604.

In the process of S2604, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2604: Yes), the processes of S2605 and S2606 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment. When the process of S2606 is completed, the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S2672), and the process proceeds to the process of S2607.

In this way, until the fluctuation based on the second special symbol is started, the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter 223r is not initialized, and one by one each time the fluctuation based on the first special symbol is started. It will be added. As a result, when the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter 223r is large, the game ball is not inserted into the second winning opening 64b, and the game ball is inserted only into the first winning opening 64a. Can be determined to be executed.

In the processing of S2607 to S2612, the same processing as the processing of S2607 to S2612 of the third embodiment is executed. After that, the rear image change process 7 is executed (S2651), and this process is terminated.

Here, the rear image selection process 7 (S2651) executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 118) will be described with reference to FIG. 119. The back image selection process 7 (S2651) in the modified example of the third embodiment adds the processes of S5051 to S5055 to the back image selection process (see FIG. 90) in the third embodiment in place of the process of S5003. It differs in that it does, and is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the rear image selection process 7 (S2651), first, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment, and the variable pattern selection table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set. It is discriminated from the fluctuation pattern selection table (S5001, S5002).

When the processing of S5002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter is 10 or more (S5051). In the process of S5051, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter is 10 or more (S5051: No), until the variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, the degree of expectation). (Until a high back image is displayed), there is a high possibility that an illegal game is being performed in which a game ball is gradually inserted into the first winning opening 64a. Therefore, in this case, the rear image of the "city" is selected (S5052) regardless of the set variable pattern selection table for each special symbol, and the process proceeds to S5004. As a result, even if a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set, a rear image with a high degree of expectation is not set, so that the above-mentioned illegal game is prevented (suppressed) from being executed. Can be done.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5051, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery counter is smaller than 10 (S5051: Yes), the back surface is based on the variation pattern selection table set for each special symbol. In order to set the image, the process proceeds to S5053.

In the process of S5053, it is determined whether or not the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is 0 to 2 (S5053). In the process of S5053, when it is determined that the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is 0 to 2 (S5053: Yes), the rear image is selected using the low reliability rear image selection table 222c2 (S5054). , S5004. Since the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is updated between 0 and 3 as described above, the probability that the back image is selected using the low reliability back image selection table 222c2 is 3/4. (75%).

On the other hand, in the process of S5053, when the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is determined to be 3 (S5053: No), the rear image is selected using the highly reliable rear image selection table 222c1 and the effect counter 223. Then (S5055), the process proceeds to S5004. Since the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is updated between 0 and 3 as described above, the probability that the back image is selected using the highly reliable back image selection table 222c1 is 1/4. It becomes (25%).

After the process of S5004, the processes of S5004 to S5007 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the modified example of the third embodiment, the rear image is set based on the combination of the variation pattern selection tables set for each special symbol (that is, the degree of advantage for the player). To. In this case, until the variable pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set (that is, until the rear image with high expectation is displayed), the game ball is gradually inserted into the first winning opening 64a. There is a possibility that a game will be played. Therefore, in this modification, it is determined by counting (counting) the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r that the game ball has entered only in the first winning opening 64a. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered only in the first winning opening 64a, the rear image with a low degree of expectation (“) regardless of the variable pattern selection table for each special symbol set. It is configured to set the rear image) of "City". As a result, even if the variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set, the rear image having a high degree of expectation is not set, so that the above-mentioned illegal game can be prevented (suppressed) from being executed.

In this modification, a determination value is given to the variation pattern selection table for each special symbol based on the degree of advantage for the player. Then, the degree of advantage for the player is determined based on the total value of the determination values of the variable pattern selection table for each special symbol that has been set, and the back image is selected. Therefore, it is not necessary to prescribe the degree of advantage for the player according to all the combinations of the variable pattern selection tables for each special symbol that have been set. This makes it possible to simplify the process of selecting a back image that suggests a degree of advantage for the player, and reduce the processing load.

<Modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. In the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern selection table that is advantageous for the player is used for a predetermined period from the end of the jackpot game (until the lottery of the special symbol is performed once in the present embodiment). Is configured to select the variation pattern of each special symbol. As a result, even after the jackpot game is completed, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the main controller 110 has been changed. The fourth is about other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in a modified example of the fourth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (a). In this modification, a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f in ROM 202 is changed. FIG. 120A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f after the end of the jackpot in the variation pattern selection table 202f. Since the other configurations of the ROM 202 are the same as those of the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, the fluctuation of the second special symbol has a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation of the first special symbol for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (in this modified example, until the fluctuation is executed once). Fluctuation patterns are specified. As a result, in the state where the game ball enters the second winning opening 64b during the jackpot game and the winning of the second special symbol is suspended, the change of the second special symbol is the first special after the end of the jackpot game. It will be stopped before the symbol changes. That is, it can be in an advantageous state for the player.

Specifically, when the number of remaining selections after the jackpot ends is 1 or more, in the first special symbol, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A (variation time) is obtained with respect to the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. 5 seconds) is set, and in the second special symbol, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (b). As shown in FIG. 120 (b), the RAM 203 of the present modification has the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 big hit and after the end of the special figure 2 big hit with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 80). The difference is that the remaining selection number 203v is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is a counter for counting (measuring) a predetermined period from the end of the jackpot game (in the present embodiment, until the change of the first special symbol is executed once). Is. The remaining selection number 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is set to 1 when it is determined in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 123) that it is the ending timing of the jackpot game (see S1491 in FIG. 123). In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (see FIG. 121), when a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table after the end of the jackpot, 1 is subtracted (see S552 in FIG. 121).

The number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is a counter for counting (measuring) a predetermined period from the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the change of the second special symbol is executed once). Is. The number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is set to 1 when it is determined in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 123) that it is the ending timing of the jackpot game (see S1492 in FIG. 123). In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (see FIG. 122), when a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table after the jackpot ends, 1 is subtracted (see S952 in FIG. 122).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. First, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment is a process of S551 to S554 with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the fourth embodiment. The difference is that the above is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304), first, the processes S501 to S505 are executed in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment. Then, the process proceeds to S551.

In the process of S551, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is greater than 0 (S551). In the process of S551, when it is determined that the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 0 (S551: No), the current gaming state changes for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, it varies. Is not (until it is executed once). In this case, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 1 (S551: Yes), the current gaming state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, so S552. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S552, the value of the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is subtracted by 1 (S552), and the process proceeds to the process of S553. In the process of S553, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted special figure 1 jackpot remaining number of selections 203u is 0 (S553). In this modified example, since the value set for the remaining selection number 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 1, the subtracted number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is always 0.

In the process of S553, when it is determined that the value of the remaining selection number 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 0 (S553: Yes), the current gaming state (states A to C) with respect to the first special symbol ) Is set, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S553, if it is determined that the value of the remaining selection number 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is not 0 (S553: No), the process of S554 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment is a process of S951 to S954 with respect to the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 38) in the fourth embodiment. The difference is in the addition of, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704), first, the processes S901 to S905 are executed in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment. Then, the process proceeds to S951.

In the process of S951, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is greater than 0 (S951). In the process of S951, when it is determined that the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 0 (S951: No), the current gaming state changes for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, it varies. Is not (until it is executed once). In this case, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S951, when it is determined that the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 1 (S951: Yes), the current gaming state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, so S952 Move to the processing of.

In the process of S952, the value of the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is subtracted by 1 (S952), and the process proceeds to the process of S953. In the process of S953, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the subtraction of the special figure 2 jackpot is 0 is 0 (S953). In this modified example, since the value set for the remaining selection number 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 1, the subtracted number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is always 0.

In the process of S953, when it is determined that the value of the remaining selection number 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 0 (S953: Yes), the current gaming state (states A to C) with respect to the second special symbol ) Is set, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S953, if it is determined that the value of the remaining selection number 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is not 0 (S953: No), the process of S954 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the jackpot control process 8 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. The jackpot control process 8 (S1304) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment is different in that the processes of S1491 to S1493 are added to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 45) in the fourth embodiment, and other The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S1304), first, the processes of S1401 to S1409 are executed as in the fourth embodiment. In the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is the ending timing of the jackpot game (S1409), the ending command is set (S1410), the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), and the process proceeds to the process of S1491.

In the process of S1491, 1 is set to the special figure 1 jackpot residual variation number 203u (S1491), and then 1 is set to the special figure 2 jackpot residual variation number 203v (S1492). By setting each jackpot residual fluctuation number by the processing of S1491 and S1492, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined period after the jackpot game is completed.

When the processing of S1492 is completed, the variation pattern selection table 202f after the end of the jackpot is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol (S1493). Then, as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, the variation pattern selection table 202f after the end of the jackpot is set (S1494), and this process is terminated. By the processing of S1493 and S1494, in a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot, the fluctuation can be executed in a fluctuation pattern different from the normal time (the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops first).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the player has a predetermined period from the end of the jackpot game (until the lottery of the special symbol is performed once in the present embodiment). It is configured to select the variation pattern of each special symbol using the advantageous variation pattern selection table. As a result, even after the jackpot game is completed, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Structure in which special figure 1 always changes when the change of special figure 2 starts due to simultaneous fluctuation)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and an entry ball for setting a period during which the game ball can enter the second entry means. The first identification information is dynamically displayed based on the control means and the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. It has a display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means. When the second ball entry means is set to the ball entry period, the ball entry control means is characterized in that it is within a predetermined period after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. Game machine A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine A1, the game ball can enter the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the second entry means. The first identification information is dynamically displayed based on the ball entry control means for setting a different period and the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A display means in which the second identification information is dynamically displayed based on the ball, and a privilege grant that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific second identification information is displayed in the display means. The ball entry control means has means, and when the second ball entry means is set to the ball entry period, it is determined after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. Within the period. As a result, when the game ball enters the second entry means, the game ball enters the first entry means earlier than that, so that the first identification information is dynamically displayed first. Since it is executed, the dynamic display of the second identification information to which the privilege can be given can be configured to be executed later, and the player is expected to dynamically display the second identification information of the first identification information. It can show a dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved. Further, since the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information can be suppressed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive granting of benefits.

In the game machine A1, the ball entry control means is varied into a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. The first state includes a variable member and a variable control means for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game ball can enter the ball. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the variable member is made variable by the variable control means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the ball entry control means is a variable member that is variable to a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. , The variable control means for varying the variable member from the first state to the second state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the variable to the one state as a period during which the game ball can enter. The member is made variable by the variable control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem that the second identification information is dynamically displayed before the first identification information can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the privilege granting means can grant a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player than the privilege when the predetermined first identification information is displayed on the display means. A game machine A3 characterized by.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1 or A2, the following effects are played. That is, the privilege granting means can grant a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player than the privilege when the predetermined first identification information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the dynamic display of the second identification information.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the second ball entry means is the first, which is shorter than the shortest dynamic display period of the first identification information after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. A game machine A4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position where it can enter a ball within a period of time.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the following effect is played. That is, the second ball entry means is a position where the game ball can enter the ball within the first period, which is shorter than the shortest dynamic display period of the first identification information, after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. It is located in. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the second entry means during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, a dynamic display executing means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the predetermined first identification. When the dynamic display displayed by the information and the dynamic display displayed by the specific second identification information are executed at the same time, the dynamic display is displayed first with the predetermined first identification information. Has a termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the dynamic display of the specific second identification information with the second identification information different from the specific second identification information when the above is completed. A game machine A5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effect is played. That is, a dynamic display executing means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and a dynamic display displayed with the predetermined first identification information. , When the dynamic display displayed by the specific second identification information is executed at the same time, and when the dynamic display is displayed first by the predetermined first identification information and the dynamic display ends, the specific It has an termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information with the second identification information different from the specific second identification information. Therefore, the advantages and disadvantages can be changed depending on the dynamic display period executed by the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively, and there is an effect that a novel playability can be provided to the player.

In any of the game machines A2 to A5, the ball entry control means is detected by the detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball to enter the first ball entry means and the detection means. Based on this, the gaming machine A6 is characterized by having a period determining means for determining a period from the first state to the second state of the variable member by the variable control means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A2 to A5, the following effects can be played. That is, the ball entry control means is a detection means that detects the passage of a game ball that will enter the first ball entry means, and the variable control means based on the detection by the detection means. It has a period determining means for determining a period from the first state to the second state of the variable member. Therefore, there is an effect that the profit given to the player can be changed depending on the period determined by the period determining means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, there is a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the discriminating means is specified by the discriminating means. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means when the determination result of the above is determined.

According to the game machine A7, in any of the game machines A1 to A6, a privilege advantageous to the player is given by discriminating a specific discrimination result, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved. ..

In the game machine A7, when a special discrimination result is discriminated by the discriminating means, a special privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege is given by the privilege granting means. Machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A7, a special privilege that is more advantageous to the player is given, so that there is an effect that the game can be given a fresh taste.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the variable ball entry means. Based on the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition and the privilege being granted by the privilege granting means, the variable ball entering means is moved from the second state to the first. It has a variable control means that can be changed to a state, and the privilege giving means is characterized in that when a game ball enters the specific area, a special privilege that is more advantageous than the privilege is given. Game machine A9 to play.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the player can expect the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to pass through a specific area, and the game can be expected. It has the effect of improving the interest.

<Characteristic B group> (Simultaneous fluctuation, setting the deviation to a small hit, special 1 small hit short open, special 2 small hit long open configuration)
Based on the first ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the game ball entering the first ball-entry means, the first The discrimination means that executes the discrimination and executes the second discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the first identification information based on the discrimination result of the first discrimination, and the second discrimination. A display means in which the second identification information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination is displayed at the same time, and a dynamic display capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. The execution means, the dynamic display period determination means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the said based on a predetermined determination result. When the first identification information is displayed, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the game is more than the first privilege game. The privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game that is advantageous to the person, the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result, and the second identification information based on the specific second determination result are simultaneously present. In the case of dynamic display, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result is completed first, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is completed. It is characterized by having an termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the display with the second knowledge identification information indicating the discrimination result based on the discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result. Game machine B1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine B1, the game ball has entered the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means. Based on this, the first determination is executed, and the determination means for executing the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means and the first determination result based on the determination result of the first determination. The display means in which the 1 identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second discrimination are displayed at the same time, and the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the display means, respectively. A dynamic display execution means capable of determining a dynamic display period, and a dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. When the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the said Based on the privilege game execution means capable of executing the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result, and the specific second determination result. When the second identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed at the same time, and the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result is completed first, the specific second determination result is displayed. An termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second identification information indicating the discrimination result based on the discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result. Have. Therefore, by stopping the dynamic display of the second identification information before the dynamic display of the first identification information, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute a privileged game, and it is possible to provide a novel game property. Therefore, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine B1, a specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Special privilege game execution means to be executed, and an operation means for operating the ball entry guide member in the first motion in which the game ball is easy to enter the specific ball entry means and the second motion in which the game ball is harder to enter than the first motion. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that, when the second privilege game is executed, the operation means thereof is easier to execute the first operation than the first privilege game.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, a special entry means capable of entering a game ball and a special privilege game for executing a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game when the game ball enters the specific entry means. It has a privilege game execution means and an operation means for operating the ball entry guide member in a first motion in which the game ball easily enters the specific ball entry means and a second motion in which the game ball is harder to enter than the first motion. However, the operation means is easier to execute the first operation when the second privilege game is executed than the first privilege game. Therefore, the privilege to the player can be changed depending on whether or not the game ball is allowed to enter the specific ball entry means by the second privilege game executed when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the player in multiple stages.

In the game machine B2, the operation means sets the period for operating the ball entry guide member to a position where the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means longer in the first operation than in the second operation. A game machine B3 characterized by being something to do.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2, the following effects are played. That is, the operation means sets the period for operating the ball entry guide member to a position where the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means in the first operation longer than in the second operation. is there. Therefore, it is possible to switch between advantages and disadvantages with easy control, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

In the game machine B2 or B3, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game The specific ball-entry means includes a variable control means that changes the variable ball-entry means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the specific ball-entry means is the variable ball-entry means. The game machine B4, characterized in that the game ball that has entered the ball is arranged at a position where the ball can enter.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2 or B3, the variable ball entry means is put into the first state by executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game, and the specific ball entry means is entered. Since the opportunity to enter the ball is given, there is an effect that the value of the first privilege game or the second privilege game can be improved.

In the game machine B4, when the first privilege game is executed, the operation means performs the first operation before the variable ball entry means enters the first state, and then the first operation is performed. Two movements are executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the first movement is executed during the period when the variable ball entry means is in the first state. Game machine B5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered into the specific ball entry means during the second privilege game, and the value of the second privilege game can be improved.

In either the game machine B4 or B5, the first privilege game and the second privilege game are characterized in that the variable ball-entry means is changed to the first state the same number of times. B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4 or B5, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the difference between the first privilege game and the second privilege game from the operation of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which whether or not to enter the specific ball entry means is determined from the type of the privilege game.

<Characteristic C group> (Give a type to the small hit and switch the variable table of special 2 with the small hit of special 1)
A discrimination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and a first determination based on the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second discrimination, and the display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively. A possible dynamic display means and a variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the display of the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result. A game machine C1 characterized by having.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine C1, the first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second determination is executed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the second determination and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information. A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each, and a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the display of the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result. It has a variable control means that makes it variable. Therefore, since the dynamic display period executed for the second identification information is changed by displaying the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result, the game playability is changed according to the determination result of the first determination. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine C1, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. The gaming machine C2 is characterized by having a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege in the case of the case.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has a privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege. Therefore, since the dynamic display period in which the second discrimination is determined, which is advantageous to the player, is variable depending on the discrimination result of the first discrimination, the player is also interested in the display of the first identification information, which has little profit. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, respectively, and the predetermined determination result. When the first identification information based on the above and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first. Then, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result is provided with an ending means for displaying and ending the second identification information based on a determination result different from the specific determination result. A game machine C3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the first identification based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is completed first, the specific identification information is displayed. It has a terminating means for displaying and terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous for the player, and there is an effect that the player can be expected to play the game dynamically in the short dynamic display period. ..

In the game machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is executed with priority given to the dynamic display of the identification information set as priority based on a predetermined priority condition. The gaming machine C4, characterized in that it has a priority means for

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is set to be prioritized based on a predetermined priority condition. It has a priority means for preferentially executing the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and their operation. The setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is determined by the target display period determining means, and the setting means has the first identification information indicating the predetermined determination result. The gaming machine C5 is configured so that the dynamic display period group corresponding to the second identification information can be variably set based on the display.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, and the dynamic display period determining means thereof. It has a setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the target display period is determined, and the setting means is based on the fact that the first identification information indicating the predetermined determination result is displayed. It is configured so that the dynamic display period group corresponding to the second identification information can be variably set. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage of the game can be easily changed by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any of the game machines C2 to C5, when a special determination result is determined by the first determination or the second determination by the determination means, the player is given more than the first privilege and the second privilege. The gaming machine C6, characterized in that an advantageous special privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C2 to C5, there is an effect that the player can be expected to play a game with a special determination result.

The game machine C7 is characterized in that any of the game machines C2 to C6 is set so that the special privilege is given as the second privilege when the special condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine C7, since the special privilege is given when the special condition is satisfied in any of the game machines C2 to C6, it is possible to further give the player an advantageous privilege. , There is an effect that the attractiveness of the second privilege can be improved.

In any of the game machines C2 to C7, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the variable ball entry means. Based on the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition and the second privilege being given by the privilege giving means, the variable ball entering means is moved from the second state to the above. The gaming machine C8, which has a variable control means that can be changed to the first state, and the privilege granting means grants the special privilege when the gaming ball enters the specific area. ..

According to the game machine C8, it is possible to make the player expect the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to pass through a specific area, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (SP for small hits where the fluctuation pattern of Special 2 can be switched)
A discrimination means that executes the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first condition, a display means that displays the first identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means that moves the first identification information. A dynamic display means for displaying the target, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the determination result, and predetermined When the first identification information indicating the determination result of is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game which is advantageous to the player, and the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. , The specific ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter, the first action that allows the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and the second action that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first action. The operation means for operating the operation member and the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, and the privilege giving means is the determination. Even when the first identification information based on the special discrimination result is displayed as the discrimination result by the means, the privilege is given, and the first dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is given. In the embodiment, at least a special dynamic display mode in which the determination ratio is set high is set in the case of the special discrimination result, and the special dynamic display mode is the predetermined discrimination result. Based on this, the gaming machine D1 is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine D1, the discriminating means for executing the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first condition, the display means for displaying the first discriminating information based on the discriminating result by the discriminating means, and the display means thereof. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and a dynamic display mode for determining the first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are determined based on the determination result. The display mode determining means, the privileged game executing means for executing the first privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information indicating the predetermined determination result is displayed, and the privileged game executing means for the privileged game executing means. When a game is executed, it is more difficult to enter the ball than the specific entry means that allows the game ball to enter, the first action that allows the game ball to enter the specific entry means, and the first action. It has an operation means for operating the operation member in the second operation, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. The privilege granting means grants the privilege even when the first identification information based on the special discrimination result is displayed as the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. In the first dynamic display mode, at least a special dynamic display mode in which the determination ratio is set high is set in the case of the special determination result, and the special dynamic display mode is the predetermined It is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the determination result of. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine D1, the discrimination means executes the second discrimination based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, and the display means is based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination. The second identification information is displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information, and the privilege game execution means is the second identification based on a specific determination result. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that when the information is displayed, the second privilege game having less benefits than the first privilege game can be executed.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, the discrimination means executes the second discrimination based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition, and the display means performs the second discrimination based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination. The information is displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information, and the privilege game execution means displays the second identification information based on a specific determination result. When this is done, the second privilege game, which has fewer benefits than the first privilege game, can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to change the advantages and disadvantages for the player between the first determination and the second determination, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine D2, the second privilege game is characterized in that the period during which the operation member becomes the first operation is set shorter than that of the first privilege game.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D2, the second privilege game is set to have a shorter period in which the operating member is in the first operation than the first privilege game, so that the privilege is given. There is an effect that it can be easily made difficult to be given.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the special dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode having a high expectation that a privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D3, the special dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which the privilege is highly expected to be given by the privilege giving means. Since the first privilege game is executed even when is not given, there is an effect that the disappointment of the player can be reduced.

In any of the game machines D2 to D4, the dynamic display means can dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. Machine D5.

According to the game machine D5, since the first identification information and the second identification information can be dynamically displayed at the same time on any of the game machines D2 to D4, there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed. ..

In the game machine D5, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed at the same time, the termination means for forcibly ending the other dynamic display based on the end of one dynamic display. A game machine D6, characterized in that it has.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the other is forcibly terminated in the dynamic display end timing of one by the ending means, so that more efficient game can be performed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine D6, when the dynamic display is forcibly terminated by the termination means, it is regulated that a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the identification information at which the dynamic display is terminated. The gaming machine D7, which is characterized by having such regulatory means.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, there is an effect that gambling can be suppressed by restricting the granting of benefits by regulatory means.

<Characteristic E group> (Switch between special 1 and special 2 fluctuation tables depending on the number of fluctuations)
A discrimination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and a first determination result of the first determination by the discrimination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the discrimination result and the second identification information based on the second discrimination result which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, and the first discrimination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information based on the above or the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the display means A dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information at the same time, and a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A plurality of dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and a plurality of dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information. A first dynamic display period group in which a dynamic display period is set and a second dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information are set. The group determining means for determining each type and the group determining means having the group change the type of the first dynamic display period group or the second dynamic display period group based on the establishment of the change condition. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is determined by

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine E1, the first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, the second determination is executed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. The display means on which the first identification information based on the first discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the above, and the second identification information based on the second discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, are displayed, and the display means thereof. When the first identification information based on the specific first determination result or the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player. A dynamic display executing means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the first dynamic display executing means dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, and the dynamic display period of the first identification information by the dynamic display period determining means. A first dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the above are set, and a second dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information are set. It has a group determining means for determining the type of the dynamic display period group, and the group determining means has the first dynamic display period group or the second dynamic display based on the establishment of the change condition. The type of period group is changed and determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E1, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means at the same time, either the first identification information or the second identification information is used. Is the dynamic display of the other when the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is completed before the other. The gaming machine E2 is characterized by having a stopping means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display by displaying the first identification information or the second identification information corresponding to a predetermined determination result.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means at the same time, the first identification information The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second identification result is earlier than the other. Since it has a canceling means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display by displaying the other dynamic display with the first identification information or the second identification information corresponding to the predetermined determination result. , There is an effect that the player can be expected to finish the dynamic display of the second identification information first.

In the game machine E1 or E2, a dynamic display period longer than a predetermined first period is determined for the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group determined by the group determination means. The long first dynamic display period group and the long second dynamic display period group that are easy to be performed, and the short first dynamic display period group and the short second dynamic that the dynamic display period shorter than the first period is easy to be determined. The gaming machine E3, characterized in that the display period group is at least set.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means have a predetermined first. The long first dynamic display period group and the long second dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period longer than one period is easily determined, and the short first in which the dynamic display period shorter than the first period is easily determined. Since at least the dynamic display period group and the short second dynamic display period group are set, there is an effect that the game playability can be changed by switching the dynamic display mode group.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the predetermined discrimination result is set to a discrimination result in which a privilege advantageous to the player is not given.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E2 or E3, a privilege advantageous to the player is not given, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, based on the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which it is difficult to enter, and the execution of the privilege game, the first state. The gaming machine E5 is characterized by having a variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means from the two states to the first state.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E4, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, so that the player can easily understand that the privilege game is being executed. It has the effect of being able to be recognized.

In the game machine E5, a specific area in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter, a regulated state that regulates the entry of the game ball into the specific area, and a release state in which the regulation is released. The privilege game execution means executes a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game when the game ball enters the specific area. A game machine E6 characterized by being a thing.

In the game machine E6, the variable means is in the released state in the privilege game executed based on the specific second determination result, as compared with the privilege game executed based on the specific first determination result. A game machine E7 characterized in that it is set so as to be easily variable.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, there is an effect that the second identification information is stopped before the first identification information, which is more advantageous to the player.

<Characteristic F group> (No special 1 hold, special 2 hold 1 configuration, aiming to win special 2 during big hit or small hit)
The first determination is executed based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the entry into the first entry means. , The discriminating means that executes the second discrimination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, the first identification information based on the first discriminating result that is the discriminating result of the first discrimination by the discriminating means The display means on which the second identification information based on the second discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, is displayed, and the first identification information based on the specific first discrimination result are displayed on the display means. In this case, when the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed and the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the first privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is displayed. 2. The privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, the dynamic display executing means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the dynamic display thereof. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the executing means and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, and the second identification information move. A storage means for storing the right to execute the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means when the target is displayed, and the specific first 1 When the identification information or the specific second identification information is displayed, the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information during the dynamic display period is other than the specific first determination result. Alternatively, the dynamic display period determining means includes a termination means for forcibly displaying a discrimination result other than the specific second discrimination result to end the dynamic display, and the dynamic display period determining means dynamically displays the first identification information. It is configured so that the dynamic display period of the second identification information, which is longer than the display period, can be easily determined, and when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is not executed, the determination is made in the storage means. It is difficult to memorize the right, and when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed, the storage means has an execution right control means that makes it easy to memorize the execution right. A game machine F1 characterized by.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine F1, based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the entry into the first entry means. , The determination means that executes the first determination and executes the second determination based on the entry into the second ball entry means, and the first determination result that is the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the first identification information and the second identification information based on the second discrimination result which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, and a first discrimination result based on the first discrimination result specific to the display means. 1 When the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is more than the first privilege game. Dynamic display execution capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time as the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game that is advantageous to the player. The means, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively. A memory that stores the right to execute the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. The specific means and the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information during the dynamic display period when the specific first identification information or the specific second identification information is displayed. The dynamic display period determining means includes an ending means for forcibly displaying a discrimination result other than the first discrimination result or a discrimination result other than the specific second discrimination result to end the dynamic display. When the dynamic display period of the second identification information, which is longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information, is easily determined, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game is not executed, the first privilege game or the second privilege game is not executed. , The execution right control means that makes it difficult to store the discrimination right in the storage means and makes it easy to store the execution right in the storage means when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed. And have. Therefore, since the game can be performed with the expectation that the execution right is memorized during the privilege game, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine F1 is characterized in that the game machine F1 has a delay means for delaying the entry of the game balls into the second entry means at intervals of a predetermined interval or more so that the game balls are entered one by one.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the second ball entry means has a delay means for delaying entry so that the game balls are entered one by one at intervals of a predetermined interval or more. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution right can be easily suppressed from being memorized.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the predetermined interval is formed in a period shorter than the execution period of the first privilege game.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, the predetermined interval is composed of a period shorter than the execution period of the first privilege game, so that the first privilege game can be achieved. When executed, it has the effect of making it easier to remember the execution right.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, a specific area in which the game ball can enter, a first state in which the game ball can easily enter the specific area, and a first state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. It has a variable member capable of being variable to two states, and a variable control means for changing the variable member to either the second state or the first state, and the variable control means is said to have the same variable control means. When the first privilege game is executed, the variable member is more easily changed to the first state than the second state, and when the second privilege game is executed, the variable member is moved to the first state. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is easier to change to the second state than the first state.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines F1 to F3, the following effects are played. That is, it is possible to change between a specific area in which the game ball can enter, a first state in which the game ball easily enters the specific area, and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. It has a possible variable member and a variable control means that changes the variable member to either the second state or the first state, and the variable control means executes the first privilege game. In this case, the variable member is more likely to be changed to the first state than the second state, and when the second privilege game is executed, the variable member is changed to the second state than the first state. Since it is easy to change, it is possible to give a privilege step by step, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game. The gaming machine F5 is characterized by having a variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means to the open state based on the above.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 or k to F4, the variable ball entry means is opened based on the execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, so that the first privilege game Alternatively, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the second privilege game is in progress.

In the game machine F5, the specific area is arranged at a position where a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter the game machine F6.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F5, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter a specific area based on the execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, and the interest of the game is Has the effect of improving.

In any of the game machines F2 to F6, the delay means has a rolling surface capable of rolling the game ball for a period of a predetermined interval or more.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F2 to F6, there is an effect that a predetermined interval or more can be secured by a rolling surface capable of rolling for a period of a predetermined interval or more. is there.

<Characteristic G group> (Structure that regulates the occurrence of hold in Special 2)
The first determination is executed based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the entry into the first entry means. , The discriminating means for executing the second discrimination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, the first identification information based on the first discriminating result which is the discriminating result of the first discrimination by the discriminating means, The display means on which the second identification information based on the second discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, is displayed, and the first identification information based on the specific first discrimination result are displayed on the display means. In this case, when the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed and the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the first privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is displayed. 2. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display execution thereof. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the means and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the second identification information are dynamically displayed. A storage means that stores the right to execute the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means when displayed, and the storage means described above. It is characterized by having a state setting means capable of switching between a first state in which the execution right is easily stored and a second state in which the execution right is less likely to be stored than the first state. Game machine G1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine G1, based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the entry into the first entry means. , The determination means that executes the first determination and executes the second determination based on the entry into the second ball entry means, and the first determination result that is the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the first identification information and the second identification information based on the second discrimination result which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, and a first discrimination result based on the first discrimination result specific to the display means. 1 When the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is more than the first privilege game. A privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, respectively. And the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively. A storage means for storing the execution right of the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. The storage means has a state setting means capable of switching between a first state in which the execution right is easily stored and a second state in which the execution right is less likely to be stored than the first state. Is. Therefore, since it is possible to make it a special state that the game ball continuously enters the second ball entry means, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine G1 is characterized by having a delay means for delaying the entry interval of the game ball to an interval equal to or higher than the first interval when the game ball enters the second entry means. Machine G2.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the delay means for delaying the ball entry interval of the game ball to an interval equal to or greater than the first interval. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from continuously entering the second ball entry means.

In the game machine G2, the delay means is arranged at a position where it can be guided to the second ball entry means, and the rolling means capable of rolling the game ball for the first period or more, and the rolling means thereof. The game machine G3 is characterized by having a guide portion for guiding the game ball that has been rolled for the first period or more to the second ball entry means.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the following effects are played. That is, the delay means is arranged at a position where it can be guided to the second ball entry means, and the rolling means capable of rolling the game ball for the first period or longer and the rolling means thereof are referred to as the first. It has a guide unit that guides a game ball that has been rolled for a period of time or longer to the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution right can be suppressed from being memorized during a period other than the privilege game.

In the game machines G1 to G3, the state setting means is set by switching to the first state based on the execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game. Game machine G4.

In the game machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G1 to G3, the execution right is easily memorized by executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game, and only the dynamic display of the second identification information is performed. It has the effect of making it easier to do. Therefore, there is an effect that the second privilege game, which is advantageous to the player, can be easily executed.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the open state in which the game ball can enter and the closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game are executed. A variable control means that changes the variable ball entry means in the open state, a specific area in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball in the specific area. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that it has a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed, so that an opportunity to put the game ball into a specific area is given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved. In addition, as the privilege given by the privilege granting means, the variable ball entering means is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied, the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or the second determination result is set high, and the like. Is equivalent.

In the game machine G5, the second privilege game is set so that the game ball can easily enter the specific area as compared with the first privilege game.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G5, by executing the second privilege game, the privilege can be easily given, and the execution right to dynamically display the second identification information is stored. Has the effect of making it more valuable.

<Characteristic H group> (Give a type to the small hit and switch the fluctuation table of special 2 with the small hit of special 1. Shift according to the number of fluctuations on the special figure 1 side)
A discrimination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and a first determination based on the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second discrimination, and the display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively. A variable control means that changes the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information when a possible dynamic display means and a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 characterized by having and.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine H1, the first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, the second determination is executed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the second determination and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information. Dynamic display in the dynamic display of the second identification information when the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each and the variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied. It has a variable control means that changes the period. Therefore, since the dynamic display period executed for the second identification information is changed by satisfying the variable condition that is satisfied by displaying the first identification information, the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. There is. If it is easy to select a second identification information having a short fluctuation time, the second identification information can be efficiently and dynamically displayed. Here, the variable condition corresponds to a display mode in which the first identification information is displayed, a number of times of dynamic display is a predetermined number, and the like.

In the game machine H1, when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. The gaming machine H2 is characterized by having a privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege in the case.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the following effects are played. That is, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the above two major benefits. Therefore, since the dynamic display period in which the second discrimination is determined, which is advantageous to the player, is variable depending on the discrimination result of the first discrimination, the player is also interested in the display of the first identification information, which has little profit. It has the effect of being able to.

The game machine H2 is characterized in that the variable condition is satisfied based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege, which has less privilege than the second privilege, is executed. It is possible to expect the establishment of variable conditions, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In the game machine H2, the variable condition is satisfied based on the number of times the first identification information is dynamically displayed becomes a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times or more.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H2, the number of times of the dynamic display of the first identification information can also be of interest to the player, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the predetermined When the first identification information based on the determination result and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is performed. When it ends first, it has an ending means for displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result and ending by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. A game machine H5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H4, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the first identification based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is completed first, the specific identification information is displayed. It has a terminating means for displaying and terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous for the player, and there is an effect that the player can be expected to play the game dynamically in the short dynamic display period. ..

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is prioritized based on a predetermined priority condition. The gaming machine H6, which has a priority means for executing the game.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is prioritized based on a predetermined priority condition. Since it has a priority means for preferentially executing the dynamic display of the set identification information, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and their operation. The target display period determining means has a setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is determined, and the setting means has the second setting means based on the establishment of the variable condition. The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that the dynamic display period group corresponding to the identification information can be variably set.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, and the dynamic display period determining means thereof. It has a setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the target display period is determined, and the setting means is the dynamic corresponding to the second identification information based on the establishment of the variable condition. It is configured so that the display period group can be variably set. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage of the game can be easily changed by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any of the game machines H2 to H7, when a special determination result is determined by the first determination or the second determination by the determination means, the player is given more than the first privilege and the second privilege. The gaming machine H8, characterized in that an advantageous special privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines H2 to H5, there is an effect that the player can be expected to play a game with a special determination result.

The game machine H9 is characterized in that any one of the game machines H2 to H8 is set so that the special privilege is given when the special condition is satisfied as the second privilege.

According to the game machine H9, when the special condition is satisfied in any of the game machines H2 to H8, the special privilege is given, so that the privilege that is more advantageous to the player can be given. , There is an effect that the attractiveness of the second privilege can be improved.

In any of the game machines H2 to H9, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the variable ball entry means. Based on the specific area in which the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition and the second privilege being granted by the privilege giving means, the variable ball entering means is moved from the second state to the above. A gaming machine having a variable control means that can be changed to a first state, and the privilege giving means grants the special privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. H10.

According to the game machine H10, it is possible to make the player expect the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to pass through a specific area, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine H10, the special privilege is the game machine H11 characterized in that a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed.

According to the game machine H11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H10, a privilege game is executed as a special privilege, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved. Here, when the second privilege is given, the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short because the second identification information may be given by stopping before the first identification information. There is an effect that the player can play the game with interest by being changed to the variable control means so as to be.

The game machine H10 has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the determination means determines a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result. The privilege is the gaming machine H12, wherein the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the determination means is set high until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine H12, in addition to the effect of the game machine H11, as a special privilege, the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result is set to be high, so that the player is given a high probability. It has the effect of increasing the value of the second benefit.

<Characteristic I group> (Special 1 small hit, special 2 variable variable. Transition to the ceiling on the special figure 1 side. H group similar version)
A discrimination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and a first determination based on the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second discrimination, and the display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively. Dynamic display means capable of, and dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means can be determined at a predetermined opportunity. When the display period determining means and the variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied, the display period determining means determines the dynamic display period in response to the dynamic display of the second identification information. The gaming machine I1 is characterized by having a variable control means for varying the dynamic display period.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and the game tends to be monotonous. There was a need to further improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game. Here, in the conventional game machine, the main interest of the game is changed only by changing the probability of determining the success or failure of the game, and the game tends to be monotonous. There has been a demand for a gaming machine that can change the advantageous state.

According to the game machine I1, the first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, the second determination is executed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the second determination and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information. The dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each and the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are determined at predetermined triggers. When the dynamic display period determination means that can be used and the variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied, the operation corresponds to the dynamic display of the second identification information. It has a variable control means for varying the dynamic display period determined by the target display period determining means. Therefore, since the dynamic display period determined for the second identification information is changed by satisfying the variable condition that is satisfied by displaying the first identification information, the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. There is. If it is easy to select a second identification information having a short fluctuation time, the second identification information can be efficiently and dynamically displayed. Here, the variable condition corresponds to a display mode (discrimination result) in which the first identification information is displayed, a predetermined number of times of dynamic display, and the like.

The game machine I1 has a dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods whose dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means is set, and the dynamic display period group is the first. 2. As the dynamic display period of the identification information, the first dynamic display period group in which the first dynamic display period is easily selected and the second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period are easily selected. At least two dynamic display period groups are set, and the variable control means is a type of the dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period of the second identification information is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the dynamic display period of the second identification information is changed by changing and setting.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the dynamic display period of the second identification information can be changed by changing the type of the dynamic display period group, so that the second identification information can be easily controlled. The period of identification information can be changed.

In the game machine I1 or I2, when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. The gaming machine I3 is characterized by having a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege when the prize is granted.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I1 or I2, the following effects are played. That is, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the above two major benefits. Therefore, since the dynamic display period in which the second discrimination is determined, which is advantageous to the player, is variable depending on the discrimination result of the first discrimination, the player is also interested in the display of the first identification information, which has little profit. It has the effect of being able to.

The game machine I3 is characterized in that the variable condition is satisfied based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I3, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege, which has less privilege than the second privilege, is executed. It is possible to expect the establishment of variable conditions, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In the game machine I3, the variable condition is satisfied based on the number of times the first identification information is dynamically displayed becomes a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times or more.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I3, the number of times the first identification information is dynamically displayed can also be of interest to the player, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

In any of the game machines I1 to I5, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. When the first identification information based on the determination result and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is performed. When it ends first, it has an ending means for displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result and ending by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. A game machine I6 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines I1 to I5, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the first identification based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is completed first, the specific identification information is displayed. It has a terminating means for displaying and terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous for the player, and there is an effect that the player can be expected to play the game dynamically in the short dynamic display period. ..

In any of the game machines I1 to I5, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is prioritized based on a predetermined priority condition. The gaming machine I7, which has a priority means for executing the game.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I5, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is prioritized based on a predetermined priority condition. Since it has a priority means for preferentially executing the dynamic display of the set identification information, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines I1 to I7, a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and their operation. The target display period determining means has a setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is determined, and the setting means has the second setting means based on the establishment of the variable condition. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the dynamic display period group corresponding to the identification information can be variably set.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I7, the following effect is played. That is, the dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, and the dynamic display period determining means thereof. It has a setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group in which the target display period is determined, and the setting means is the dynamic corresponding to the second identification information based on the establishment of the variable condition. It is configured so that the display period group can be variably set. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage of the game can be easily changed by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any of the game machines I3 to I8, when a special determination result is determined by the first determination or the second determination by the determination means, the player is more likely than the first privilege and the second privilege. The gaming machine I9, characterized in that advantageous special benefits are granted by the privilege granting means.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines I3 to I8, there is an effect that the player can be expected to play a game with a special determination result.

The game machine I10 is characterized in that any one of the game machines I3 to I9 is set so that the special privilege is given when the special condition is satisfied as the second privilege.

According to the game machine I10, since the special privilege is given when the special condition is satisfied in any of the game machines I3 to I9, it is possible to further give the player an advantageous privilege. , There is an effect that the attractiveness of the second privilege can be improved.

In any of the game machines I3 to I10, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the variable entry means for entering the ball. Based on the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition and the second privilege being given by the privilege giving means, the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the above. A gaming machine having a variable control means that is variable to a first state, and the privilege giving means grants the special privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. I11.

According to the game machine I11, it is possible to make the player expect the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to pass through a specific area, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine I11, the special privilege is the game machine I12, wherein the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed.

According to the game machine I12, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I11, the privilege game is executed as a special privilege, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved. Here, when the second privilege is given, the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short because the second identification information may be given by stopping before the first identification information. There is an effect that the player can play the game with interest by being changed to the variable control means so as to be.

The game machine I11 has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the determination means determines a special first determination result or a special second determination result. The privilege is the gaming machine I13, wherein the probability of being determined as the special first determination result or the special second determination result by the determination means is set high until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine I13, in addition to the effect of the game machine I11, as a special privilege, the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result is set to be high, so that the player is given a high probability. It has the effect of increasing the value of the second benefit.

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H12, and I1 to I13, the game machine is a slot machine. A game machine Z1 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H12, and I1 to I13, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A game machine Z2 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H12, and I1 to I13, the game machine is a pachinko machine. A game machine Z3 characterized by being fused with a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is successful, it is advantageous to the player. Some award games are executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a player's interest can be changed depending on the privileged game to be executed by setting a plurality of types of privileged games to be executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). ..
However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.
The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems, and to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition, and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition. , A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means and the second identification information based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination, and the display means for the first identification. The second identification is performed when a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the information and the second identification information and a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied. It has a variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of information.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is specified by giving the first privilege that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed in the game machine described in the technical idea 1. It has a privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege when the second identification information based on the determination result of is displayed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, and the variable condition is satisfied based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2. The variable condition is that the number of times the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed is a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times or more. It is established based on.
The game machine of the technical idea 5 can be changed between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter in the game machine described in any one of the technical ideas 2 to 4. Variable entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means can enter based on the establishment of a passing condition, and the second privilege are granted by the privilege granting means. Based on this, the variable ball-entry means has a variable control means that changes the variable ball-entry means from the second state to the first state, and the privilege-giving means is said to be said when the game ball enters the specific area. It grants special benefits.
The game machine of the technical idea 6 is the game machine described in the technical idea 5, and the special privilege is the execution of a privilege game that is advantageous to the player.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 7 is determined by the discrimination means as a specific first discrimination result as the first discrimination or a specific second discrimination result as the second discrimination in the game machine described in the technical thought 5. Based on the above, the special privilege has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the special privilege is determined by the determination means as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. The probability of being done is set high until the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 2 to 7, and the dynamic display executing means provides the display means with the first identification information and the second identification information. When the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the predetermined identification information can be dynamically displayed. When the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the determination result is completed first, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result is based on a determination result different from the specific determination result. It has a termination means for displaying and ending the second identification information.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, a discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first condition and executing the second discrimination based on the establishment of the second condition, and the discrimination means thereof. A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the first determination and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and the display means for displaying the first identification information and the first identification information. When a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the two identification information and a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information are satisfied, the second identification information is dynamically displayed. It has a variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the display. This has the effect of improving the interest of the player.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, the variable condition is satisfied based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in a predetermined determination result to which the first privilege, which is more disadvantageous than the second privilege, is given.
According to the game described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the variable condition is satisfied based on the number of times the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed becomes a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times or more. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of times the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines of Technical Thoughts 2 to 4. That is, the variable entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the game ball that has entered the variable entry means satisfy the passing conditions. A variable control that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state based on the specific area where the ball can be entered based on the above and the second privilege being granted by the privilege granting means. The privilege granting means grants the special privilege when the game ball enters the specific area. Therefore, when the second privilege is given, it is possible to enjoy whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 6, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 5, the special privilege is to execute the privilege game that is advantageous to the player. There is an effect that the interest can be improved by executing.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5. That is, the privilege of executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination by the determination means as the specific first determination result as the first determination or the specific second determination result as the second determination. The special privilege has a game execution means, and the probability of being determined by the determination means as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is set high until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, by passing through a specific area, the state of the game can be changed in an advantageous manner for the player, and there is an effect that the player can give a sense of accomplishment that the state of the game can be changed by himself / herself.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 8, in addition to the effect of any one of the technical ideas 2 to 7, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time, and the first identification based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is completed first, the specific identification information is displayed. It has a terminating means for displaying and terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, it is possible to make the first identification information and the second identification information interested in each dynamic display period, and there is an effect that a fresh game can be provided.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine )
81 Third symbol display device (display means )
S104 1st and 2nd dynamic display execution means 114 Display control device ( specific effect execution means)
S303, S703 Discriminating means
S304, S704 Dynamic display period determination means
S353, S753 Group determination means S609, S919 Variable control means
S1656 state setting means

Claims (8)

Judgment means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executing the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition.
A display means for displaying the first identification information based on the discrimination result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means and the second identification information based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination.
A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and
It is characterized by having a variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information when a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information is satisfied. A game machine to be. When the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege which is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the second identification information is given. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the variable condition is satisfied based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result. The variable condition according to claim 2, wherein the variable condition is satisfied based on the number of times the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed becomes a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times or more. Gaming machine. A variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter,
A specific area where the game ball that has entered the variable entry means can enter based on the establishment of the passing condition,
Based on the fact that the second privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the privilege granting means grants the special privilege when the gaming ball enters the specific area. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the special privilege is such that a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Execution of a privilege game for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination by the determination means as a special first determination result as the first determination or a special second determination result as the second determination. Have a means,
5. The special privilege is characterized in that the probability of being determined as the special first determination result or the special second determination result by the determination means is set high until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The game machine described. The dynamic display executing means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time.
When the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is performed. When the display ends first, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed as the end means for displaying and ending the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by having.

Images